Home

GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User

1. Show Interface C Hide Interface m File Extension bmp C ipg C paf Description Select Scanner Device This form is where you can scan your calibration certificates images and documents Note Your TWAIN device needs to be set before you can use the scan feature You can do this by clicking on the Select Scanner Device button The Select Source dialog will appear If the desired scanner is not highlighted as shown click on it to highlight it then click on the Select button and you will be returned to the Scan Certificate dialog Select Source x Sources CanoSe Cancel You can select the Scan button to start scanning your images after you have selected the device set the pixel type refer to your scanner literature for more information regarding pixel types and whether or not to see the scanner interface If the scanning is successful the scanned image will be displayed in the Image View Control prompting you to save the image and include a description if necessary EJ Save As x File Name 0000000004 jpg Folder Path C Temp Browse Description c 002 Procedure Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file When you close this form a new record will be added to the
2. Data from graph in MSA4 Figure 31 page 139 Prefill Calc Charts Record 14 1 gt PL b of 1 Print 200 Field Button Name Study Date Gage ID Gage Desc Study Type MSA Version Approved Comments Co Part No Part No Part Desc Characteristic Specification Limits Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Percentage Format Number Format The Information tab contains these fields and buttons Description This field defaults to the current date but you can change it Select the ID code for the gage you re using in the study Once you select a gage ID the gage s description will appear in this field Analytic is the only type in this module Refers to the Measurement Systems Analysis Reference Manual Use Version 4 for new studies Existing Version 3 studies may be updated for new features by changing to Version 4 Updates are reversible Select if study is approved Enter any comments such as the gage I D of a variable gage to be used for cross checking Enter your internal company part or job number if relevant Select a related part number such as the customer or supplier part number if relevant This field displays the description or name of the part if relevant In this field you ll see the characteristic that you are evaluating Be sure to enter the minimum and maximum Specification Limit values otherwise the software can t calculate the tolerance values
3. pC 2009 Ce O DatePart q Next Gages due in the fourth calendar quarter Due Date 4 Gages with descriptions that start with the letter C Like A D Gages with descriptions that are between A and D Gage ID Right Gage ID 2 Gage IDs that have 99 in the last two field 99 positions Is Null Gages with null blank descriptions Is Not Null Gages with descriptions that aren t null blank Adding New Records To add new records in Form View do one of the following 1 Click the New Record icon in the toolbar ll 2 Click the New Record navigation button hae 3 Use the keyboard shortcut CTRL Enter the information into the record and then repeat any of the above steps to add another new record To add new records in Datasheet View do one of the following 1 Click the New Record icon in the toolbar Ll Click the New Record navigation button Pak Use the keyboard shortcut CTRL Scroll to the bottom empty row na p Each of the above options takes you to the bottom of the datasheet and activates the last row which is always present for the addition of a new record This blank row is marked with an asterisk WEIGHT STO 100 GRAMs CLASS 3 STANDARD 100 GRAMS 1622003 Gi EIGHT STD 5000 GRAM CLASS 3 DIAL 5000 GRAM 98 200 rs E Enter the information into the record repeat these steps to add another new record Go To Command You can use the Go To command from
4. 8 19 2003 JHL Original Out Of Tolerance Out Yes Standard Rebuild or Retire Passed 0803 000 This gage was found out of tolerance Perform traceability on all critical parts measured with this gage since the last calibration This gage after adjustment was nearly exceeding the tolerances for this gage This gage should not be used to measure any critical parts 2 17 2003 JHL Good In aad Yes Calibration None Passed 0203 000 This gage was found to be within tolerance Gage is getting close to exceeding tolerances 8 15 2002 JHL Good In Yes Calibration None Passed 0802 000 Gage is found to be in calibration No further action is required 8 15 2002 JHL Good Yes Calibration None 0802 000 Gage is found to be in calibration No further action is required Record 14 4 J 2 gt gt t gt of 51 The History tab displays all calibration history for the selected gage ID These records are sorted by date in descending order this means that the most recent calibrations are at the top of the list GAGEtrak pulls this information from the data you record in Calibration Entry Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field Date This field shows the date for each calibration record By In this field you ll see the name of the user who performed the calibration Results Any additional results rec
5. After 3 Unsuccessful login attempts C Restrict Issue To Authorized Users For more information on GAGEtrak s security settings see Security in the System Administrator s Guide Click on the checkbox labeled Electronic Signature Login to require users to login with their User ID and password whenever they click on the Sign or Unsign button This feature helps prevent unauthorized signatures if it is not activated GAGEtrak will automatically record the currently logged in user as the signer when the Sign or Unsign button is clicked Logon GAGEtrak Electronic Signature Authenticat Password When Security is disabled you cannot use electronic signatures 124 GAGEtrak provides the option of scanning in certificates from TWAIN compliant scanners that can be stored with the calibration records Note If a calibration has been signed the calibration scan feature will be disabled and the user will not be allowed to delete edit or create new scans The scanned page files still exists if a scanned record is deleted and you will need to delete this file yourself using the File Manager supplied with your operating system The user will however be able to view print scans To begin scanning documents select the Scan New button The following form will appear S Scan Certificate m Pixel Type All Pixel Types C BandW Grayscale C RGB Color Palette Color J Scanner Interface
6. Chapter 12 MSA Entry Overview With MSA you can assess your measurement systems using the statistical test procedures of repeatability reproducibility bias stability and linearity collectively referred to as MSA studies This feature saves time and prevents the mistakes that you can make when you manually assess your measurement systems You ll soon find that it s an essential tool for analyzing and managing your MSA studies This feature was designed for calibration technicians metrologists inspectors and other quality control professionals who need a convenient easy to use method for documenting tracking and performing measurement systems analysis The software is based primarily on the techniques described in the AIAG MSA guide and other indusiry publications Before starting SPC capability studies or any type of repetitive measuring use MSA to make sure that your measurement system can give you reliable measurements Instructions for performing studies on your measurement system are given throughout this chapter About the Manual Software and Technical Support The purpose of this guide is to help you learn how to operate the software It s not meant to be an authoritative guide on conducting analyzing and interpreting your gage MSA studies Although this manual describes MSA study procedures they are simply the views as documented by various industry publications The software is simply a tool used to
7. IMPORTANT Database Location The next form allows you to specify the default database location for G4GEtrak 6 6 Any database files will be installed to this directory 1 Select the browse button to specify the desired shared database location 2 If vou are installing a stand alone workstation and will not be sharing any files with other workstations click Browse and select a local drive All GAGEtrak 6 6 database files will be installed to the following directory IF you will be sharing databases with other workstations vou will need to select a network drive IF you will not be sharing databases You may select a local drive IF Your administrator has set up a network director browse to that directory ou can choose not to copy the GAGEtrak 6 6 setup by clicking Cancel 9 Next GAGEtrak will ask if you want it to create backup copies of all of the files that it overwrites on your system We recommend that you select Yes and use the default location C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 BACKUP 228 Backup Replaced Files This installation program can create backup copies of all files replaced during the installation These files will be used when the software is uninstalled and a rollback iz requested If backup copies are not created you will only be able to uninstall the software and not roll the system back to a previous state Do vou want to create backups of the replaced
8. When a quantity is influenced by a large number of variables as is usually true the pattern of variation will tend to be Normal The Plus or Minus variability of this distribution is expressed as some multiple of the standard deviation such as 10 25 or 35 When entering these Plus or Minus values choose Normal 1 Normal 2 or Normal 3 and GAGEtrak will select the appropriate Divisor to be used to convert to a standard uncertainty 1 0 When you run into something different like 1 96 o just enter Normal for Probability Distribution and 1 96 for Divisor When you run into total variation like 65 or 5 150 you can enter Normal and specify a divisor of say 5 15 You could also divide by two before entering the Plus or Minus value and enter a Divisor of 2 576 Note that GAGEtrak 174 currently displays and prints GRR value as 1 o but other software or old printouts of GAGEtrak GRR studies may have been using 5 15 o Rectangular Distribution This Is the distribution of choice when you have no idea what the real distribution is This distribution occurs when something varies between limits from one extreme to the other An example would be air temperature as controlled by a thermostat Enter the plus or minus value as one half the difference between the extremes GAGEtrak will select a Divisor of 1 3 1 32 Note For temperature of solid objects see U shaped Distribution below Triangular Distribution This distribution occu
9. 10 Minutes Select Start of Week Sunday The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Skip Date Entry Skip Date Direction Calendar Color Coding Intervals Calendar Range Calendar Refresh Rate Select Start of Week Description GAGEtrak lets you define dates that you want skipped when it calculates calibration due dates These days called skip dates or skip days might include holidays vacation periods or plant shutdown periods Enter as many skip dates as necessary To delete a skip date click on the record selector box on the left of each date and press DELETE To skip days of the week like weekends check the box next to each day you want to skip If a calculated calibration due date falls on a skip date GAGEtrak schedules it on the following day or the previous day depending on the Skip Forward and Skip Backward set for each gage Select Skip Forward or Skip Backward in this window to set the default If you manuallyenter a calibration due date GAGEtrak won t apply your skip dates to it Four different colors are used to display the number of hours shown on the Calibration Calendar You can set the number of hours for each color according to the staffing level available on a daily basis The colors on the calendar will show at a glance which days are over or understaffed Use these fields to set the number of months to look ahead of or behind the current month If you wa
10. 50 360 Table Name ezy Users Description Security user list Associated From Security Field List UserlD Password FullName OperatorStamp DateTimeStamp OpenForm StatusRules Data Type Text key Text Text Text Date Time Text Long Integer Table Name Field Labels Description Custom field label information Associated From Field Labels Field List Field_Name Label_Text Status Bar Text FontWeight dftLabel Text dftStatus Bar Text Data Type Text key Text Text Long Integer Text Text Table Name Form _Captions Length 150 150 50 50 50 Length 100 100 255 100 255 Description Lists names and captions of every form Associated From Form Captions Field List Form_Name Form_Caption Data Type Text key Text Table Name Formula_Vars Length 50 100 Description Stores variables of customized calibration formulas Associated From Formula_Vars subform Field List ID Formula_ID Formula_Var Var_Value Data Type Long Integer key Long Integer Text Double Length 255 Table Name Gage_Attachments GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 361 Description Contains path and descriptions of attachments for a specific gage entry Associated From GageAttachmentsForm Gage Entry Attachments tab Field List ID Gage_ID AttachPath Description Data Type
11. Cancel 3 Inthe next screen enter the install code for your copy of GAGEtrak You can find this code inside the CD case that came with your software package Tip If you don t have an install code leave this field blank GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 225 Enter Install Code Trial Installation Leave the Install Code blank to install the trial evaluation copy of this software Permanent Installation If you have purchased this software please enter the Install Code number located on the outside of the CD envelope that came with your package Install nn Cancel If this is a new permanent installation you will be prompted for a Serial Number You can find your Serial Number inside the CD case that came with your software package Tip If you don t have an Serial Number leave this field blank Enter Serial Number Please enter your Serial Number You can find the Serial Number on the inside cover of your CD case If you cannot find your Serial Number you can leave it blank and continue with the installation Serial Number Cancel 226 5 Now the installation program will tell you that you will be choosing the location for the program on your hard drive Since this location is specific to each workstation do not select a network location We recommend using the default directory c Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 Program Location
12. ES Calibration Entry G Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Est Costs 23 00 Gage S N SN19803467 Casts 23 00 Calib Freq 365 Days 9 25 2009 Hours 2 Calibration Date 9 25 2008 ne 11 23 32 AM Account No Department QC v Certificate No 1208 000 mad y No User Name yv Uncertainty Calibration Type Calibration v Coverage Factor 4 Results Okay to use Deg of Freedom Action Required None Temperature 71 Deg F As Found Condition In Humidity 12 Calibration Status Pressure Interval Adjustment Method None Other Select Label Design Findings In tolerance of 7 Filtered To create a new calibration record click on the New Record button l and then select the desired gage record from the Gage ID drop down menu near the top of the window After you save the record by entering information into this screen such as your department GAGEtrak automatically retrieves any standards you set up for the gage 110 Since currently scheduled calibrations will continue at the old calibration frequency the New Calibration Frequency form will appear when new record is selected that will contain a recommended change based on what was selected for the Gage Frequency Adjusting Method under Gage Entry The recommended change will be updated in the future and could possibly revert to no change If that happens you will be asked during each calibration
13. Procedure Entry Procedure Image In the Procedure Image screen you can attach a picture or map to each procedure To do so double click in the OLE box ES Procedure Entry Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments Gage List Procedure Name CP22E Clone OLE Double Click in OLE box to insert h e A Record 14 1 gt PIP of 6 OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding This means that you can link any valid Windows object such as a graph picture or digitized movie into this field When you double click in the OLE field the Insert Object box appears and you can select the program in which you created or will create the object Note The list of object types varies depending on which programs are on your computer Microsoft Office Access objet re Create New Adobe Acrobat Document A O Create from File Media Clip Microsoft Equation 3 0 Display as Icon Microsoft Excel Chart Microsoft Excel Worksheet Microsoft Graph 2000 Chart Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Mi Result Inserts a new Adobe Acrobat Document object into your P document Use the scroll bar to select the type of object you want associated with the procedure then click OK When you select an object type the program in which you created the object opens so that you can edit the image if necessary When youre finished just click inside the OLE object box which links the obj
14. The fields of the Sub Report Custom Properties window are described in the following table Description This is a list box of all available reports Select the subreport you will use from the list Note Any new reports are generally found toward the bottom of the listbox The SQL statement used in opening the data source of your subreport This is a non editable field and is provided here so you can immediately see the tables and fields that are used in your subreport This is particularly helpful in finding out if the field you need to use for the link is contained in one or more tables Refreshes the SQL screen If your link field is contained in more than one table in your source you must specify the table to use for your field If only one source table uses this field you may leave the 7Zable field blank The name of the link field from your sub report The operator for comparing the link field to a value You have three choices for filter value e Fixed your report will be limited to only the value entered e Field this list box is taken from all the available fields of your master report e External fields in the main report SQL statement Click the Add button to add a criterion Select a criterion from the list and click on Remove to delete the selected criterion The Clearbutton deletes all criteria By default criteria are linked with the AND connector Select the OA button before adding a criterion to use OR inste
15. now using the New Procedure Name This change cannot be undone Field Button Description Name Source This read only control displays the Procedure name that will be cloned Procedure Name New Procedure Enter the name for the new procedure Name Clone button Click this button to create a clone of the source procedure Close button Clicking this will close the dialog without making a clone Copying Procedures from Another Windows Application You can use Windows Clipboard to copy procedures from other programs If you want to paste a procedure from the Clipboard 1 2 3 4 5 Open the program that contains the procedure you want to copy Highlight the text and then press CTRL C to copy it to Windows Clipboard In GAGEtrak s Procedure screen first enter a procedure name Next click within the Procedure textbox field Press CTRL V to paste the procedure CalPro Calibration Procedures To help save time when you re entering procedures CyberMetrics Corporation offers an optional add on product called CalPro CalPro is a database of complete step by step calibration procedures covering everything from gage blocks to micrometers and calipers CalPro procedures are industry proven editable procedures that you can automatically import into your GAGEtrak database or use separately as documents For information about purchasing CalPro please contact CyberMetrics Corporation or your distributor 86
16. CF SS SSpp 82 668 2 39 123 2 057 0 048 0 106 App x Parts Mean Square MSap SSp DFap 0 106 18 0 0059 Gage Error Sum Square SS SumSquareAll CF SS SS SSpp 41 373 39 123 0 106 2 057 0 048 0 039 Gage Error Mean Square MSerr SSrr Te DFerr 0 039 30 0 0013 F Value MS MS 0 0059 0 0013 4 5385 os fromF Table 1 310 ANOVA Table Components of Variance Most of these values are calculated using values from an F distribution table You can find F tables in most statistics manuals Sum Squares AW MSapp MSap nr EV MSgrr PV MS MSap kr R amp R AV los EV MSap MSgrr Y TV RR PVs Study Variation TV TV SS v0 0416 0 204 Repeatability EV JEV 40 00129 0 0359 TV Rep Std Dev Study Variation x 100 0 0359 0 204 x 100 17 6 Reproducibility AV AV 0 00091 0 0302 TV Std Dev TV 0 0302 0 204 14 8 Part x Appraiser INT I 0 00223 0 0473 DTV Std Dev TV 0 0473 0 204 23 2 GRR 160 GRR JRR 0 00444 0 0666 TV Std Dev TV 0 0666 0 204 32 1 Part to Part PV PV 40 03716 0 1928 TV Std Dev TV 0 1928 0 204 94 5 Linearity Bias and Uncertainty Linearity amp Bias Study Linearity studies measure multiple reference standards throughout the operating range of the gage Typical
17. Charts Print Record Id 4 A MIC of 6 The columns are explained in the table below Column Description Uncertainty The type of measurement error variation to be considered as a contributor Contributor Type Everything on this sub tab is Type A meaning it was determined from observation and statistics Plus or Minus The amount of plus or minus variation that was observed expressed as a maximum deviation or a standard deviation Probability The assumed pattern of variation for each type of error See Background on Probability Distribution Distributions Based on The information or calculation that was used to determine the Plus or Minus value DF Degrees of Freedom Think of DF as the effective sample size of the Plus or Minus value This will be less than the actual sample size depending on the method of calculation The Uncertainty Budget will use DF to determine a t Statistic Column Include Description Select Yes or Noto determine whether an item is to be included in the Uncertainty Budget This is the only column you can change The question of when to include an Uncertainty Contributor in the Uncertainty Budget is discussed in the table below Row Linearity with Linearity and Bias corrected Linearity with Only Bias corrected Linearity Uncorrected Bias corrected or not Resolution Repeatability or GRR When to include If Linearity was unacceptable use this
18. Close Description Select the gage ID to return The list is limited to issued gages only These fields show the date and time at which you received the gage they re prefilled with the current date and time In this field enter or select the name of the person that returned the gage Enter the number of cycles used or parts measured by the gage GAGEtrak adds this value to any previous cycles for the gage and then uses that value to calculate the Next Due Date for gages that you calibrate according to cycles Document any important comments such as damages or malfunctions This button clears all fields in the form If you have other gages to return click Next Gage to process the record When you re finished click the Close button to return to the main menu After you enter the Received Date and Time and save the record GAGEtrak changes the gage s Current Location field to its Storage Location 104 Calibration Status ES Calibration Status Schedule Past Duel Open Not Due lt Closed Qty Calibration NE R amp R et Service Request Totals a Calibration 18 REA al Service Request Ez Totals 5 A SE Total Cost Attribute Bore Gage Comparator DIAL Digital DIGITAL FORCE GAUGE Digital V ariable Digital ariable DROP INDICATOR FEELER GAGE SET 0 00 45 00 0 00 0 00 63 00 396 00 0 00 0 00 173 00 0 00
19. Electronic support is also available 24 hours a day to all registered users contact Technical Support at Email support cybermetrics com Internet www cybermetrics com NOTE TECHNICAL SUPPORT CANNOT BE PROVIDED UNLESS THE USER HAS FULLY COMPLETED AND MAILED IN THE ACCOMPANYING REGISTRATION CARD TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENTS All CyberMetrics Corporation products are trademarks or registered trademarks of CyberMetrics Corporation All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders SINGLE USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This is a legal agreement between you the end user and CyberMetrics Corporation CyberMetrics BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN THE DISKS AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS including written materials and binders or other containers TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED THEM FOR A FULL REFUND SOFTWARE LICENSE 1 GRANT OF LICENSE CyberMetrics grants to you the right to use one copy of the enclosed software program the SOFTWARE on a single computer If you wish to put the SOFTWARE on a network server you must purchase the same number of copies as computers attached to the network that use the SOFTWARE 2 COPYRIGHT The SOFTWARE Is owned by CyberMetrics or its suppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provis
20. EntryValue Long Integer Long Integer Table Name Group Gages Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Gage_ID Text key Group_ID Text key Gage_SN Text Description Text GM_Type Text Unit_of_Meas Text New_Field Text Table Name Group_Master Description Lists attributes of a particular group Associated From Security Field List Group_ID Description Group_Type Data Type Text key Text Text Table Name GRR_Results Description Contains Gage R amp R Studies Results GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 365 Length 150 50 Bm Re RY RY OR Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Length 50 50 50 Associated From Risk Analysis Stability Study Edit GRR Results Header Edit GRR Results Measurement Gage RR ANOVA Gage RR ANOVA Chart Gage RR Anova Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Attribute Gage RR Attribute Analytic Gage RR Avg Chart Gage RR Avg Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Comparison XY Chart Gage RR Comparison XY Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Error Chart Gage RR Error Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Form Gage 366 RR Form_MSA2 Gage RR Linearity Gage RR Linearity Chart Gage RR Linearity Chart A3 Gage RR NI Chart AP Gage RR Part Appraiser Avg Chart Gage RR Part Appraiser MSA2 Gage RR Range Chart AP Gage RR Range Chart AP_MSA2 Gage RR Repeatability Range Chart Gage RR Repeatability Range Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Residual Plot Chart Gage RR Run Chart Gage R
21. Not every Calibration Header record requires a corresponding Calibration Measurement record The Calibration Measurement table contains only calibrations that include actual calibration standards measurements One Calibration Header record may have many corresponding calibration records This table links gages to their calibration standards This table stores all saved filter criteria from the Advanced Form Filter This table stores the text for form labels This table should not be imported into the database All Gage Entry information is contained in this table In this table gages are linked with parts This table stores all of your gage R amp R studies and results All Gage Issue and Return information is in this table The form letters you create for repairs service requests or calibrations are stored in this table This table contains the service requests that you ve entered into GAGEtrak In this table you ll find all of the Part Entry information This table links gages with procedures Procedures are stored in this table The Result Codes table stores your Automatic Frequency Adjustment factors This table stores all of the dates that the program skips when it calculates Next Due Dates for gages This table stores the standards ID nominal etc values for each standard group One standard group may have no one or more entries in this table This table stores the information for the standard group
22. Version 5 5 means any GAGEtrak Version 5 5 The database and archive are in one file GTDATA55 MDB 5 5 Running the DTU overwrites your GAGEtrak 6 5 database Running the DTU incorporates new fields tables and reports that have been added to GAGEtrak 6 5 new client server users need to run it in order to transfer the prefilled settings such as status IDs to the client server database If you re a new user with an Access database these settings are already in the database so you do not need to run the DTU After you run the DTU your records will be in both your old and new versions of GAGEtrak However do not use your old version of GAGEtrak use the destination database that was used during the DTU which will contain current records from an earlier version of GAGEtrak to the newest version of GAGEtrak 333 334 Running the Data Transfer Utility To run the Data Transfer Utility click the Start button select Programs and then select the GAGEtrak 6 7 program group Choose Data Transfer Utility from this program group to use the Data Transfer Utility Client Server Versions Before You Run the DTU If you re using a client server version of GAGEtrak you must run scripts to set up your database and tables before you transfer your data To do so click the Run Scripts button on the main DTU screen ES Data Transfer Utility Wizard BE Data Transfer Utility Page 1 of 3 Choose Type of data transfer Run Scripts C Tra
23. amp Check the information that ye Additional Number must be a number Check the information that you have enter All associated Measurements for this Calibration Record will also be deleted Are All gages with the selected Gage Type will have the selected Procedure attache All of the gages for this Service Request have a Closed Status amp CHA 13 amp Do All Standards for this gage will be Deleted amp CHR 13 amp The Standards for this g Record 14 4 1 gt pi of 851 Message Title Error Invalid Error Invalid Invalid Entry Invalid Entry Calibration Record Delete Attach Procedure Close Service Request Standard Group The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Message Text Message Title Input text to collectively explain the need for the message Select a simple title that allows explains at a glance what the message is pertaining to for example Cannot open file contains the message Unable to View Print the selected File Please make sure that the file exist or is not corrupted Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button Close If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu Setup Security From the Security menu you can assign different rights to the program for each user Users belong to groups and inherit the security rights of each group they belong to Security
24. 10 221 1 Appraiser Score vs Attribute Appraiser vs Self Appraiser vs Reference Appraiser A B C A B C Total Inspected 6 6 6 6 6 6 Matched 5 5 5 5 i 3 False negative appraiser biased toward rejection 0 0 0 False positive appraiser biased toward acceptance 0 0 0 Mixed 1 1 1 95 UCL 99 6 99 6 99 6 99 6 99 6 99 6 Effectiveness 83 3 83 3 83 3 83 3 83 3 83 3 95 LCL 35 9 35 9 35 9 35 9 35 9 35 9 System Effective Score System Effective Score vs Reference Appraiser vs Each Other All Appraisers vs Reference Total Inspected 6 6 Matched 5 95 UCL 99 6 99 6 Effectiveness 83 3 83 3 95 LCL 35 9 35 9 Prefll Cale Print Record 14 4 2 gt D1 gt of 2 The following fields and buttons are available and apply to each column in which they appear There are comparisons of each appraiser to themselves each other and the reference values from the variable gage Field Button Description Total Inspected Number of parts inspected Matched Number of parts with consistent ratings False Negative Number of parts that were consistently rejected by the appraiser and accepted by the variable gage False Positive Number of parts that were consistently accepted by the appraiser and rejected by the variable gage Mixed Number of parts where an appraiser had inconsistent results 95 UCL A 95 Upper Confidence Limit for the Effectiveness score Effectiveness Percent of parts
25. 18 4 2 35781 2 32593 17 4 7 2 67253 9 2 2 65438 13 6 2 58127 18 1 2 56964 22 6 2 56263 2 53441 18 19 5 5 2 82981 10 8 2 76779 16 0 2 74681 21 3 2 73626 26 6 2 72991 2 70436 20 6 3 2 96288 12 3 2 90562 18 3 2 88628 24 4 2 87656 30 4 2 87071 2 84720 3 07794 13 8 3 02446 20 5 3 00643 27 3 2 99737 34 0 2 99192 2 97003 10 7 7 3 17991 15 1 3 12869 22 6 3 11173 30 1 3 10321 37 5 3 09808 3 07751 11 8 3 3 26909 16 5 3 22134 24 6 3 20526 32 7 3 19720 40 8 3 19235 3 17287 12 9 3 35016 17 8 3 30463 26 5 3 28931 35 3 3 28163 44 0 3 27701 3 25846 1 1 9 6 10 2 10 8 11 3 11 9 12 4 12 9 13 4 1 2 3 42378 3 49116 3 55333 3 61071 3 66422 3 71424 3 76118 3 80537 d2 3 33598 3 40676 3 47193 3 53198 3 58788 3 64006 3 68896 3 73500 Uncertainty Formulas p plus or minus value d divisor c sensitivity coefficient u individual uncertainty contribution df individual degrees of freedom Uc combined uncertainty df combined effective degrees of freedom k coverage factor U expanded uncertainty SP u P xc U gt u df e u 2 ay U u xk df for uncertainty of linearity are not specified in the usual literature GAGEtrak uses the df from a row 1 1 as a reasonable estimate The following Weibull approximati
26. ES Custom Reports Create Edit Report Delete Report Import Export 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label A3 Frequency Adjusting Report Audit Log Detail Report Cal Due Listing by Calibrator Cal Due Listing by Calibrator per Page Cal Due Listing by Calibrator w Cal Stds Cal Due Listing by Calibrator w Cal Stds and Proc Name Cal Due Listing by Calibrator w Proc Name Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc Detailed Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc per Page Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc w Cal Stds Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc w Cal Stds Detailed Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc w Cal Stds and Proc Name Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc w Cal Stds and Proc Name Detailed Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc w Proc Name Cal Due Listing by Curr Loc w Proc Name Detailed Cal Due Listing by Desc Cal Due Listing by Desc Detailed Cal Due Listing by Desc per Page Cal Due Listing by Desc w Cal Stds Cal Due Listina by Desc w Cal Stds Detailed Edit Selected Report 291 292 Create Edit Report The Create Edit Report tab displays a list of all available reports From this tab you can open the report editor in one of two ways you can select the title of a report in the listing and click the Edit Selected Report button to open the selected report for editing or you can click Create New Report to create a report completely from scratch For you to better understand the report editor canvas we ll start
27. Example Linearity Chart 1 000000 800000 600000 400000 200000 000000 200000 400000 600000 800000 2 000000 4 000000 6 000000 8 000000 10 000000 Reference Value Histogram The Histogram is discussed under Bias Tab Linearity Study Interpretation The Goodness of Fit value R3 of the linear regression line determines whether the biases and reference values have a good linear relationship This value will be a number between O and 1 the closer it is to 1 the better the linear relationship You can also evaluate goodness of fit by looking at the chart If the fit is adequate then apply three criteria 1 The horizontal zero bias line on the chart should fit within the confidence limits 2 The absolute value of the t Statistic for Slope should not be larger than t Critical 3 The absolute value of the t Statistic for Intercept should not be larger than t Critical If the regression line does not fit well do not apply the above criteria Study the chart for evidence of non linearity Non linearity can be acceptable if bias per part is always near Zero If a measurement system has significant linearity error look for these possible causes 1 Gage not calibrated properly at lower and upper ends of the operating range 2 Error in the minimum or maximum master 3 Worn instrument 4 Internal instrument design characteristics 166 5 Mistakes in measurement or typos If there is si
28. Field List Data Type Length HistID Long Integer key 4 CertStateMemo Memo 0 DateTimeStamp Date Time 8 PassState Boolean 1 354 Table Name CHArchive Description Contains archived calibration records Associated From CHArchiveViewfrm Field List Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time Calibration_Type Calibration_By Department Results Action_Required Approved Findings Calibration_Cost AcctNo TotalUncert ResultCode CalDateUpdated CertNo Time_Required Repair_Cost Repair_Hours CalFrequency CalFrequency_UOM NextDue Temperature Humidity Pressure Other CalibType UserDef1 UserDef2 UserDef3 UserDef4 UserDef5 UserDef6 Data Type Text key Date Time key Date Time key Text Text Text Text Text Long Integer Memo Double Text Double Double Long Integer Text Double Double Double Double Text Date Time Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 355 Field List Data Type Length UserDef7 Text 50 UserDef8 Text 50 UserDef9 Text 50 UserDef10 Text 50 UserDef11 Text 50 UserDef12 Text 50 UserDef13 Text 50 UserDef14 Text 50 UserDef15 Text 50 UserDef16 Text 50 UserDef17 Text 50 UserDef18 Text 50 UserDef19 Text 50 UserDef20 Text 50 SentToPDA Long Integer 4 CalDiscrepancy Long Integer 4 FloatFixed Long Inte
29. GAGEtrak prompts you that you can t have duplicate index values If this happens enter a unique procedure name or click Undo Procedure In this field enter the text of the procedure You can set the font size color underline bold and other formatting options by clicking the Open Editor button Remove button If you want to keep the procedure in your database but remove it from your gages click Remove This action removes the procedure from all attached gages but keeps it in Procedure Entry for your reference If you want to remove a procedure only from a particular gage go to Gage Entry Open Editor Opens an external text editor program for editing procedure information button Clone Procedure Opens the Clone Procedure dialog to allow for making a clone of the current procedure button Clone Procedure In this dialog a copy of the existing procedure can be made ES Clone Procedure Source Procedure Mame CP22E Revision 12 01 24 New Procedure Name E Clone Close Once the Clone button is clicked a second dialog will appear giving the user an opportunity to change any gages that referenced the original source procedure to reference the new procedure Note This change can not be reversed so be sure this is desired before clicking the Yes button Clone Procedure The Procedure has been cloned Do you wish to change the Gage Procedure links so that all Gages that used the Source Procedure Name are
30. Groups You can add or remove user groups and members using this screen 260 Groups Users Group Permissions Object Permissions hm Group Guest All Users Group Members lt is easiest to set up security on the group level Five groups come with GAGEtrak 6 7 Admin Calibration Guest Issue and User you can add more groups as needed When you add a new group you can copy the permissions from another group then go to Group Permissions for the newly defined group and set up the necessary permissions The table below describes the fields on this form Group Add and Delete Buttons All Users List Box Group Members List Box Add gt gt Button Remove lt lt Button Field Button Name Description Select the group name you want to view or enter a new group name and click Add Adds or removes the group to or from the current listing in the Group dropdown list box When a user is defined in the Users section of this module the default Group names are available for individual assignment Therefore if an existing Group name is selected the users assigned to the Group name will be visible in the All Users list box on this form If the Group name is a newly defined group the administrator will have the opportunity to copy permissions from other groups List box comprised of users belonging to a selected Group name Select a user or group of users from the All Users field and click the Add gt gt
31. Menus ond Comana it ito diia 52 EUS MERU zen ennen eenden benenden O AAA 52 FOL MO ea wr O eee 52 VIEW MENU Sa remain vcamasanaiaustnes Go mhiwacmancui A weneemunounmewslvs 53 POI WV NVC EE 53 Record Men Used dd eds 53 BOO MAS MA do ies ia tan 53 A eee RC ECT Ce eee eee eee eee eer oe ee 54 Chapter 3s Entering Gage Records iia ia 54 GOGO ENGI VS iia 54 Searches Or FITTING RECOS ing eat 55 Gage Entry INTO Ma OW tre oa 56 Gade EM SC MCCS in a 58 Gage Entry Standar Studi a tua tadnasauuie se anobadnasaunebadtentidnastamdaetoomezess 63 Standards PES NEY A A 65 CE EME ON atadas 66 Gage ENV Procedure Sonnir e r teca 67 GaBe ENUN Pat da 71 GAL EN y AIN US asa 72 GASSEN EY ISSUREES lectern we O A A d 73 USING GJER CCOO S A A A a eeens 74 SSUE RETUTO TRACKING Record A A at 74 conne GSS SRC ORS aci deelne Neede 77 Gage Entry Gra pn BUTON a io 78 Gage Entry Calibration BUTTON sa it di it diia 79 Gage Entry Attden Stand aras BUON sido iones 79 Gage Entry Attach Procedures Button ist tale 79 Chapter 4 Part AE ad R o EEE E T E A N E A A E A A E A 81 POLEN a IN EEA TEE A EE EEE E EREE REA EE 81 Gare Reduce MES tn mitad 82 Chapter 5 Entering Procedure Records suivant lacada acia 83 Procedure Records a A AN AAN A NAAA 83 Procedure Entiy Procequre Texto toi told 83 CONC Proceed A A e o ne re eee ee ee eee ee ee ee eee eee 84 Copying Procedures from Another Windows Application ccccccssccccsseccccesececeesecceeeecceeee
32. SS GAGEtrak 6 5 5 Scripts H Elaborate Bytes H E FMS H Internet Explorer 5 Messenger E Microsoft Access Runtime H E microsoft frontpage Microsoft MET H E Movie Maker ia MSA hal Click OK to begin the Restore operation When it s finished you ll see this message E Successful Operation Operation completed successfully Tip If you ve replaced your hard drive or are installing the software to another computer re install GAGEtrak first then restore your backup database file Automatic Backup Choose Automatic Backup to create a backup of the current database automatically To start the backup procedure click on the Automatic Backup button If the user has done a manual backup then it backs up to the directory where the user last did a manual backup If the user hasn t done a backup on that workstation then the backup is to the directory where the database is The application does not backup SQL databases ES Data Backup Manual Automatic Create Cdandar Event Select Automatic Backup to automatically create a backup of the current database Select Automatic Restore if the backup was created with Automatic Backup Automatic Restore GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 281 When the backup is finished you ll see this message successful Operation E Operation completed successfully Your data is now backed up The resulting backup files will be comp
33. Salutation Contact Phone Fax EMail Address City State Zip Country Last_Review Data Type Text key Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Date Time Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 8 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 389 Field List Data Type Last_Rating Date Time Last_Received Date Time Last_Reject Date Time Enabled Long Integer User1 Text User2 Text SupType Text Table Name Tab_Captions Description Form tab custom caption names Associated From Form Tabs Field List Data Type Form_Name Text key Tab_Name Text key Tab_Caption Text Table Name tbiCriteria Description Internal use Associated From None Field List cr_ID cr_HeaderlD Data Type Long Integer key Long Integer key cr_Field Text cr_Operator Text cr_Value Text cr_SortBy Text Table Name tblD T UCount Description Internal use Associated From None Field List Data Type FromTableName Text key FromCount Long Integer ToTableName Text key ToCount Long Integer DTUVersion Text DTUDate Date Time Length 8 8 8 4 50 50 50 Length 50 50 50 Length 100 50 50 50 Length 255 255 50 390 Table Name tblFilters Description Internal use Associated From None Field List Data Type fl_ID Long Integer key fl_Code Text fl Title Text Table Name tblMenuGroup Descript
34. Time Department By Calibration Type Results Action Required Description Use the drop down list box to select from a list of available Gage IDs Tip Once you ve selected a gage to calibrate do not change this field After you save the calibration record you can t edit this field If you want to enter another calibration record for this gage or for another gage click the New Record button first The indicated status of the gage at the time of calibration will reflect as 1 Active 2 In Active 3 Out for Repair 4 In Calibration 5 Lost Note The calibration Status field will disappear and cannot be edited once the calibration record has been passed GAGEtrak looks up the gage s description from its Gage Entry record and displays it here you can t edit it in this screen This field displays the gage s serial number you can t change it here After you mark the gage as having passed calibration GAGEtrak displays the calibration frequency that you entered in Gage Entry If you need to edit this value do so in Gage Entry Calibration frequencies are stored with the calibration record This allows you to maintain a complete history of calibration frequencies and how they might change over time Note If you made a selection from the Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval section for this gage whenever you enter a new calibration record GAGEtrak will automatically adjust the Calibration Frequency according to
35. Xbar X MR Notes Description In this field enter the date on which you measured the repeated readings Enter the actual measurements taken on the master or master part For example if you re taking a sample size of three repeated readings enter the first reading in field 1 the second in field 2 the third in field 3 In this example the subgroup size is five so fields 6 through 10 remain blank In this field you ll see the range for the sub group the largest reading minus the smallest reading This value is calculated you cannot change it GAGEtrak calculates the standard deviation for the sub group only when the sub group size is two or more You can t change this value In this field you ll see the average arithmetic mean for the sub group This value is calculated you can t change it In this field you ll see the Moving Range between this subgroup average and the previous subgroup average This will be blank for the first subgroup Record any comments in this field Printing the Stability Study To print the study click the Print button and a Print menu will appear as shown here Print Gage R amp R Study Print View Cloze ca C fem Select Print Option Data Sheet Cs baatte To print the study report click the This Study button that s in the Print section To preview the study report on screen click the This Study button that s in the View section Use the Data S
36. instead ball and bell but not bill matches any single character within the brackets bill and bull but not bell matches any character not in the list between the brackets b a c d bad bbd and bcd matches any one of a range of characters Tip Because GAGEtrak allows a literal search on these characters to find Machine 1 for instance you would enter Machine 1 Quick Filter Use the Quick Filter command when you need to quickly find records based on a simple search Quick Filter is accessible from the Records menu and the program toolbar Advanced Filter Edit Filter Sort Show All Records E Storage Location Poe Current Location Po Quick Filter Example If you want to access gage records that have descriptions exactly equal to Caliper enter Caliper in the Description field in the Gage Entry filter access the Quick Filter from within Gage Entry Gage la Status OOo lr Gage SIN Description ve i Next Due Date Po Storage Location Po Current Location le If you want to find gage records with descriptions that start with Caliper such as Caliper 6 inch and Caliper Digital then enter Caliper in the Description field of the Quick Filter The asterisk is a wildcard character that indicates in this example that you want all gage records that have a description starting with the word Caliper Bed kl Status Ie NZD E Description weet a 38 Likewise if you enter Caliper
37. or any other factor that may affect results If you have an appropriate USB temperature and humidity sensor you can double click in the Temperature or Humidity controls to have the application read these values from the sensor Field Button Name Select Label Design MSA Button Graph Button Certificate Button Description Choose the label design to print out the calibration record To enter a study for the current gage click the MSA button MSA studies are explained in MSA Studies To view an accuracy chart click the Graph button If a calibration has been passed select this button to view a summary or a detailed Certificate of Calibration report If the calibration record has not been passed in essence the calibration has failed you will be notified as such and will be given the opportunity to print a Calibration Failure Notice report Gage Entry Use this button to switch to the Gage Entry record for the current gage Button View Label Generates the label based on the label design selected Button Print Label Button Sends the selected design for the label directly to the printer Edit Label Button When selected the Custom Report Editor module is opened allowing you to update the label design selected Note Updating the label from this location will update the original label Tape Button View an online label catalog Calibration Timer Button Use the Start button next to the Hours field to time your
38. or master part measurements that you make You must use the same number of readings for each sub group of measurements for example you shouldn t use a sample size of five repeated readings on your first sub group and then use only three repeated readings on your second sub group Add additional sub groups to the rows following the first sub group row Note Subgroup sizes of 3 to 5 are common for stability studies GAGEtrak can accommodate subgroup sizes of 1 to 10 Stability gt Information Data Study Date 97307 2003 Co Part No MSA Gage ID MSA3 84 o Part No o Gage Desc Validation Data Part Desc Sub Group A E a 1 29 2004 2 28 2004 48 9 48 6 48 9 3 29 2004 48 7 47 9 48 4 29 2004 48 9 50 1 49 2 5 29 2004 48 5 49 49 6 29 2004 46 4 48 2 48 3 7 29 2004 48 7 48 47 7 9 29 2004 47 8 48 6 48 7 9 29 2004 47 9 48 3 46 4 10 29 2004 46 1 48 6 48 7 11 29 2004 48 2 48 5 48 9 12 29 2004 48 3 48 9 48 6 4 25 2012 Calc Charts Record 14 1 gt pip of 2 The subgroup record fields are explained below use the table s horizontal scroll bar to view the fields on the rightmost side of the table Field Name Description Sub Use this number to identify the subgroup usually you will start with 1 then go to 2 then 3 and keep using consecutive numbering However you can also use letters such as M 01 M 02 then M 03 184 Field Name Date 1 through 10 gt lt
39. 0 00 GAGEtrak s Calibration Status window gives you a quick view of your work status At a glance the number of Past Due and Not Due calibrations R amp R studies and Open and Closed Service Requests can be viewed The window also displays the Total Cost of gage inventory by Gage Type use the scrollbar to the right of the form to view the complete list of gage types To get an up to the minute display click the Refresh button Chapter 10 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval This module applies only to gages where Method A3 has been specified for Gage Frequency Adjusting Method This is specified in Gage Entry on the Calibration Schedule tab GAGEtrak also offers method A1 These terms refer to methods that are outlined in Recommended Practice RP 1 Establishment and Adjustment of Calibration Intervals 3 96 RP 1 is a publication of NCSL International a professional organization for standards labs See www ncsli org Method A3 lets you specify a reliability target and requires a low risk of making unnecessary changes before recommending that a change in calibration frequency is necessary Reliability is defined as the probability that a gage will still be in tolerance at the end of the calibration interval GAGEtrak estimates the current reliability by combining the calibration histories of all gages with the same gage type and same calibration frequency Then based on the reliability target GAGEtrak calculat
40. 10 000000 panenan pan ON DENNEN EN NEEN SEEN 8 000000 oe A A Meee Frequency 5 000000 precise pase we A inenen 4 000000 r A SE 2 000000 oe 000000 Interpretation of Bias Tab To be acceptable the lower 95 confidence limit must not be greater than zero and the upper 95 confidence limit must not be less than zero If not acceptable then the Histogram may identify outliers or patterns that provide clues Possible causes are 1 Gage not calibrated properly at lower and upper ends of the operating range 2 Error in the minimum or maximum master 3 Worn instrument 4 Internal instrument design characteristics 5 Mistakes in measurement or typos 168 Uncertainty Tab Uncertainty refers to the potential variation of gage error that accumulates in the chain of calibrations from NIST through various intermediate calibration labs to the final calibration of a working gage and its use in a production environment At each intermediate stage of calibration the uncertainty increases because the input uncertainty will be combined with new uncertainty contributors to create an output uncertainty that is always larger Each uncertainty along the way is communicated to the next link in the chain by a calibration certificate or test report Each certificate maintains traceability to the original NIST calibration by citing the NIST number This system o
41. 115 MINUS FOICrAMCE a oido 64 Mode NUM Discs nen pele 57 MS ESA EET 235 38 MIA nnee eae Greet a os 131 From Calibratlon SAN mms tenten 136 NEXT DUC DEE 60 61 62 111 112 USAN lO apto epee meee A tre te te te ee te eee 57 A E A 65 115 116 Normalized Individuals Chatrt cccccccececccccecececcccacacccececeaeacecececeaeacseeueneaeacseeneaeauaesteneceanseenenes 147 DECESE 9 ere per ene nee or mice eteer oli ee er oe 244 Open Another Database eoeta aan Ud e deed We een 397 Open DAlaAD en 232 240 OTIS Kn 208 Part AppralSer Average CONTO ad o eee dates 150 Patt Gonkol MEUTOG en cote e o e ob ets tans e dd a ds do 82 EN ml ane einen eRe 81 FUE INES EE 71 75 81 102 E E SS A su feta aeRO 135 FASHION 245 PDA Personal Digital ASSISIAN moria Riad 59 eelde See Maximizing Performance o O ial eemtnalt 269 PIUS VOISTANCE a ads 64 PEO ON a ea 133 Pren Gallbration Standards siste 65 PTOS SUTO neoa E E E O AS 112 Printing o E E ee 209 POC SOUS vrsna pema A susan ia 70 221 GADEA MEI cea bs cece a eas recs Ata 118 GON nen eee eeen ee eee eee 85 inspection Procedure TON Pans escitas dede ds 81 PES UG O O A O 213 a A O AN 83 Procedure Nani eri eo 70 zu EADE EEE EEE 57 Purchase Order NUDE Farc ria ta In IO aaa 75 102 ni EEE 62 113 213 AS te O O 144 alsde o AAA O IE o O 62 Range Chatbear een ehe enn ANa 144 Range WIC MOO id 137 A ennen Mersin a ramet easing annen en 76 77 103 RECEIVER Fr Miu da catas 76 103 4
42. 18 Expected 10 000000 8 000000 18 000000 A Ref Crosstabulation B Ref Crosstabulation C Ref Crosstabulation Ref Fail Pass Total Fail Count g 1 10 A Expected 5 000000 5 000000 10 000000 Ref Pass Count 0 8 g kanpi a Expected 4 000000 4 000000 8 000000 0 888889 Total Count 9 9 18 Expected 3 000000 3 000000 18 000000 Pel Cac Print Record 14 4 2 PLA of 2 194 Appraiser vs Appraiser In the upper set of subtabs the tables compare appraisers to each other two at a time using a method called Crosstabulation Appraiser vs Ref Value In the lower set of subtabs the tables compare each appraiser to the variable gage The Crosstabs Tab has these fields and buttons Field Button Description A Select which pair of Appraisers you want to evaluate Crosstabulation Count The number of times the two selected Appraisers voted a particular way For example suppose there were 6 times A said Fail and B said Pass Expected The number of times we would expect a particular vote combination to occur based on the totals Totals The totals for each column and row Kappa The Kappa statistic measures agreement ona scale of zero to one Over 0 75 is considered good under 0 40 is considered poor Effectiveness Tab _ Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis lol Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No MSA Gage ID MSA4 127 Part No
43. 20 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Calibrated By Approved By A great deal of planning is needed when building reports and considering the addition of sub reports Sometimes you can include the data in your master data source SQL Query and just create sub groups for this data However when your report format requires large amounts of detail as Link fields are very critical They must be of the same type they may not have the same name but should have the same content However here we have made sure that fields of the same name have the same type of data Also primary key fields Leamman fialde with ninina Sub report of procedures attached to each gage record Sub reports are designed in a separate design canvas and then linked into the main report document You must make sure that it contains a least one field that is common with the table you are linking it to contents and type The beauty of sub reports is that they can be 316 used over and over again in different reports so what you design once can be used many times GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 317 Creating a Sub Report Creating sub reports is much like creating any other report click on Custom Reports under Setup then click on the Create New Report button to view the template list in Select Report Templates Select Blank Report and click on OK A new blank report designer canvas is now ready for your report Open a data source
44. 6230 4 4658 5 2673 6 0305 6 7582 7 4539 For g gt 20 use do and estimate df with the constant difference cd Attribute Risk Analysis Attribute gages produce binary outputs like pass or fail and zero or one To perform this study you need to select fifty parts with a range of measurement values that extends all the way from out of specification at the lower specification limit to out of specification at the upper specification limit You will need three appraisers who check each part in random order then check them all again in a different random order for a total of 3 trials per appraiser This procedure is similar to a study in previous versions of GAGEtrak called the Short Attribute study The Short Attribute study involved only twenty parts and published 190 requirements called for perfect agreement New requirements allow a modest amount of disagreement within or between appraisers Gage theory tells us that a part made exacily on a specification limit would have a fifty fifty chance of being accepted by a perfect gage that has no bias This is true for both attribute and variable gages For customer protection attribute gage manufacturers deviate from theory and shoot for slightly less than 50 acceptance at the specification limit Because all gages attribute and variable have repeatability and reproducibility problems parts made too near a specification limit will experience inevitable disagreements between and w
45. A O 64 115 Status nn pe een ee ee eee ee eee eee 112 Senos Requena tenia 90 A DN 289 E ON Ee a ee Ear 57 Storage Belet ol EEE 57 SUPE GO aria we hanesastennt 57 99 System MantenanG Out EE O Scsueatesetenenadcctectasesuecte E 399 TSS IG Als SuPPOR mm ea ee a en A ee 239 340 398 401 FO Gage RSR ENY soeren enteren vernevelen 131 fool A 56 Open AOM AUG ANY rs stan 245 Foobar REDO ireen O 208 Total Vana OnT V cid 135 MING ti it tia A 403 Sla ECOS cialis dn a an nn ed ne 270 Type AIMED INO a eee EEE E ese ees ee eee 67 Calibration Type id A Aa 111 A PPP ee ee ee ee es ee E ee ee ee 57 220 GWERER SIU cet hase tact A 139 181 ESE eae tt EE eene neen asen eeen SERENE eenheden ae 75 102 SeMICE REUSS ano isaac 90 266 SEAE 2 LA APO AP o A II E EA T 64 65 115 ONS EEN 99 SVT CMU UY ewes haa o e es Gee hie Geer ee hee aioe 63 112 Unit of Measure Elo A tee ete eet ee en ee eT 57 AN 221 A AA Pe a 5 Aa 72 Users 412 Index SWD A BETE 259 Whiskers Unai o Usar discreci n 148 X Y Plot of Averages DVI AAA AA Wen ande da ida ada 148 AI a a ie lied 2 21 8 279
46. After YOU INS CAM GACETA A A a 231 Administrator Instalada 231 Configuration tle Settings sd dass 232 slag tel Golan dt 401 gele ne 233 Chapter 2 MS SQL Installation scada 235 Create Data Source Name DSN FOr MS SO Lic dic 235 Chapter 3s RUNMING GAGEaK anane A A vans scuavenevesavasevensvausvasauaede 239 LOGON dada 239 SEO INU ON in NAAA AN A SA TA IA A 239 MATIC DA AAA A NAAA AA 240 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEIAK icscescsiesscacsinse vast sacaxananaievanssacecacsveussesSeacepan abate can araara ranan Sears genspavevantiavanaseiatesane wastes 243 SEIN GS USER Norma Oana oie 243 SECU eS General tract ted 244 SCENES Cal OD UO ais 247 SOUS CAO veteraan yale dua diia 250 SENES SBER nen edentate er minder N EN 251 Settings Automatic NUMDELING cccccsssscccenseccceneccccesececeuseccssuscecsusececsuseecsaececsusecessueeeesaaececsueeeseaesecsaneeessas 253 Settines CUSTOM Laetitia 254 settings Gades Calibration CUSTOM is Mana a aa a ia 255 settings Forns COPOS heheh E E E 256 Settings Form Tabsy Main Menard a a a nannaidee 257 Setunes MENU BA iar E A AA 258 SONES MISSION ONEA SAOS 259 SET ECU O E ye auteRdenononts 259 SECUTEY CLOUD Staten E E E A NN 259 SS CUE EY USCIS a a E A A a a E E T E a Riderenceatemiruasen 261 SCULLY GO Ue MS SIO IN Sa a 262 Security 91 lt 1 t PErmiSSlONS Zeii a a A ree ee 263 SCC SST AGUS ios 264 setup A to EMail HeOAEr sissende anneer hes A A ISS 264 Setup IVI DIC CHOICE ENUW adi Nb
47. B Multiple Page To view the current report more than one page at a time click on this button 2 Zoom Out To view the current report at a smaller size click on this button 2 Zoom In To view the current report at a larger size click on this button fox 7 To view the current page at a specific size use this drop down list to select a specific percentage value for magnification or to fit the page into the window Send Send To e mail the current report click this button To view different pages in Print Preview use Page T of 2 gt Or Press To PAGE DOWN Move to the next page END Move to the last page PAGE UP Go to the previous page HOME Move to the first page Output To The Output To export formats for reports from the File menu allows you to transmit reports to Rich Text Format rTF Portable Document Format PpF HTML HTM HTML Microsoft Excel xLs Tagged Image Format TiF and MS DOS Text 1xT If you save a file in RTF format and then open that file in a word processing application such as Microsoft Word your data will have the appearance and formatting of the GAGEtrak report that you exported If you output to a text file all of the data will be present but the formatting will be lost Output to an Excel spreadsheet is the best option to select when you wish to export a report Choose Portable Document Format to create a report that appears identical to the report you see in GAGEtrak others will be able to
48. Calibrated By Signature Signature Name Signature Date Signature Time Signature Mode A Administrator 1 1 3 2003 10 30 38 AM Unsigned Administrator 1 13 2009 10 28 32 AM Signed E All signatures are recorded with the name of the signer the date and time of the signature and the signature mode whether the calibration was signed or unsigned To use electronic signatures security must be enabled To do this close the Calibration Entry window to return to the Main Menu Click on the Setup icon on the left hand side of the Main Menu and then click on the Settings button The Settings window will appear Click on the tab labeled Security and check the Enable Security checkbox then select Application Logon from the Logon Method drop down list User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Security Audit Trail Enable Security Advanced Audit Log y Enable Audit Trail Enable Security Messages jemove Audit Trail records after this many days Leave blank to not Application Logon w Logon Method emove records Require Password Changes Electronic Signature 14 Number of Days Before Password Change C Electronic Signature Login 4 Minimum password length O Do Not Archive Unsigned Calibration 30 User Login Timeout Period mins C Do Not Archive Unapproved Calibration Email the ff recipients email addresses separated by semicolons
49. Calibration History Reports Part Reports R R Reports Miscellaneous Reports Staff Reports Kitting Reports User D Administrator Your Company Name Here Division Name MSA GRR Linearity Bias and Uncertainty Stability Attribute Risk Analysis Attribute Analytic Method Gage Reports 1172 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1f2 Inch Gage Barcode Label Calibration Standard Report Gage Detail Report Gage Event Listing Gage Issue History Gage Label 1 2 x IL Gage Label 1 2W x ZL Gage Label 1 2W x 3L Gage Label 1 44 x IL Gage Label 1 4 x ZL Gage Label 1 4 x IL MSA Average and Range MSA Linerarity MSA Stability MSA Attribute MSA ANOVA hl C LlzerssjordanDesktop G T Demo65 mdb Click the menu button that corresponds to the study you want We ll discuss each type of study next Tip You can also run MSA by clicking the MSA button in the Calibration Entry screen Running MSA this way restricts you to entering gage R amp R studies for only the gage shown in the Calibration Entry screen GRR Module GRR studies look at the ability of a calibrated gage to measure an actual part characteristic using real operators and production conditions GRR studies are specific to a part characteristic and can apply to multiple gages Study Types Analysis of Variance ANOVA This method gives the most information If GRR of TV or Tol is unsatisfactory you will be able to view EV
50. Calibration Scans form noting the Scan Date Description and the file path E Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 X Scan Date File Path Description gt Scan New Record 14 4 1 gt gt t lp of 2 Record 14 4 1 P pl pe of 62 If you click on the drill down button the application will look for the image and open it with the application that is registered for that file type in the workstation s registry 126 Note If GAGEtrak cannot find the application registered for the certificate s file type you will be prompted to pick an application to open it with An Open With dialog box will appear listing all the applications installed on your computer Select an image viewing or image editing application it will launch and open your image file If GAGEtrak cannot find the image file in the location stated in the file path you will be prompted to browse for the file Navigate to your certificate file through the Open File dialog box that appears You will be prompted to change the path in your GAGEtrak database to the selected file Choose Yes to update the file path and open the file Calibration Entry Additionals These fields can be used to store additional information and can be customized the label names changed and the data types altered in Setup Set
51. Client Server Version 6 Converting your database file ctpatass mpB GTDATA50 MDB GTDATA40 MDB and DATA9731 MDB E Data Transfer Utility Wizard Data Transfer Utility Page 2 of 3 Source Database ll w Y Date i Version 3 Archive 571 1998 Source Connection Inform Verzion Dels 541 1999 371 1999 117172000 1171572001 4 76 2003 Tr 26r 2006 Version 6 5 New Tr 26 2006 1 Under Source Database from where data is being transferred select a database based on application version being transferred z Version 6 0 Data z Version 5 5 Data z Version 5 0 Data Version 4 0 Data m Version 3 Data 2 Click the Browse button on the right of the Source Connection Information field to navigate to your database file You will be presented with an Open Database window where you can choose the file path of your Source Database GTDATA55 MDB GTDATA50 MDB GTDATA40 MDB Or DATA9731 MDB GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 337 Note If you do not recall where the Source Database is located you can find out by opening your old version of GAGEtrak Select the Main Menu and the location of your database will be displayed on the lower right hand side of the form The default location for the database is C GTW5 GTData55 mdb or earlier However depending on the options you selected during the setup of GAGEtrak this may not be where your database is located 3 Select the Next button 4 The Destination Database from wher
52. Cost R amp R Freq and R amp R Freq Units R amp R Skip Direction Last R amp R Date Last R amp R Result Next R amp R Due Date Next R amp R Button Projected R amp R Schedule Description This field displays the amount of usage or cycles that have been used since the last calibration of this gage This field is only used if the gage has a Usage or Cycles calibration frequency and is not editable To the right of the calibration schedule you ll see the next three anticipated calibration dates which GAGEtrak calculates when you click Next Calib When you add a new calibration record for the gage GAGEtrak automatically updates these dates based on the current frequency Note If you re using the Auto Adjustment of Calibration Frequency feature be aware that these dates do not take into account future adjustments of the calibration frequency since GAGEtrak can t predict if future calibrations will pass or fail Enter the actual or estimated time it takes to calibrate the gage Enter in this field an estimate of the calibration cost as to labor and other resources that were used Enter the frequency of gage R amp R studies such as 6 monTHS When the software calculates the next gage R amp R study date it uses this value Use the field located on the right of the R amp R Frequency field to select the Frequency Units schedule type Choose from these options Days the most common units schedule is bas
53. Design of Experiments Holt Rinehart and Winston New York 1973 ILAC G17 2002 Introducing the Concept of Uncertainty of Measurement in Testing in Association with the Application of the Standard ISO IEC 17025 2002 www ilac org ISO Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in Measurement 1993 Revised 1995 NIST TN 1297 Guidelines for Evaluating and Expressing the Uncertainty of NIST Measurement Results 1994 www nist gov public_affairs pubs htm NIST SEMATECH e Handbook of Statistical Methods www itl nist gov div898 handbook WESTERN ELECTRIC AT amp T Statistical Quality Control Handbook Charlotte NC Delmar Printing Company 1984 Chapter 13 Reports GAGEtrak includes a large variety of standard reports To generate reports go to the main menu and select the type of report you would like to view The reports are available in the bottom section of the Main Menu as shown below E Main Menu J Division Name Main Records Main Records Gage Entry Supplier Entry MSA Calibration Entry Status Service Request Entry Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Kit Entry Part Entry Issue Gages Standard Group Return Gages Calibration Calendar Export to PDA Formula Entry Import from PDA Staff Entry Procedure Entry Setup Data Tools and Utilities Report Queue Gage Reports Gage Reports 1 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label Open Calibration Reports _ 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label ai Calibration S
54. ES Select Label Type Select Label Type Calibration Label 1 24 x 2L Calibration Label 1 24 x 3L Calibration Label 1 44 x 1L Calibration Label 1 44 x 2L Calibration Label 1 4W x 3L Calibration Label 1 x 1L Calibration Label 14 x 2L Calibration Label 14 x 3L The printed label shows the predicted Next Due date for a gage based on the frequency set for the gage unless the frequency was set to Usage or Cycles and the gage is not ready for calibration then the Est Due date will appear on the label Field Button Description Name Close Click the Close button to save the record and exit the screen GAGEtrak uses the following rules to manage Issue Tracking records 1 When you issue a gage GAGEtrak inserts the current date and time as the issue date and time It also changes the gage s Current Location field to a description that consists of Issued To plus Issued Dept for example 675 gob 7512 Final Assy Return Gages ES Return Gages Gage ID COMPARATOR Issue Date 12 16 2008 Next Due Date Issue Time 3 54 AM 6 14 2004 Past Duel Type Calibration Issued To Adam Aaron Issued Dept QC Part No 10 221 1 Storage Location Final Insp Current Location Adam Aaron OC Received Date 12 16 2008 Received Time 3 55 AM feceived From Adam Aaron The Return Gages fields are as follows Field Button Name Gage ID Received Date and Received Time Received From Cycles Notes Clear Form Next Gage
55. Enter the operation range for this gage Enter a description for the group Enter the Plus Tolerance for this standard group Enter the Minus Tolerance for this standard group If most of your measurements begin with the same numbers such as 1 1651 1 1650 and 1 1658 you can save time by prefilling the measurements with those digits In this case click the Prefill button and then enter Number of Standards Start prefill Value of 1 165 and Increment Value Now you need to enter only the last digit of each measurement Any gage using this standard group will be updated to the newly defined standard Note Using the Update button will wipe out current standards but will not effect standard history All criteria related to developing standards are the same as what is documented for Measurements in Calibration Entry Click on the Gage List tab to see a listing of all gages that use the selected standard group You can use this listing to determine which gages will be affected if you modify the standard group This list is not editable ES Standard Group P standard Group Gage List Standard Group Digital Caliper 06 Group Description Digital Caliper O In to 6 In Record 14 lt 1 DDN of 1 Calibration Calendar GAGEtrak has included a calibration calendar to view monthly calibration schedules in a single form You can directly choose the month and year and go directly to a spec
56. Gage and Equipment H el General General Calibration Services In House In House Calibration Remove Unwanted Information from Drop down Lists lf a value list contains unwanted data such as Supplier Code you can navigate to Supplier Entry and uncheck the Enabled checkbox This makes the supplier inactive which removes the supplier from the Supplier Code drop down list for future gage entries If a self building drop down list contains unwanted data use the Find button to remove the entry In the screen shot below notice that the Type field drop down list contains Dial and Dial s Dial s is incorrect and should be removed from the dropdown list 26 Type i zage Blocks 81 grade 0 A Depth Werner 0 6 007 in DIAL Dial Bore Gage 2 3 001 in E Dial Indicator 0 020 0005 in Dial s Place the cursor in the field that contains the incorrect data in this case the Type field Click the Replace icon on the floating toolbar Enter the value you wish to remove or replace in the Find What field If you want to remove the value altogether leave the Replace With field blank Otherwise if you want to replace the value with some other value then type the new replacement value in the Replace With field Dial s Dial Type Le Whole Field al xl E Match Case Search Fields As Formatted Click the Replace All button A message box will remind you that you cannot undo this operat
57. ID of Select from a list of available standard IDs The list is limited by the Ref Type field An empty Ref Type Standard field would show all available IDs Units In this field enter the unit of measure that the standards share 66 Field Button Description Name Standard Format Select the numerical format that measurements will appear in on reports Note The format does not affect how measurements are shown in forms only in reports End Value GAGEtrak calculates the end value for you depending on the Number of Standards the Start Value and the Increment Value Fill Button After you ve entered the information click the Fill button and GAGEtrak will fill in the information The Minimum and Maximum values will be calculated from the Tolerance and Tolerance values Gage Entry History ES Gage Entry gt Information Calibration Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Date By Results As Found Condition Account No Pass Type Action Required Calibration Status Certificate No 8 19 2003 JHL Original Out Of Tolerance Out Yes Standard Rebuild or Retire Passed 0803 000 This gage was found out of tolerance Perform traceability on all critical parts measured with this gage since the last calibration This gage after adjustment was nearly exceeding the tolerances for this gage This gage should not be used to measure any critical parts
58. Links and lists calibration information for a particular gage Associated From Calibration Entry Procedure tab Field List Gage _ID Calibration_ Date Calibration_ Time Procedure Name Data Type Length Text key 50 Date Time key 8 Date Time key 8 Text 50 Table Name Calibration Scans Description Contains calibration scan records Associated From frmSubCalibration Scans Calibration Entry Scans tab Field List Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time File_Path Scan_Date Form_Description Data Type Length Text key 50 Date Time key 8 Date Time key 8 Text key 255 Date Time 8 Memo 0 Table Name Calibration Standards Description Contains calibration standards information used in comparing calibration measurements Associated From Calibration Standard Entry Calibration Entry Measurements tab Edit Calibration Standards Find New Measurement PDA Records Gage Accuracy Gage Accuracy2 Gage Accuracy Print Gage Accuracy Print2 IDS TDForm Field List Gage_ID Standard_ID Minimum Nominal Maximum Data Type Length Text key 50 Text key 50 Double 8 Double 8 Double 8 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 353 Field List Data Type Length Units Text 50 CS_Type Text 50 GT_Format Text 50 GM_Type Text 50 Comments Memo 0 CM_Calibration_ID Text 50 Table Name CertStatHist Description Not Used Associated From Not Used
59. Long Integer Long Integer Double Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Double Long Integer Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Text Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 ee ed o Ol O 50 Field List strAuditEditor strSerialNo BGColor LineColor TitleColor HeadingColor DataColor FontNameHeadings FontNameData FontStyleHeadings FontStyleData LinesVisible PageNumbers AllowSaveReport ShowWideLogo BarCode Terminator CCNumberFormat CCLastNumber SRNumberFormat SRLastNumber LabelAction AuditPurge SecurityOn SecurityWarning LoginMethod MonthsAhead MonthsBehind RefreshRate GreenNumber BlueNumber YellowNumber RedNumber Flags ProgramVersion Electronic_Signature_Login ForceChangePassword Data Type Text Text Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Text Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Text Text Text Text Text Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Double Long Integer Long Integer GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide Length oj A A AIAI AI RT RT Rh RY a OR OR ORS A A 383 384 Field List Data Type Length ForceChangeP
60. Long Integer key Text Text Memo Table Name Gage Events Length 4 50 255 0 Description Lists events and associated application for a particular gage emtry Associated From Gage Events SubForm Gage Entry Events tab Field List Gage_ID Event_ID App_Path App_Params Filter Data Type Text key Long Integer key Text Text Text Table Name Gage_Master Length 50 YA 255 Description Lists attributes non key fields of every gage entry Associated From Gage Master Entry Staff Master Gage Issued subKitGAGE Calibration Cost Graph Calibration Entry Calibration Hours Graph Current Cost Status by Type Edit Gage Master Edit Gage Procedure Links Find New Measurement PDA Records frmGage_Frequency_Adjusting_Interval Gage Calibration Certificate Entry Gage Master Print Form Gage Master SubForm IDREFForm Kit Gages History Part Master SubForm TodaysEventSub TodaysEventSub2 Field List Gage_ID Gage_SN Asset_No Model_No Manufacturer GM_Owner Description GM_Type Unit_of_Meas Data Type Text key Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 362 Field List Standard_Group Drawing_No Drawing_Date Change_Level Change_Date Storage_Location Current_Location Service_Date Retirement_Date Calibrator Calibration_Frequency Calibration_Frequency_U0M CyclesPerDay Resolution Operating_Range Plus Tol
61. Long Integer key Text key Table Name Bookmarks Associated Form frmBookmarks Length 4 100 4 Length 50 Field List UserID Bookmarks LastGages Data Type Text key Memo Memo Table Name CalFormula_Links GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 347 Length 50 0 0 Description Links gages with specific Calibration data Field List Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time Gage_Standard_ID Before_Formula After_Formula Data Type Text Date Time Date Time Text Double Double Table Name CalFormula_Values Length 50 8 8 50 Description Stores customized calibration formulas and value of variables Associated Form R amp R Studies Field List Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time Gage_Standard_ID Col Name Formula_Var Formula_ID Var_Value Table Name CalFreqTrack_Values Data Type Text key Date Time key Date Time key Text key Text key Text key Double key Double Length 50 50 50 50 Description Logs history of Calibration Frequency entries Field List Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time Old_Frequency New_Frequency UserName DateChange Data Type Text key Date Time key Date Time key Double Double Text Date Time Length 50 8 8 8 8 50 348 Field List TimeChange Data Type Date Time Table Name Calib Attachments Length Descri
62. Screw Threads Mic 01 001 in Inch 2 2007 009E SMIC_ Supermictometer EJ SuperMic 0 1 00005in imch mm 2007 010E DBG_ _ DialBore Gage23 Dial Bore Gage 23 001in inch 11200 011E DI Digital indicator 0 020 0005 Dial Indicator 0 020 0005in Inch 114142007 O12E Tl Testindicator 0 0001 inch 0 4 0 Test Indicator 0 4 0 0001in Inch 11 1 2007 013E RIN____ Rule 0 12 in 1 64 and 1 32 Rue012 1 64 and1 32 Inch 11 2007 o 014E 0C_ Optical Comparator H 12x 6inch Optical Comp H12 V6 0001in 0 0001Ineh 1 16 2006 015E NO GOPG _ NO GO Gage Classz NOGO PlugGage1 0ClassZ inch 114142007 015E PG Z Nominal Plug Gage Classz GO Plug Gage 1 0ClassZ inch 11 1 2007 016E RGZ Nominal Ring Gage Classz NominalRingGage1 0ClassZ inch 11 1 2007 017E TPG_ GO Thread Gage 1 428UNF 2B GO Th plug Gage 1 4 28UNF2B finch 11 1 2007 018E THR____ GO Thread Gage 1 4 28UNF24 GOThRingGage1 428UNF24 inch 11 1 2007 019E Mw GradeB wires 3 wies GradeB Meas Wires set inch 11 2007 020E SSPB____ Grade B Parallel Bar Set Steel barsetis2GradeB inch 114142007 021E BPSQ_ Blade Precision Square Blade Precision Square 6x12 inch 112007 2 022E DCAL Digital Caliper 0 12 inch DigtalCaliper 0 12 0005in inch 7 28 2008 022F DCAL Digital Caliper O 6inch_ DigtalCa
63. Staff User List Field List Data Type Length UserlD Text key 150 Employee_ID Text key 50 Table Name Standard Group Description Contains attributes of a particular standard group Associated From Standard Group SubForm Edit Standard Group Field List Data Type Length Standard_Group Text key 50 Standard_ID Text key 50 Minimum Double 8 Nominal Double 8 Maximum Double 8 Units Text 50 CS_Type Text 50 GT_Format Text 50 GM_Type Text 50 Comments Memo 0 CM_Calibration_ID Text 50 Table Name Standard_Header Description Contains attributes of a particular standard Associated From Standard Header Field List Data Type Length Standard_Group Text key 50 Description Text 50 388 Field List Resolution Operating_Range Plus Tolerance Minus_ Tolerance FloatFixed Table Name States Description State region province information Data Type Text Text Text Text Long Integer Associated From States Field List StateCode State Table Name Status Data Type Text key Text Description Gage status lookup Associated From Status Form Edit Status Field List Status_ID Status Data Type Long Integer key Text Table Name Supplier_Master Description Supplier information Length 50 50 50 50 Length 50 50 Length 4 20 Associated From Supplier Master Edit Supplier Records Field List Supplier_Code Supplier_Master_Name
64. The program locates and highlights the first occurrence of the text 2 Click the Replace button to replace the highlighted text with the text in the Replace With box If you don t want to replace this occurrence of the text click the Find Next button to locate the next occurrence 46 To replace all occurrences without confirmation 1 Click the Replace All button Quick Sort Command You can use the Quick Sort command from the Records menu to perform a simple sort of your records based on the currently selected field s When you select this command you ll see a submenu that enables you to sort in ascending or descending order see below The sorted records return to their original order when you close the form or table Ascending A Z or 0 100 Descending Z A or 100 0 Output To Command The Output To command for records from the File menu allows you to transmit records to Rich Text Format RTF MS DOS Text TXT Microsoft IIS HTX DC Microsoft Excel XLS Microsoft Active Server Pages ASP and HTML HTM HTML lf you save a record in RTF format and then open that record file in a word processing application such as Microsoft Word your data will have the appearance and formatting of the GAGEtrak datasheet that you exported If you output to a text file all of the data will be present but the formatting will be lost Output to gt Microsoft Excel is the best option to select when you wish to ex
65. Time Text Table Name MDR_ Archive Description Archived Service Request Field List MDR_No MDR_Date Requester Gage_ID Ins Amt Letter_Type Service_Supplier Status Completion_Date Comments Data Type Text key Date Time Text Text Double Text Text Text Date Time Text Table Name MDR_Gages Description Contains related information for a service request of a particular gage Associated From Service Request Entry Field List MDR_No Requester Gage_ID Ins_ Amt Status Completion_Date Comments Next_Due_Date Data Type Text key Text Text key Double Text Date Time Text Date Time Table Name MDR_Gages_Archive Description Archived MDR_Gages Records Associated From Service Request Entry Field List MDR_No Requester Gage_ID Ins Amt Data Type Text key Text Text key Double Length 250 Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 250 Length 50 50 50 50 250 Length 50 50 50 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 377 Field List Data Type Status Text Completion_Date Date Time Comments Text Next Due Date Date Time Table Name Meas Uncertainty Length 50 8 250 Description List necessary information for calculating uncertainty measurements Associated From Uncertainty Field List Data Type Gage_ID Text key Calibration_Date Date Time key Calibration_Time Date Time key Uncert_Contributo
66. UCL X Ap x R LCL X Ag xR Bias form 1 5 R df from d table SE a Confidence Bounds A 2 658679 1 954410 1 628102 1 427299 1 287128 1 181916 1 099096 1 031661 0 975350 D D C 0 3 267 0 797885 0 2 574 0 886227 0 2 282 0 921318 0 2 115 0 939986 0 2 004 0 951533 0 076 1 924 0 959369 0 136 1 864 0 965030 0 184 1 816 0 969311 0 223 1 777 0 972659 X amp s Charts X A m _ 4 5 o m l LCL s xB X X 8 UCL X A x5 LCL X A x5 Bias e En EAD 2 xm l df g xm 1 0 030 0 118 0 185 0 239 0 284 3 267 2 568 2 266 2 089 1 970 1 882 1 815 1 761 1 716 X amp MR Charts Key MR This X Previous X MR M8 1 UCL MR x3 267 LCL Rk MR x0 X X 8 UCL X 2 65868x MR LCL X 2 65868x MR Bias X Xo for m 1 note subgroup size for MR is 2 for any m gt MR a Va df from d table 188 d Pi 2 Bias Xx SE Xt gy 0 025 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 8 1 8 2 9 1 2 m 1 0 1 41421 1 9 1 27931 2 8 1 23105 3 7 1 20621 4 6 1 19105 5 5 1 18083 6 4 1 17348 7 2 1 16794 8 1 1 16361 9 0 1 16514 9 9 1 15729 10 7 1 15490 d Table g 1 2 0 1 91155 3 8 1 80538 5 7 1 76858 7 5 1 74989 9 3 1 73857 11 1 1 730
67. Update Add Reports option and click the Next button This will bring up the Transfer Report Data window GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 341 ES Transfer Report Data Destination Connection Information Available Reports for updating Report Name Your Yersion Curr ersion Action New Report Name Action Legend Overwrite overwrites your existing report with the updated one Note Do not choose this option if you have customized the report earlier Save as save the updated report with a new report name Skip skips the report update Note Reports that need to be updated are automatically set to Overwrite action by default Overwrite All Skip All Cancel Select the Destination Connection Information and then click the drill down button to set the parameters for the update E Open Database Database E Program FilesiCyberbmetrics Corp154GEtrak 6 516TSampbs5 de Browze Use ODBC _ Use DSN Required Fields Use File DSN Click the Browse button to search your hard drive for the new GAGEtrak database The file selected should have an mdb file extension designating it as a database You can also select other sources from which to update your GAGEtrak database These include Field Button Name Description Field Button Name Use ODBC Use DSN File DSN Database Name User ID Password Driver Server Service Name Database Attribute Application
68. a long time When you first enter the gage record enter the gage s last calibration date Later the program will automatically update this field whenever you add a new calibration record for the gage This field shows the next calibration due date It s automatically updated whenever you add a new calibration record for the gage Next Due Date Calibration Date Freq You can also manually enter any date into this field If the current date is past the next due date you ll see the message Past Due on the right of this date Tip To calculate this date immediately click the Next Cal b button only if you ve entered a calibration frequency and last calibration date Using this button you can calculate the next due date even if you don t enter a calibration record for the gage This field is mainly for usage and cycles gages Calculation is based on calibration frequency average cycles per day issue return and calibration history GAGEtrak counts how many Issue Tracking records the gage has and adds it to this field The total is displayed as Cumulative Times Used at the top of the Issue Tracking Entry screen This field displays the amount of usage or cycles remaining before this gage is due for calibration This field is only used if the gage has a Usage or Cycles calibration frequency and is not editable 62 Field Button Name Use Used Projected Calibration Schedule Calibration Hours Est Calibration
69. active gages those marked with status ID 1 Therefore do not delete status ID 1 Active The default Status Descriptions that come with GAGEtrak are Active In Active Out For Repair In Calibration and Lost You can change these descriptions or add additional Status Descriptions as required by your company for example you may need to add Retired Sealed or Loaned Out ES Status ID Entry Status ID 1 Status Description Active Record 14 i 1 gt Jr P of 5 Setup Gage Events Select this utility to establish events that can be associated with a particular gage when Calibration Entry Events is selected 268 E Gage Events Gage Issued Email Description Triggers when this particular gage is issued Trigger Issued v Action Send Email When an event is triggered an action can be performed such as running an external application like opening up a Microsoft Word document or initiating a transmission of an email Note As a user you can add additional Gage Events that will be triggered by one of the available selections listed under Trigger The Trigger list is predefined and is non editable as are Actions The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Event Name of the event that will be visible in the Events dropdown list box in Gage Entry Events Description Describe the action triggered when the event is selected Triggered What causes the event to
70. all times that these options are active These fields are grayed out and cannot be changed E Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Security Audit Trail C Enable Security Advanced Audit Log w Enable Audit Trail Remove Audit Trail records after this many days Leave lank to not Application Logon w Logon Method Require Password Changes 14 Number of Days Before Password Change 4 Minimum passwor d length remove records Electronic Signature O Do Not Archive Unsigned Calibration C Do Not Archive Unapproved Calibration Email the ff recipients email addresses separated by semicolons After 3 Unsuccessful login attempts C Restrict Issue To Authorized Users Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Enable Security Check this box if you want to use system security with GAGEtrak If you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak security is automatically permanently enabled this option is grayed out to show that you cannot change it If Enable Security is checked under a Standard Installation of the application you will be required to create at least one Admin user prior to enabling this feature You can create user security groups and assign group permissions in the Security utility Enable Security If you check this box GAGEtrak will display warning messages if users tr
71. an d Degrees of Freedom controls to null and enable them allowing user to enter values Close button Closes the Select Uncertainty Method Budget window Select To the right of each Uncertainty Study listed is a button allowing the user to choose that study for Uncertainty Study calculating Uncertainty Coverage Factor k and Degrees of Freedom The values in the selected button study will be used to calculate each of the values Note An Uncertainty Budget must be created to utilize this function Select Label Design field drop down list Calibration Failed 1 2 3L Calibration Label 1 2 x 1L Calibration Label 1 2 x 2L Calibration Label 1 2 x 3L DS Calibration Label 1274 x 1L Calibration Label 1 4W x 2L Calibration Label 1 4W x 3L Calibration Label Tw x 1L Calibration Label TW x 2L Calibration Label 1W x 3L Inactive Gage Label 1424 x 1 1 2L No Calibration Gage Label 1 2 x 1 1 2L Using the Select Label Design drop down list you can print a calibration label for the current record Just select the name of the label you wish to print in the Select Label Design drop down menu You can use this feature only if you ve installed the optional GAGEtrak Calibration Label Kit printer and software shown below The Calibration Label Kit prints durable laminated cut to length calibration labels It includes a printer that attaches to your PC s serial or USB port so it won t interfere with your default printer It also in
72. and Drawing Date Change Level In these fields enter the blueprint change level also called engineering change level and the change and Change Date date Inspection Enter instructions for checking the part Procedure 82 Gage Requirements Field Button Name Gage ID Description Method Dimension Comments Freq Description Select the Gage ID of the gage you will use to inspect the part GAGEtrak will automatically enter the description of the gage you selected in the Gage ID field Enter the control method suchas Inspection Sheet orControl Chart In this field enter the dimension or characteristic that you will check with the gage Record any notes about the dimension or characteristic that you re checking Specify frequency in which the part will be inspected with this gage such as 5 per Shift or10 per Day Chapter 5 Entering Procedure Records Procedure Records When you select Procedure Entry from the Main Records menu the Procedure Entry window appears It contains four different tabs Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments and Gage List Procedure Entry Procedure Text In this screen you can copy or enter the text of each procedure If Maintain Calibration Procedure History is set to true checked then the text of a specific procedure can be edited until it is used in a calibration record Once it is added to a calibration record the procedure is locked down so no changes can be made
73. and post edit audit data Associated From Audit Log Field List GroupName Cust_ID OperatorStamp DateTimeStamp Data Type Text key Text key Text Date Time Table Name ezy_GroupGroup Description User Groups Associated From Security and Users Field List GroupName Group_ID OperatorStamp DateTimeStamp Table Name ezy_GroupPermissions Description Group security rights and restrictions Data Type Text key Text key Text Date Time Associated From Security Field List GroupName ObjectType ObjectName ControlTypeName ControlName Description ControlDescription Data Type Text key Long Integer Text key Text Text key Text Text Length 4 100 255 255 0 Length 50 150 50 Length 50 150 50 Length 50 255 50 255 255 100 Field List Data Type Permission Text OperatorStamp Text DateTimeStamp Date Time Table Name ezy_Groups Description Security groups Associated From Security Field List Data Type GroupName Text key OperatorStamp Text DateTimeStamp Date Time GroupOnly Long Integer Table Name ezy_GroupUser Description Security group user list Associated From Security Field List Data Type GroupName Text key UserlD Text key OperatorStamp Text DateTimeStamp Date Time GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 359 Length 50 50 8 Length 50 50 Length 50 150
74. any text string including a phrase a word or part of a word You can also use wildcard characters to make the search more general For faster searches search for the first few characters within a single field The Find box remains open during searches so you can find as many records as you want without repeatedly selecting the Find command If necessary drag the Find box out of the way so that you can see your records To find data 1 Display the table or form for the records you want to search 2 Select the field column in which you want to search unless you want to search in all fields However remember that searching a single field is faster than searching in all fields From the Edit menu choose Find or click the Find icon The Find window appears In the Find What box type the text you want to find Use wildcard characters such as and to make your search more general ind ars Renae Gt Caliper Descripton Whole Field A al f E Match Case Search Fields As Formatted 5 Set other Find dialog box options if necessary i e Match Case 6 To find the first or the next occurrence of the text click the Find Next button 7 When you re finished close the form by clicking the X at the top right corner of form Replace Command While you re in either Form or Datasheet View the Replace command is available via the Edit menu or by clicking the Replace icon Within a database table you can
75. are 1 1 2 and 3 A sample label is shown below 1 inch W x 1 inch L Note The label generator in GAGEtrak can generate custom size labels but not all printers can support custom label sizes so it is highly recommended to consult your printer guide prior to proceeding 216 Appendix A Calibration Label Kit Printing Labels from Calibration Entry You can print individual calibration labels directly from the Calibration Entry Calibration tab ES Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals Gage ID C 002 v Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH_ Status 1 w Active Est Costs Gage S N 5N19803467 Costs 0 00 Calib Freq 365 Days Next Due Hours 0 2 Calibration Date 12 31 42008 Time 3 30 20 AM Account No Department vi Certificate No sa By No User Name v Uncertainty hazad Calibration Type v Coverage Factor 4 Results Deg of Freedom Action Required Temperature As Found Condition In v Humidity Calibration Status ERS v Pressure Interval Adjustment Method None Other Fan C Pass Select Label Design v ReportName i Calibration Failed 172w x 3L Calibration Label 1 2 x 1L Calibration Label 1 2 x 2L Calibration Label 1 2 x 3L Calibration Label 1 4 x 1L Calibration Label 174W x 2L Calibration Label 1 4 W x 3L Calibration Label TW x 1L Calibration Label TW x 2L View Label Print Label Edit Label Calibration Label 1W
76. been successfully entered and you ll be logged into GAGEtrak Chapter 2 Program Conventions To save time and ensure consistency GAGEtrak uses a set of program conventions which are standard commands and design elements that make the different windows and forms operate in the same way You can use these conventions to navigate through add edit and delete records Other conventions help you retrieve and print records Shortcut keys help you save data entry time and avoid mistakes You should become familiar with these conventions before you begin using GAGEtrak Rather than repeating the same information in every section of this manual we discuss these conventions only in this section You ll find record specific information such as each record s individual purpose fields and special buttons in the parts of this manual that discuss specific record types 18 Main Menu The main menu shows the name of the currently logged in user in the lower left corner and shows the full path to the current data file in the lower right corner 3 Main Menu Your Company Name Here Division Name Main Records Main Records Gage Entry Supplier Entry MSA Calibration Entry Status Service Request Entry Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Setup Kit Entry Part Entry Issue Gages Standard Group Return Gages Calibration Calendar Data Tools Export to PDA Formula Entry Import from PDA Staff Entry Procedure Entry Gage Reports Report Q
77. calculate the Next R amp R Date even if you don t enter an R amp R study record for the gage To the right of the Gage R amp R fields you can see the next three projected R amp R dates GAGEtrak calculates these dates when you click the Next R amp R button then updates them when you add a new R amp R record for the gage Gage Entry Standards E Gage Entry gt Information Calibration Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Resolution 0 001 Tolerance 001 Uncertainty Tolerance 001 Operating Range 0 12 Inch Standard Group Standard ID Type Units Minimum Ref Type Gage ID of Standard Format P TINCH GAGE BLOCK Yy 0 999 GAGE BLOCK S S N 1234 wv 000 2 INCH GAGE BLOCK y GAGE BLOCK S S N 2345 3 INCH GAGE BLOCK y GAGE BLOCK S S N 3456 wv General Nur y Record 14 4 2 gt PIP of 51 Calibration Standard Records Use these records to define the list of standards or test parameters that are measured when this gage is calibrated Later when you enter a calibration record for the gage GAGEtrak automatically copies this list to the calibration record It sorts and displays your calibration standards in ascending order based on the standard IDs You can enter as many calibration standards as you need The Calibration Standards table contains these fields Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the sele
78. calibration it works like a stopwatch When you re ready to calibrate just click the Start button lts name will change to Stop When you re finished click Stop and GAGEtrak will automatically calculate the hours for you The timer is cumulative This allows you to temporarily stop the timer and do something else Just click the Stop button to stop the timer then when you re ready to resume click the Start button again The time is expressed in decimal hours the smallest unit of time is 0 01 hours which equals 36 seconds Example 1 0 25 hours 0 25 x 65 minutes 15 minutes Example 2 0 01 hours 0 01 x 65 minutes 0 6 minutes select Uncertainty Method Budget form The Select Uncertainty Method Budget form allows for the user to choose between using the Root Sum Uncertainty method choosing an existing Uncertainty Budget or to enter a value manually to determine how the Uncertainty in calculated for a particular calibration Simply click the unlabeled button to the right of the gt Uncertainty control to bring up the Select Uncertainty Method Budget form The four buttons are the only controls that are active on this form Calc Clear Close and Select Uncertainty Study Field Button Description Name Calc button To use the Root Sum of Squares method click on the Calc button Clear button If values need to be entered manually click the Clear button This will set the values in Uncertainty Coverage factor k
79. characteristics on the same parts unexpected variation in the average of these measurements is Known as gage reproducibility Observed Averages Operator B Operator A Reproducibility Appraiser x Part Interaction When reproducibility error varies from part to part that is called Appraiser x Part Interaction Stability When using a measurement system to evaluate the same characteristic on a master or part over an extended period of time the maximum change in bias is known as stability uncertainty or drift Observed Averages Time 2 Time 1 Gage Stability Consistency When using a measurement system to evaluate the same characteristic on a master or part over an extended period of time the maximum change in repeatability is known as consistency uncertainty or drift Variation Components Equipment Variation EV Equipment Variation is an alternate term for repeatability used primarily when we want to refer to repeatability by initials EV Appraiser Variation AV Appraiser Variation is an alternate term for reproducibility used primarily when we want to refer to reproducibility by initials AV Although appraiser usually refers to an operator or technician it can also mean different instruments or different plant locations etc or all of the above Interaction INT Interaction is short for Appraiser x Part Interaction used when we want to refer to it by initial
80. defaults to the current date Select the gage ID of the measurement device In this field you ll see the name of the gage or measurement device GAGEtrak automatically sets this field to Stability Enter the name of the person conducting the study Refers to the Measurement Systems Analysis Reference Manual published by AIAG Use Version 4 for new studies Existing Version 3 studies may be updated for new features by changing to Version 4 Updates are reversible Select if study is approved Use this field to enter any comments Enter your internal company reference standard part or job number if relevant Select a related reference standard or part number such as the customer or supplier part number if relevant This field displays the description or name of the reference standard or part In this field you ll see the characteristic that you re evaluating Be sure to enter the minimum and maximum Specification Limit values otherwise the software can t calculate the tolerance values for your study A process capability or performance target may be entered typically 1 33 or 1 67 GAGEtrak will use it to reduce Tolerance to be an estimate of Process Variation If you know the 6 Sigma Process Variation of the characteristic that you re measuring enter it here It will be divided by 6 and used for Total Variation TV Select the format you want for calculations Select the format you want for calculations Ent
81. ees 205 Chapter 13 Reports lirica lennon qentearsansenayecsteosbecudseues pninayeanmanuseouleerteccassuesgodseotounssaun noaiiantsquancarenouse 207 Report Commands ana FUNCTIONS arica 207 VIGWINE REDOT sia A A AA A ie 207 A Ke TO 208 gn 209 REPO DESC DONOSO A hennen benedenstad A 210 Appendix A Calibration Label Kina ia 215 Installing the Label Printer and Windows SoftWare ibi 215 PANUNG Carton LODES A AS 215 Printing Labels from Calibration ENT 216 Printing Labels from the Calibration Labels Report usina bn 217 Viewing and Printne Lape Sreser a A E OON 218 Appendix B Gage Calibration and Control ssesesessssesecsececsssesececececsesececececsssesecececsesesecececsesesecececsesesesecesseseseseceee 219 PU DOSCO CONDE LON edere acidos 219 COMDEACION Terminology ee a E A A a 219 Seele nk a EEA EEEE E A EAE E E o A E 219 Rurenasea PRECISION S tanda GS eera a a acid 219 Purchased WORKING Standards irradia ds 220 Test EQUIP Saa as 220 TestMater ali ma 220 Gages or Cause it didas bss 220 nventoryana Classifiicic OA dd ido conca ided 220 CAMION e eo elos 221 Cambra Pr atado 221 Referentes dede 222 Resources for Books Publications and Reference MaterialS oooooooncconnoonnnononnonnnononcnnnonnnnnononnnnonannnnnnnnaninnnnnnos 222 System Administrator GUIA Oia ds 223 Chapter 1 Motala HON taaan s 223 OSO a dom eten A ds 223 Eede eee tenen attente oa ante eerste ed A A E A A E 223 Installation OD COWS se ra 223
82. estimate Even if you will not actually make a correction This estimate has been corrected for systematic error You may use this choice at all times but the next two choices are also available If Linearity was acceptable and Bias was unacceptable you may substitute this estimate for the first choice Even if you will not actually make a correction This estimate has been partially corrected for systematic error and is more conservative than the first choice If Linearity and Bias were both acceptable you may substitute this estimate for the first choice This estimate is not corrected for systematic error and is more conservative than the first choice Note If you believe Linearity error is negligible and not relevant you may select No for all three Linearity choices Include unless it is not relevant Include unless it is not relevant Include unless it is not relevant This would be GRR if there is more than one appraiser For example if this study will apply to a family of gages you could use a different gage for each reference value Another example would use one technician for half the trials and another technician for the rest When your choices have been made click on Update Budget This will partially fill out the Uncertainty Budget 172 Uncertainty Budget Sub tab Linearity Bias and Uncertainty lo meal Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty Study Date 425 2012 Co Part No Gage ID C
83. example a manual created with Microsoft Word will have a File Description of Microsoft Word Document View Button Select this button to activate the registered application associated to the file extension for example Microsoft Word Procedure Entry Gage List In the Procedure Gage List screen lists all gages affiliated with the particular procedure At a glance users can see what gages will be effected when a particular procedure is altered The subform is Read Only for all users ES Procedure Entry AE gt Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments Gage List Procedure Name CP992 Clone Asset_No Model_No Manufacturer Description Kodak COMPANY 14 Kodak Optic Comparator SUNDSTRAND GO NO GO Standard COMPANY 0001 NO 3 Di Bore Gage Mitutoyo COMPANY Digital Microme Digital ariab EMPLOYEE FEELER GAGE FEELER GA 0 200 LBS DIG DIGITAL FOR STARRETT COMPANY 0 0 1 50 GPM FLOWMETE Fluke 73 Fluke COMPANY Multimeter Digital ariab Mitutoyo COMPANY Digital Indicator Digital ariab G A1230196 8510 COMPANY Digital Scale Digitalariab GNG 00013 Vermont Gage COMPANY Go NoGo Pin G Attribute GNG124 COMPANY SMWWD1 GO NC PLUG GAGE GNG125 COMPANY SMWO1 GO NO PLUG GAGE COMPANY 028 Step Gag Step Gage MITUTOYO SE COMPANY 5 6 OD MIC O MICROMETE STARRETT COMPANY GAGE BLOCK GAGE BLOC MITUTOYO SE COMPANY 1 2 OD MIC O MICROMETE MITUTOYO SE COMPANY 2 3 OD MIC 0 MICROMETE MITUTOYO SE COMPANY 3 4 OD MI
84. exceeded and there has been no activity in the current session the user will be prompted to log back into the application For a 21 CFR installation only a non zero whole number can be entered for the User Login Timeout Period For a Standard Installation a zero value can be entered to disable the login prompt but still maintaining security Enter a list of e mail addresses separated by semicolons that will receive an automatic e mail notification based on the number set in Unsuccessful Login Attempts has been exceeded If the Restricted Issue To Authorized Users checkbox is checked the application will control the persons authorized to Issue gages If in Gage Entry Auth Persons Restrict Issue is blank or if Program Default is selected the application will check whether or not Restrict Issue to Authorized User is checked in Settings installation default for this feature is unchecked if it is the Issued To field in Issue Gages will list only the authorized users that were entered on the Gage Entry Auth Persons for that gage If Restrict Issue to Authorized is not checked all staff will be listed in the Issue To in Issue Gages form If you want to record actions users perform in the program such as record modifications and deletions make a selection from the Enable Audit Trail list box The Basic Audit Trail lists basic user and action information The Advanced Audit Trail lists basic user action and Old and New Value info
85. fcurve near the Specification Limits The horizontal width of the f curve is about six times the Repeatability and the horizontal distance between a specification limit and the 50 point on the curve is Bias Attribute Analytic Formulas C acceptance count P probability of a particular acceptance count x normal score plots on vertical scale in this case y variable measurement plots on horizontal scale in this case y predicted variable measurement b intercept a slope horizontal vertical in this case n sample size Adjustment for Discrete Data Adding or subtracting 0 5 to make the number closer to 10 adjusts each acceptance count to calculate P values that convert well to normal scores For example P 0 0 0 5 20 0 025 A table of the normal distribution will show that the corresponding normal score is 1 96 204 Table of Counts Probabilities and Normal scores C 0 1 P 0 025 0 075 xX 1 96 1 44 C 10 11 P 0 5 0 525 x 0 00 0 06 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 125 0 175 0 225 0 275 0 325 0 375 0 425 0 475 1 15 0 93 0 76 0 65 0 45 0 32 0 19 0 06 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 575 0 625 0 675 0 725 0 775 0 825 0 875 0 925 0 975 0 19 032 0 45 0 65 0 76 093 115 144 1 96 Note When there are multiple parts with a count of zero or twenty only the one closest to the average will be used in the linear regression The extra parts will be plotted on the charts but will not affect calculations
86. files fe Yes f No Please select the directory where the replaced files will be copied Backup File Destination Directory CA GAGE trak 6 5BACKUP Browse Cancel 10 If you re using a SQL version of GAGEtrak the installation program now asks where you want to install the database scripts Click the Browse button to select a location If you don t want to install the scripts remove the check from the Install MS SQL Script box Choose Database Scripts Location Setup will install the MS SOL database scripts in the following folder To install into a different folder click Browse and select another folder W Install MS SOL Script Destination Folder C Program Files CyberMetice Comp GAGEtrak 6 5Scripte Browse Cancel 11 Select the version of GAGEtrak that will be installed If your company is not required to comply with 21 CFR Part 11 select the radio button labeled Standard Application This is the default installation f your company is required to be compliant with 21 CFR Part 11 select the radio button labeled 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Application GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 229 lf you are not sure if you are required to comply or not select the standard version of the program Both versions are identical except that the compliant version requires security to be active at all times Select Propram Options Select the version of GAGE trak 6 6
87. for any gages still Open when the gage Status is set to Closed After service on all gages listed below has been completed use this field to set the completion date for the entire service request Enter the date or click the small button on the right of this field to automatically enter today s date In this field enter any notes about this request Choose the ID of the first gage for which you need service The gage s next due date is displayed here Each gage has a completion date for the service request Accept the original cost from Gage Entry or enter a new amount for which you want to insure the device use for return freight insurance if you re sending the device out for repair or calibration Mark the service status for each gage as Open or Closed If the application is set to change the status of a gage when it is returned from a service request that status change will be done when the gage s Status is set to Closed To view the letter currently linked to this record click View To view all available letters formatted for Service Request access Setup Setup CA Service Requests Click Print to print the letter associated with this record Chapter 7 Kit Entry A kit is a collection of gages or accessories used to measure a specific part Gages or accessories comprising a kit may be issued individually but a kit can only be issued if gages or accessories are complete To assist you in tracking all your gage
88. gt Uncertainty will be wrong Calibration Formula Listing Use the Custom Formula button next to the Before or After fields to help calculate a Before or After value if there is not a calibration reading for the selected standard the Calibration Formula Listing works like a calculator based on predefined or user defined formulas originally set in Formula Entry E Calibration Formula Listing Formula Mame Select a predefined formula from the dropdown list box You will notice that the value present in the field is retained from the last input for the selected formula calculation Elther retain the value or input a new value and select OK formula computes You will be reverted back to the Measurements form and the newly calculated value will have populated the field which in turn helps in computing the accuracy values This field is an editable field If the Add New button is selected the Formula Entry module will open for your use Refer to Calibration Formula Entry for more information 118 Calibration Entry Procedures In this screen you can see any calibration procedures that are attached to the gage This contains three additional tabs The Procedure Text tab is shown below It holds the description of the attached procedure ES Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals N Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH gt Procedur
89. gt 183 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval E AboutBox Archive Filter B AuditLog_Advance a AuditLog_ Basic E Auth_Persons B Auto Email Header El Auto Email List El BackUp and Restore E Bookmarks CA Request Filter El CalHistory a Calib ttachmentsForm a Calibration Calibration Work Order Filter E Calibration Cost amp Labor Filter Calibration Due Listing Filter Record 14 OL gt gt t Form Caption 43 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval About Archive Filter Audit Log Audit Log Authorize Persons Auto Emailer Auto Email List Entry Data Backup Bookmarks Corrective Action Request Filter Calibration History on this Gage Attachments Calibration Work Order Filter Calibration Cost amp Labor Filter Calibration Due Listing Filter The table below describes the fields on this form GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 257 Field Button Name Description Form Name Text defining the form in the title of the active window Form Caption The name that is visible on the top left corner of the form Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button Close If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu Settings Form Tabs Main Menu The tabs within the main menu features can be revised to be more client expressive for example the Measurements tab can be revised to read Capacity in Calibration Entry ES Setti
90. initiate Action What will happen once the event has been triggered Chapter 5 Entering Personnel Select the Personnel menu to enter user records Staff Entry In Staff Entry you can enter and view detailed employee records for your staff including information like training ID photo what gages their authorized to use and whether a gage has been issued to them Staff Entry Information ES Staff Entry Information Training Photo Authorized Gages Issued Gages Employee ID 4100 Name Adam Aaron Active Address 1st Street SS No 222 22 2222 City State ZIP San Diego Ca y 99999 Job Title Mechanic E Mail DOB 11 29 1986 Home Pager 555 9999 922 7300 Date Hired 12 13 2002 Work Phone 555 9999 Ext 1112 Date in Job 12 13 2002 Emergency Contact Name Sara Smith Department Maintenance Emergency Contact Phone 555 9999 Craft Mech Rate 25 00 Seniority 3 Skill Level 5 Record KEK 2 gt gt gt of 7 The following table explains each of the fields and buttons in this screen Field Name Description Employee ID Enter a unique alphanumeric identifier for each employee Name In this field enter the employee s full name Active Check this box to show that the employee is currently active If you don t mark the employee as active his or her name won t appear on reports that list available employees Address City Enter the employee s mailing address including city state and zip code Sta
91. is not acceptable none of the key fields is unique Gage ID Standard ID 100 10 1 Inch Block 100 10 1 Inch Block Table Definitions The next few pages contain a list of tables that are most commonly used in GAGEtrak 6 7 Table Name Analytic_RefValues Description A list of values used for analytical studies Associated From Gage RR Studies Field List Data Type Length ID Long Integer key 4 GRR_Results_ID Long Integer 4 345 346 Field List Accepts LSRefVal1 LSRefVal2 LSRefVal3 USRefVal1 USRefVal2 USRefVal3 Data Type Long Integer Double Double Double Double Double Double Table Name Authorized Persons Length Description A list of all personnel authorized to accept return gages Associated Form AuthorizedGages Auth_Persons Field List Auth_ID AuthName AuthNote Gage_ID Data Type Long Integer key Text key Memo Text key Table Name Auto Email Header Length 4 100 0 50 Description A list of events that trigger automatic sending of e mail Associated Form Auto Emailer Field List Email_ID Email_Event Send_List Send_IssuedTo Email_text After_Body Send_AuthUser Data Type Long Integer key Text Long Integer Long Integer Memo Long Integer Long Integer Table Name Auto Email List Description List email of a particular employee Associated Form Auto Email List Entry Field List Email ID Employee_ID Data Type
92. itself Each standard group will have one header record The Status table contains all of your gage status options 286 Table Name Export Filename Helpful Information Supplier Supplier The Supplier table stores all of your supplier information Records After you ve selected one or more tables to export click the Export Table s button The Export program automatically sends the file s to the directory where your program file resides When the export is finished a message will tell you that GAGEtrak has successfully exported the tables Importing Data You can import data into the same tables from which you can export using the same filenames and file types as for the Export utility ES Export Import Export Import Table s To Import Format to Import From Calibration Header A Excel 2000 Gage Calibration Standards Saved Advanced Filters Custom Field Labels Gage Pat Li imported Gage Part Links Watt Talele The easiest way to import data is to first export data from GAGEtrak s empty database to the file format of your choice You ll then have the exact import configuration in place for the file Next open the file and duplicate its configuration for a file you already have or add the records you want to import to the file created by the export In order to import files you must name them as shown with the appropriate file extension of TxT or xLs Make sure that you put the files you re importin
93. key Text key GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 373 Length 50 50 Table Name KitGageTypeLink Description List the type and number of gages belonging to a Kit Associated From KitRequiredGageTypes Field List Data Type Length Kit_ID Text key 50 GM_Type Text key 50 Quantity Long Integer 4 Table Name KitGageUseList Description Records use of gages belonging to a particular Kit Associated From Kit Entry Field List Data Type Length Kit_ID Text key 50 Gage_ID Text key 50 KitGageUseCheck Long Integer 4 KitGageUseMemo Memo 0 KitGageUseDesc Text 50 Table Name Label_Har Description Contains attributes of every label type Associated From Labels Field List Data Type Length Label_Name Text key 50 Description Text 50 Height Text 25 Width Text 25 FontSize Text 10 Font Text 20 Columns Text 1 Field_Label Long Integer 4 Logo Long Integer 4 Company_Logo Long Binary 0 Logo_Align Text 50 374 Field List H_Company1 H_Company2 Text_Align Field_Align LT1_C1 LT2_C1 LT3_C1 LT4_C1 LT5_C1 LT6_C1 LT7_C1 LT8_C1 LF1_C1 LF2 C1 LF3 C1 LF4_C1 LF5 C1 LF6 C1 LF7_C1 LF8_C1 LT1_C2 LT2_C2 LT3_C2 LT4_C2 LT5_C2 LT6_C2 LT7_C2 LT8_C2 LF1_C2 LF2 C2 LF3 C2 LF4_C2 LF5_C2 LF6_C2 LF7_C2 LF8_C2 Data Type Long Integer Long Integer Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text
94. manually enter a calibration frequency ES New Calibration Frequency New Calibration Frequency v Dropdown listbox on this form shows suggested new frequencies You may change the frequency for this gage or select From the list to apply the suggested Frequency Method A3 Formulas a significance at lo g number in tolerance at h 108 n number calibrated at lo lo existing interval new interval Ro reliability at existing interval R reliability target Ro g n g 2 Y gt Rk y_ Ry It Re Ban Dt n 25 E gay RA a will not be allowed to exceed 1 Use the following formulas if a lt Significance Threshold Extrapolation Formulas h In Min Ao for 0 gt Ro lt 1 h 1 1 B ho for Ro h 1 R 2 h for Ro 0 Interpolation formulas Used when a change s has already been made that has proved to be excessively large lo Jo I 2 Each subsequent increment of change is reduced by half Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records Calibration Entry Calibration To enter calibration records select Calibration Entry from the Calibrations menu you may also select the Calibration button from the Gage Entry lInformation window A window similar to the one shown below will appear When you first open this screen GAGEtrak displays the most recent calibration record If you filtered for a group of gages the most recent record for the first gage in the group will appear
95. of Statistical Methods See Other Techniques References at the end of the MSA chapter for details on how to download or view these free publications Linearity Formulas x reference value y observation x b intercept a slope m subgroup size g number of subgroups y predicted bias R goodness of fit SE standard error of linearity df degrees of freedom 2 Xy ax Y a SU can yx x gm ES gm gm y by y sp nl Pd wy gm 2 df gm 2 _ q tStat SE Y ay 1 t Stat P SE x Poa ig gm gt x xy 1 y b axx confidence bands for xo b aXx E E em 2 0915 X SE x 2 ES Xx a R gm Bias Formulas y Observation x 178 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 SEs standard error of bias Oo repeatability Avg Bias y Baas gt OY gm l df gm 1 SE T Confidence Bounds when range method is specified for bias df from q table Confidence Bounds Bias ds 1 41421 1 9 1 27931 2 8 1 23105 3 7 1 20621 4 6 1 19105 1 12838 13 14 ES 2 1 91155 3 8 1 80538 5 7 1 76858 7 5 1 74989 9 3 1 73857 1 69257 15 2 9 2 23887 9 7 2 15069 8 4 2 12049 11 2 2 10522 13 9 2 09651 2 05875 x SE X If 0 025 d Table g 1 row is df g 2 row is d 5 3 8 2 48124 7 5 2 40484 11 1 2 37883 14 7 2 36571
96. only need to use this feature if your company is required to keep track of all parts that are measured by your gages Part identification Kit Entry Required Gage Select the specific gages to be used in this kit Information Required Gage Types Required Gages History DS Kit ID Kit 001 Kit Description Test Kit Gage ID Description Location H C 002 CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH BIN 12 a DB S N 1 0001 NO 3 Dial Bore Floor Insp Bench a FG25169 0 200 LB S DIGITAL FORCE GAUGE METROLOGY LAB H GNG124 SMWO1 GO NOGO 0517 055 LAB B AG13 10M03 0 D RING GAGE 31 23 LAB Record 4 4 1 TACIE of 5 Record 14 d 1 gt e of 2 Scenarios Gage Gage ID Type A001 Type A A002 Type A A003 Type A f you wish to issue Gage ID A001 select the Required Gages tab and select Gage ID 1001 When this kit is issued you will be issuing Gage ID A001 If you wish to issue either Gage ID A001 A002 or A003 select the Required Gage Types tab and select Gage Type type a When this kit is issued you will be issuing Gage ID A001 A002 or A003 f you wish to issue more than one of a gage type of any Gage IDs such as A001 A002 or A003 select the Required Gage Types tab and select Gage Type type a and enter a quantity of two 2 When issuing this kit you will be issuing any two combinations of A001 A002 and A003 for example A001 and A002 or A001 and A003 etc Example Create a kit and select a gage type of Caliper If
97. open previously saved criteria for use and create and save new criteria Click the Show All Records icon to clear any filter and show all records Sort all of your records in ascending order numbers show before letters Sort all of your records in descending order numbers show after letters 22 CloseActiveForm Close the active form Pop Up Calendar for Date Fields You can enter dates by choosing them from a pop up calendar instead of manually typing them Whenever you re entering information in a filter or data entry screen double click in any date field to view the calendar Choose a Date e 3 04 Jul SMT WT FS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 39101112114 15161718192021 2223 24 2526 27 28 24 30 31 7 15 2009 Uk Today Cancel When the calendar first appears if the date field is blank then the date on the calendar will be the current date If there is a date in the field the calendar will show that date To select another date click the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to the desired month and year and then click the day of the month Click the Ok button to accept the date click the Cancel button to close the calendar without selecting a date or click Today to enter today s date in the date field Record Navigation Bar Use the navigation buttons located at the bottom left corner of the form to move through your records Each button has an arrow on it that indicates its navigation direct
98. or more combo boxes here For form report or Functions select the item you want to set security rights For form control or report control select the form or report then select the control on that form report that you want to set security rights Select the permission to be assigned to the object For available Permissions select a form or report first GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 263 Security Object Permissions This form is used to view a comprehensive list of objects and permissions for a selected form report control or function ES Security DER Groups Users Group Permissions Object Permissions Status Select Object Select Form Form Gage Entrd C Report O Report Control Function Control Mame Control Type Grou Permissions Form Form User Edit Add Form Form Issue Read Only Form Form Guest Read Only Form Form Calibration Read Only Form Form Admin E ditfAdd Delete Tolerance Text box Admin Read rite Tolerance Text box Admin Read rite Asset No Text box Admin ReadW nte Attach Procedures Command button Admin Visible Enabled Attach Standards Command button Admin Visible Enabled Authorized Persons SubForm SubRepe Admin Read rite Average CuclesLs Test hoe Admin Read write The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Select Object Select the type of object for which you would like to view permissions Sel
99. part used in the study Only eight parts are needed for the study but since we need to find parts that meet certain criteria we often have to check more than eight parts The attribute data consists of checking each part twenty times and recording how many times the part is accepted We do this until we have found at least one part that is accepted zero times at least one part that is accepted twenty times and at least six parts with acceptance counts that can be anywhere from one to nineteen In case there are extra parts GAGEtrak will allow up to three entries for each acceptance count In case there are more than three parts for a certain acceptance count there are instructions on how to choose which three to include When you click the Calc button GAGEtrak adjusts the percent accepted for each part and converts it to a normal score which makes the f curves plot as diagonal straight lines GAGEtrak then uses linear regression to calculate repeatability and bias Information Tab 3 Gage RR Attribute Analytic Method fos x Information Lower Specification Upper Specification Study Date 4 25 2012 Co PartNo MSA Gage ID MSA3 139 o Part No 10 221 1 o Gage Desc Part Desc Bracket Rt Hand Study Type Analytic Characteristic Appraiser Sample Appraiser One Specification Limits Min 10 Max 10 MSA Version ale Approved Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Percentage Format 000 ee Number Format 00000000
100. parts with acceptance counts between one and 19 out of twenty If you have more than three parts with the same acceptance count then enter them randomly Enter a variable measurement for at least one part that was accepted twenty times out of twenty If you have more than three such parts enter the three largest Gage Performance Curve This chart shows how the probability of acceptance gradually changes in an f curve near the Specification Limits The horizontal width of the f curve is about six times the repeatability and the horizontal distance between a specification limit and the 50 point on the curve is bias The repeatability and bias are not necessarily the same at both specification limits Probability of Accepting 100 000 a a q 0 00600000 0 00400000 0 00400000 0 00600000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reference Values Performance Curve Probability Plots This chart uses a special scale that makes the Gage Performance Curve look like a series of straight lines The horizontal width of the diagonal line is 5 15 times the Repeatability and the horizontal distance between a specification limit and the 50 point on the corresponding diagonal line is Bias The repeatability and bias are not necessarily the same at both specification limits Probability of Accepting This chart shows how the probability of acceptance gradually changes in an
101. print but not edit this report even if they do not have GAGEtrak as long as they have the free Adobe Reader The following is an example of the Export Format and Export Options selections for reports Export Select the export file format options Export Format A Export Options Filename My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents as DESKTOP 091 a File name Y My Network Save as type Rich Text Format RTF Cancel Places Export Options allows you to select a save location Send The Send command from the File menu allows you to output reports to Microsoft Outlook or any MAPI compatible mail program The output includes subforms and subreports The file format and appearances are as shown below E mail Report Select Report Forma Rich Text Format RTF Portable Document Format PDF Excel Worksheet Format ALS Cancel Export E Mail Ready Print Setup Select Print Setup from the File menu if you want to change report print settings such as printer selections paper size and source or report orientation Portrait or Landscape For more information on how to set up page characteristics refer to Report Settings in Customizing Reports in the System Administrator s Guide 210 The type of printer driver installed controls some options but a typical setup window looks like this Print Setup Printer Name Microsoft APS Document Writer Status
102. records may mean all records subjected to filter if any Links may also act as filters This field has a list box This is a field common in type and contents between the two linked tables The names and field sizes may vary but it will only link with exactly the same record This field has a list box Name of the table linked with Table 1 Not all its records even if subjected to filter will be included in the report GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 301 Table 2 Linked Field Same description as Table 1 Linked Field Relationship There are three types of relationship as described in the illustration It is a good practice to use the conventions described for 7able 7and Table 2above but these two tables can actually be interchanged as described in selection 2 and 3 of the Join Properties option Setting Data Sort Order To set the order or arrangement of data in your report you have to specify which table and what field will determine this order a SOL Builder Set Sort Orders Which fields do you want to sort You can choose multiple fields trom multiple tables listed below Tables Gage_Everts hd Available Fields Selected Fields Sort Order Ascending hd Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt You can however choose not to apply any particular order on your records within the Selected Fields list box if you do not your report will display them as they appear in your Original re
103. represents a field In Datasheet View you can add change and view records This format offers more flexibility in that you can resize column widths and row heights rearrange column positions and even hide columns Since the program automatically presents records in Form View you must manually switch to Datasheet View use the toolbar icon or select Datasheet View from the View menu Sample Datasheet View of Gage Records m A Ua CAU E a GagelID Description Ref Standard Type ___ UnitofMeas NextDueDate Initial Times Used Ca _ ODEGELK GageBlock 0 050 4 0 fin 81 rade0 V GageBlocks 81 gradeO A Inch 7 15 2009 gt CE Micrometer 0 1 0001 OutsideMic 01 0001 Inch 2007 O02F OMIC Micrometer0 1 0001 WI Outside Mic01 001 mh 29 2007 002G OMIC_ Micrometer 0 1 0001_ Outside Mic 1 2 0001 Inch 2 9 2007 _ 003EDMIC DepthMic 0Slnch_____ Depthmic06 001 Inch 29 2007 004EMIC_ Inside Mic 28 Inch Inside Mic 2 8 00 meh 292007 005E HMIC Height Mic 1 121 0001 HeightMie1 121 0001 Inch 2 9 2007 333 Q06E EROD End Measuring Rod 1 24 inch E End Measuring Rods 1 24 in Inch 11 2007 Q06F ERODM End Measuring Rod 25 600 mm End Measuring Rod 25 600 mm mm 11 4207 007EVAMIC V Anwil Micrometer 05 inch Anvil Mic 05 1 0001 in Inch mm 249 2007 O08E STMIC Screw Threads Mic 0 1 inch
104. s where GAGEtrak comes in Instead of sifting through hundreds of cards to find gages due for calibration GAGEtrak automates the task letting you selectively create a list of these gages Calibration Schedules You usually determine calibration schedules by the gage s classification You can establish initial calibration schedules by expected usage engineering judgment and bargaining As you gather actual calibration information you might need to adjust the schedules The primary intent of a calibration schedule is to detect accuracy deterioration prior to intolerable levels of accuracy Accuracy deterioration usually results from gage usage less often it results from the passage of time The most common methods for determining calibration schedules are Elapsed calendar time the most popular method it establishes a fixed calendar time such as 90 days as a checking interval Actual amount of usage time and cycles based on counting the number of days or operating cycles for which the gage was used you can keep this count manually or automatically Actual operating time an excellent method for electrically driven gages a device used for measuring actual operating time is called a coulometer Calibration Practice To ensure consistency in your calibration techniques develop procedure manuals of calibration practices At minimum include tolerances for accuracy standards temperature and humidity controls i
105. such as Close etc You can customize field values under the Menu Bar Custom Name field by entering a new value text in this field for example changing Copy with Duplicate will display Duplicate as a selection on the dropdown menu for Edit To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu Settings Messages GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 259 The tabs within the main menu features can be revised to be more client expressive for example the Measurements tab can be revised to read Capacity in Calibration Entry E Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Message Text Aili Tolerance must be numeric Tolerance must be numeric Tolerance must be numeric Tolerance must be numeric Of the first three items only one can be selected Select the items you want to be copied to the uncertainty budget Add any additional type or B items to the uncertainty budget Add Authorized Persons first for gage restriction Add Items to List amp Chr 34 amp field is required when amp Chr 34 Custom List amp Adding of Part record is not allowed amp vbCrLf amp Select only from list Additional Number must be a number amp CHA 13
106. tables for instance link to the Gage ID In this case not all descriptions will be used 300 Establishing Table Links After selecting your report fields from different tables you should now establish the link or links between the tables so as to keep information on a specific record together Define these links by specifying the tables and the fields that will be linked and the type of link to use a SOL Builder Define Table Links You link two tables at a time through their common field it is not necessary Define relationships or links between selected tables el Ta that the fields have the same name it D zage ID INNER ame i is necessary that they be of the same type e g GagelD and Gage ID Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt The table and linked fields have drop down lists limited to your selected table and the fields of the table A relationship selection window Is also provided to guide you Join Properties tables are equal Include ALL Records from Calibration Header and only those records fram Gage Events where the joined fields are equal gt Include ALL Records from Gage Events and only those records from Calibration Header where the joined fields are equal OR Cancel Table link fields Field Name Table 1 Table 1 Linked Field Table 2 Description Name of the table in which all its records are to be reflected in the report All
107. that will be installed f Standard Application 27 CFR Part 11 Compliant Application IF Your company requires software to be 21 CFA Part 11 compliant select that version of the application IF your company does not require this compliancy or vou are not sure select the standard application Cancel 12 Select the user profile that GAGEtrak will be installed under lf you want every user who logs in to the workstation to see the shortcut for the GAGEtrak application select the radio button labeled Common Users Group This is the default installation f you want only the current user to see the shortcut for the GAGEtrak application select the radio button labeled Current User Only Select User Profile A NL we i i di ee i n A si 1 Cancel 13 Now the program will ask you to select the Programs group to add GAGEtrak s shortcuts to You can also choose to put shortcuts for the application and 230 manual on the desktop We recommend that you select the default GAGEtrak 6 7 Select Program Manager Group Manual Enter the name of the Program Manager group to add GAGEtrak 6 6 icons to GAGEtrak E E Accessories Administrative Tools Applications Business Objects Cuyberhdetricz Dell Accessones GAGEtrak 4 2007 GAGEtrak 6 5 GAGEtrak FastTrak Games e Create Desktop Icon For GAGE trak 6 6 ou are now ready to install GAGEtrak 6 6 Press the Next button to begin the installati
108. the database using user detined table relationships used for Reports vith multiple source tables and summary queries Selecting Tables and Fields Follow step 2 just as you did with the Simple Query to select your table name and field names Once you have selected fields from one table you can choose another table and add fields from that table to your Selected Fields list a SOL Builder Select report fields In the Selected Fields listing the string Which fields do you want in your query ne oi i of characters before the period Tables Gage_Events y indicates the table name the string Available Fields Selected Fields Calibration_Header Gage_ID Gage_Events Gage_ID Gage Events Evert ID name Take note that you have two after the period indicates the field Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Fields that you will use to link your tables need not be included in the Selected Fields list We do suggest that you link fields coming from the table where all the records are to be included in the report For example you have a table of gage calibration records which does not include details of each gage and another table listing the details for all the gages For a certain period of time not all gages are to be included in the filtered table If you want a report that will include all the filtered gages with its corresponding gage descriptions you will need to link to both
109. the employee has for example Supervised Calibration Inspection Dept in 2008 In this section you can track classes or certifications that each employee has completed Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the screen to see the different fields Field Name Description Start Date and End Date School Cost Status Certification Cert Expiration Date Hours CEUs Continuing Education Units Comments Description Enter a brief description of the training Beginning and ending dates of the training Enter the name of the school where the employee attended training Enter the cost of the class Use this field to indicate whether the employee has finished this particular class If this training was for a particular certification enter the type of certificate If the certification is good for only a specified length of time enter the expiration date in this field Enter how many hours the training was worth or how long it lasted In this field enter the number of credit units earned for the training Enter any other relevant information for this training or certification Staff Entry Photo Click this tab to attach a personnel photo for more information see Insert Object and Paste Logo for more information 272 reet Otea Pane Preso peert MAJA A a Staff Entry Authorized Gages ES Staff Entry MK information Training Photo Authorized Gages Issued Gages Em
110. the gage s description will appear in this field Risk analysis is already internal here You can t change it Refers to the Measurement Systems Analysis Reference Manual Use Version 4 for new studies Existing Version 3 studies may be updated for new features by changing to Version 4 Updates are reversible Enter the code to be used for Pass like 1 or P letters and numbers are accepted Enter the code to be used for Fail like 0 or F letters and numbers are accepted Select the format you want for calculations Enter any comments such as the gage I D of a variable gage to be used for cross checking Enter your internal company part or job number Select or enter the number of the part used in the study After you select the part number its part description appears in this field Select if study is approved 192 Field Button Name Upper Limit Lower Limit Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var GRR Percentage Format Input Tab Description The upper specification limit for the part If attribute data will be used for reference values enter a numerical code for Pass Value e g 1 see above and enter a slightly larger value for Upper Limit e g 1 5 The lower specification limit for the part If attribute data will be used for reference values enter a numerical code for Pass Value e g 1 see above and enter a slightly smaller value for Lower Limit e g 0 5 If variable data will be used
111. the rules you defined in the Adjusting Calibration Frequency Settings table Please see the System Administrator s Guide for details This field stores the next due date for calibration based on the calibration frequency You must check the Pass box in order for GAGEtrak to show the next due date Note If a gage has a calibration frequency of Usage or Cycles and the gage is not past due for calibration you will not be presented with a Next Due Date this field will remain blank until the gage needs to be calibrated Use this field to store the date of the calibration it s automatically set to the current date You can change it until the calibration record is saved Like the Date field this field automatically displays the current time If you change the time enter it in this format HH MM This field is required In this field select or enter the name of the department that used the gage before calibration Select or enter the name of the person who calibrated the gage This field automatically displays the name of the current user but you can change it In this field enter the type of work being performed such as calibration repair or rebuild Enter any results or comments typically used for attribute type gaging or dimensional layouts Enter calibration measurements into the Measurements table see below Enter any action that may be required such as send out for repair 112 Field Button Name As F
112. the system that trigger an occurrence for example receipt of an email when a gage status has changed Parameter If an email Event is selected a recipient email address needs to be included in the parameter field Replace lt send to email address here gt With a valid email server address The preceding texts are defaults for the email subject and body identification To include a revised Subject and body identifier for the email follow the email address with a semicolon and an email subject description Application The Application drill down button can be used to load a file that needs to be run when an event is triggered For example a review of a comprehensive Microsoft Word document on a specific Calibration Procedure can be reviewed if a gage failed calibration Additional gage events can be established in Setup Gage Events Using Gage Records Issue Return Tracking Records When you need to issue a gage to a different location or department you can record the issue in GAGEtrak This feature is particularly useful in a gage crib situation where gages and inspection equipment are loaned out and then returned for storage and safe keeping By tracking this information you ll know which gages your company uses most often and which employees or departments use them To check out or return a gage click the Issue Return button at the bottom of the Gage Entry Information screen The Issue Tracking Entry screen will appe
113. to 12 for each reference value or 5 to 60 for Bias Only studies required Linearity Analysis Fields Field Name Average Bias per Part Predicted Bias Goodness of Fit Std Error SE of TV SE of Tol Intercept Slope Coefficient DF t Stat t Critical Description Average Bias for each reference value Click the calc button to see this The Bias predicted by the regression line Click the calc button to see this A measure of how well the regression line fits the data points on a scale of 0 to 1 Values near 1 fit well Values near 0 fit poorly In case of poor fit the data must be evaluated graphically rather than numerically The standard deviation of the regression not the raw data The Standard Error divided by Total Variation If this is large it can cause false acceptance of statistical tests The Standard Error divided by Tolerance 6 If this is large it can cause false acceptance of statistical tests A coefficient of the regression equation equal to predicted bias when the reference value is zero assuming the gage were capable of measuring zero A coefficient of the regression equation equal to the change in bias per unit of change in reference value Both Intercept and Slope are called Coefficients of the regression equation Predicted Bias b a x Reference Value Where a Slope and b Intercept Degrees of Freedom sample size 2 used to determine t critical Eac
114. to approve the latest recommended change on a gage by gage basis If there are multiple recommended changes because more than one frequency is in use you will be asked to confirm that GAGEtrak is suggesting the right one When you are asked you will also have the opportunity to manually enter a calibration frequency ES New Calibration Frequency New Calibration Frequency Dropdown listbox on this Form shows suggested new Frequencies You may change the Frequency for this gage or select From the list bo apply the suggested frequency ES Calibration Entry P Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals Gage ID Description Status Y Active Gage S N Calib Freq Next Due Calibration Date 141 2 2009 Time 2 17 47 PM Account No Department v Certificate No By Administrator v Uncertainty Calibration Type v Coverage Factor 4 Results Deg of Freedom Action Required Temperature As Found Condition In vl Humidity Calibration Status Passed lt a Pressure Interval Adjustment Method Other C Pass Select Label Design Findings Record 14 4 43 gt blj of 43 Each calibration record contains the following fields Field Button Name Gage ID Status Description Gage S N Calib Freq Next Due Date Calibration Date
115. to it If Maintain Calibration Procedure History is set to false unchecked then edits can be made any time even if the procedure is used in a calibration To learn more about the Maintain Calibration Procedure History control see section Settings Cal Option of Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak in the Administrator Guide ES Procedure Entry gt Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments Gage List Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 94 Procedure DIAL DIGITAL AND VERNIER CALIPERS www iso ord Calibration Frequency 12 months can be modified according to stability purpose and usage 1 0 Scope This method describes the calibration of calipers inside and outside dimensions up to 72 inches 1800 mm and depth dimension up to 12 inches 300 mm Instrument resolution 0 001 or 0 0005 inch 0 02 or 0 05 mm 2 0 References This document is based on the DOD procedures 3 0 Definitions TI Test Instrument D Department of Defense 4 0 General Requirements Environment Temperature Change should not exceed 2 deg Fihr 1 deg Chr Humidity No excessive humidity Air quality N A Stabilization Stabilize equipments and standards at ambient temperature Preliminary Operations Record 14 1 TECIE of 5 84 This screen contains the following fields Field Button Description Name Procedure Name Enter a unique title for each procedure If you try to create two procedures with the same name
116. usage even if you enter a calibration record for the gage When you issue the gage GAGEtrak calculates a predicted estimated due date based on the remaining number of usages days You must use the Issue Tracking records for this to work Cycles similar in principle to the usage days method but schedules calibration only when the total number of cycles equals or exceeds the Frequency value cycles means either the number of parts measured or number of cycles operated You must use Issue Tracking records in order for this schedule type to work Note When calibration frequency is set to either Usage or Cycles the Calibration Schedule form changes appearance in order to accommodate Average Cycles Usages Per Day and an Estimated Due Date fields Field Button Name Average Cycles Usage Per Day Skip Direction Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Last Cal Date Next Due Date Estimated Due Date Initial Times Used Use Left Description Bef Use select this option when you must calibrate the gage before every use GAGEtrak will not automatically calculate calibration due dates for this frequency you must manually enter your due dates Aft Use select this option when you must calibrate the gage aftereach use GAGEtrak will not automatically calculate calibration due dates for this frequency you must manually enter the due dates This field is used for
117. with a blank report and discuss each of the elements of the canvas Creating a New Report GAGEtrak 6 7 s report editor comes with templates to help you build reports If you have a label printer using the most common label formats will fast track your label design You may also use the Label Wizard to develop new label designs quickly The report editor screen is common to all the templates For our purposes we will base our discussion on a basic blank report and build as we move along Towards the end of the discussion we will touch on the Label Wizard as a review of what we ve learned When you click the Create New Report button the window below will appear Select Report Template 11 2 Inch Label Label Wizard GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 293 Select Blank Report and click on the OK button H Report Editor New Report E OSAGA 460485 4482 BBG h A al ES WE Sa Leone Bt St S Ye GY Design Preview El a sw MainF eport PageHeader H Detail 4 5 PageFooter Detail User Interface The editor window is divided into four parts Explorer or Objects Fields Property Toolbox and the Designer Canvas Frame Title Description Explorer This Explorer window shows you a tree diagram of the different parts of your report designer canvas Click on any item to display its properties in the Property Toolbox Explorer E B MainReport H PageHeader H Detail H Page
118. x 3L Inactive Gage Label 1 2W x 1 1 2L Record 14 4 1 gt O of 41 No Calibration Gage Label 1 2W x 1 1 2L To print a label select the title of the desired label from the Select Label Design dropdown list and then click on the Print Label button The Print Label button will automatically send the label to the printer The height shown in the height column of the drop down list must match the height of the tape currently installed in your label printer Note The P Touch Label Printer ejects and cuts off a strip of blank label material approximately 1 long before printing This is a direct result of the design of these label printers The diagram below illustrates the mechanics of the P Touch printer Clear Laminate At point A in the diagram the print head transfers ink from the ink strip to the back of the clear laminate Rollers bond the color substrate and the clear laminate together at point B The laminated tape is then fed out until it reaches the cutter at point C The cutter is approximately one inch beyond the print head along the path of the tape therefore at the beginning of the printing process about one inch of blank tape has already advanced past the print head This problem cannot be eliminated however it can be mitigated by printing labels in batches rather than individually since the printer will feed a blank strip only at the beginning of each batch of labels To preview a label select the View Label butt
119. your report a SOL Builder Finish Below is the summary record source for your report You can modity edit the existing query through the text box below Select Gage_ID Calibration_Date From Calibration_Header ORDER BY Calibration_Header Calibration_Date ASC Cancel lt lt Back Finish You can modify the query by editing the text in this window if you know the right syntax for creating SQL statements however if you do not do this correctly an error message will appear We recommend that users do not edit the SQL statement displayed in this window When you are done click on the Finish button Advanced Query When creating reports using multiple tables use this query type You will be able to use the fields from different tables you select the tables are connected by links you create or specify It is very important that you know the structure of your tables and the types of the fields in these tables You cannot create links using two different kinds of fields e g a text field displaying the gage ID number cannot be linked to a date field showing the calibration date These linked fields should be common to both tables If you are not sure about this ask your database administrator about the properties of your tables In the Select Query Type window select the Advance Query button and click on Next GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 299 1 Display multiple fields from multiple tables in
120. 08 Next Calib Projected R amp R Schedules 3 24 2014 Next Due Date 9 25 2009 3 25 2019 3 25 2024 u se d Projected Calibration Schedule 9 27 2010 9 27 2011 9 26 2012 Record 14 4 1 gt gt t of 49 If usage OF cycles IS selected for Calib Freq the Calibration Schedule changes slightly as shown below ES Gage Entry Ti Information Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Gage ID C 002 Calibrator Last Calibrated By Calib Freq Average Cycles Usage Per Day Skip Direction Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval In House No User Name 10 Usage 05 Skip Forward v None Minimum Frequency Last Cal Date Next Due Date Estimated Due Date Initial Times Used 1 v Maximum Frequency 9 25 2008 Next Calib 9 25 2009 0 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Calibration Hours Est Calibration Cost R amp R Freq 5 Years R amp R Skip Direction Skip Forward Last R amp R Date 3 22 2004 Next R amp R Due Date 3 23 2009 Last R amp R Result Projected R amp R Schedules 3 24 2014 3 25 2019 3 25 2024 Use Left Use Used 0 9 27 2010 Projected Calibration Schedule 9 27 2011 9 26 2012 Record mM 1 gt gt t gt of 49 Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear
121. 10 Index Received Meu tdi obio 76 77 103 Records PAY GNIVELW NSA CMI O ceci a dann a dd nea ee se dd bean aa dane he mende 276 Calibration Records tn edere eat dent a 61 62 63 78 109 111 212 248 275 Gade SC OS POP PEC On see ae ea ae 113 Rererence Standard immense 57 Remove Spaces front Gage IDS nm 289 Reparnng Dala DAE 401 ROPS AD es rates esata AE 133 Repeatability Range Control Chart occcconcncccnnccccnncccnnconnnnnnncnnnoncnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 150 FCP ONS APPO RARA 207 noo Dei ol AN EN 134 Reset Gade ISSUS SAUS neste o ae o bo o do neede 289 Residual TOU SIZE eenen detentie 151 RESIO G mensne neee neat ea dieeten es ineen es viteit as eae in beletten binet 2 6 AGOMA Geer treme dd a ne rere re rt er rere 281 MA beenen ane benenden dieen 2 8 HEUrSmenb DAS aussi ai 57 Run Ghat and Average ON wennen Marten nike nee Hee 146 nn ET G 149 Schedule Calibration Schedule nran a indeed da 60 75 221 Gade R amp R Schedule titi a 73 A 239 259 Ee Lo 251 MESS ODP 251 SEN OEREN 209 Serial NUMDE wesende AI ensen naden star da 239 SIA Ie DE EE 57 A eneen tenet 89 266 Set A USO GATES anneer e eee eee oa eee 289 e Eo A 111 209 243 399 0 a Me Mod tai See Range Method nn A o A A 60 250 285 ie te 131 134 183 te 18 1a gre 1a 16 POS sete enter ae eee ceed aon ioe oe ered ey aoe eter One ee ey mene Mtoe oer een tae teed One ever ee 184 Stal NE 269 Standard DENON unit tii 154 lalo ID AA a
122. 2 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Version 6 7 User Guide Cyber Metrics CyberMetrics Corporation 1523 W Whispering Wind Drive Suite 100 Phoenix Arizona 85085 USA Toll free 1 800 777 7020 USA Phone 480 922 7300 Fax 480 922 7400 www CyberMetrics com Entire Contents Copyright 1988 2012 CyberMetrics Corporation All Rights Reserved Worldwide U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision b 3 ii of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 252 227 7013 Contractor manufacturer is CyberMetrics Corporation QUESTIONS Should you have any questions concerning this agreement or if you wish to contact CyberMetrics Corporation for any reason please write or call CyberMetrics Corporation 1523 W Whispering Wind Drive Suite 100 Phoenix AZ 85085 Tel 480 922 7300 USA Toll Free 1 800 777 7020 Fax 480 922 7400 TECHNICAL SUPPORT If you need technical support please call or write our product support and development office CyberMetrics Corporation 1523 W Whispering Wind Drive Suite 100 Phoenix AZ 85085 Tel 480 922 7300 USA Toll Free 1 800 777 7020 Fax 480 922 7400 Technical support is available by telephone during normal business hours Mountain Central time Email and Internet Support
123. 2222 Change Date SSS S EY CurentLocatin TOOCROM o ot UD Record A AR of 1 Fitered Notice at the bottom of the window shown above that the record navigation bar shows that this is record 1 of 1 Filtered To access a saved search click the Advanced Filter icon and click Open Search A list of your saved searches will be displayed Choose a previously saved search Ne Find all Ref Standards EGage blocks over 540 Gages Due for Calibration This Week Gages Past Due for Calibration new search Delete Show All Cancel Click the name of the search you want to open and click Select Your filtered records will be displayed Removing Filters After using either the Quick or Advanced Filters click the Show All Records icon to undo the filter so you can view all of your records K Printing of Records You can print records in both Datasheet and Form Views To do so select Print from the File menu You can also select Print Setup and Print Preview from the File menu These commands combined with the Filter Sort command will be useful when you re designing customized reports Find Command While you re in Form View or Datasheet View you can go to Edit gt Find or click the Find icon to search through your records for specific information For example you could search the database for gages located in a certain department or for gages you purchased last year 44 You can search for
124. 3 2 97917 A Confidence Bounds d Pj 2 Bias Xx SE Xt gy 0 025 2 10 7 7 3 179905 15 1 3 12869 22 6 3 11173 30 1 3 10321 37 5 3 09808 45 0 3 09467 52 4 3 09222 59 9 3 09039 67 3 3 08896 74 8 3 08781 82 2 3 08688 89 7 3 08610 g 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 1 11 6 23 8 35 8 47 3 58 3 68 7 78 6 88 1 97 1 13 2 1 15289 1 71041 2 07316 2 33824 2 54530 2 71422 2 85627 2 97847 3 08544 14 1 12 5 25 7 38 6 51 0 62 8 74 0 84 7 94 9 104 6 14 2 1 15115 1 70914 2 07213 2 33737 2 54452 2 71351 2 85562 2 97787 3 08487 15 1 13 4 27 5 41 3 54 6 67 2 79 3 90 7 101 6 112 1 15 2 1 14965 1 70804 2 07125 2 33661 2 54385 2 71290 2 85506 2 97735 3 08438 16 1 14 3 29 3 44 1 58 2 71 7 84 5 96 7 108 4 119 5 16 2 1 14833 1 70708 2 07047 2 33594 2 54326 2 71237 2 85457 2 97689 3 08395 17 1 15 1 31 1 46 8 61 8 76 2 89 8 102 8 115 1 127 0 17 2 1 14717 1 70623 2 06978 2 33535 2 54274 2 71190 2 85413 2 97649 3 08358 18 1 16 0 32 9 49 5 65 5 80 6 95 1 108 8 121 9 134 4 18 2 1 14613 1 70547 2 06917 2 33483 2 54228 2 71148 2 85375 2 97613 3 08324 19 1 16 9 34 7 52 3 69 1 85 1 100 3 114 8 128 7 141 9 19 2 1 14520 1 70480 2 06862 2 33436 2 54187 2 71111 2 85341 2 97581 3 08294 20 1 17 8 36 5 55 0 72 7 89 6 105 6 120 9 135 4 149 3 20 2 1 14437 1 70419 2 06813 2 33394 2 54149 2 71077 2 85310 2 97552 3 08267 d 1 12838 1 69257 2 05875 2 32593 2 53441 2 70436 2 84720 2 97003 3 07751 cd 0 8765 1 8150 2 7378 3
125. 44 Field Button Name Company Information Paste Logo and Insert Object Cancel Close Description Enter your company name address contact phone fax numbers and logo optional The two lines for your company name and logo will appear at the top of all reports To enter your company logo use the Insert Object or Paste buttons Use Insert Object if you already have a logo file or want to create the logo in a graphics program and Link it to GAGEtrak Use the Paste button if you ve copied the logo to Windows Clipboard Try to insert a logo graphic about the same size as the logo region shown that would fit into a square or rectangular area If the logo would fit best into a rectangle check the Use Wide Logo Field checkbox as shown above To avoid wasting memory don t use a logo with more colors than your printer can print You can use a scanner to obtain your logo but scanners are often set for more resolution or colors than your printer can support A logo created this way becomes a huge file that uses an excessive amount of memory To conserve memory paste your logo into GAGEtrak as a BMP file even if you created it in a graphics program Pasting your logo as a bitmap image uses less memory If you can view your logo in the Settings window but it doesn t appear on your reports you don t have enough memory for the logo size in bytes that you ve used Tip Generation of reports that contain a company logo wil
126. 46 North America only or 414 272 8575 National Conference of Standards Laboratories NCSL Phone number 303 440 3339 National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST Phone 301 975 NIST 6478 American National Standards Institute ANSI Phone 212 642 4900 American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM Phone 610 832 9585 The Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Ave Philadelphia PA 19120 system Administrator Guide Chapter 1 Installation You can use GAGEtrak 6 7 on a single workstation on a network or in a client server environment installation will vary slightly for each of these options This chapter gives you general installation instructions for all options Chapter 2 deals specifically with setting up an MS SQL client server system Installation Files The root directory of the CD contains all the files required to run GAGEtrak Installation Options You can use GAGEtrak 6 7 as a client server program with one centralized dedicated computer hosting the database and one or more user workstations accessing the database from that server You can also choose to install and use GAGEtrak on only one PC a single user setup If you have a multi user license of GAGEtrak you and your other GAGEtrak users can install the program from the CD or from a network location If you want your users to install from a network location copy all of the files in the root directory of the CD to the s
127. 5 110 100 100 205 210 _3 080 064 080 064 165 128 _080 064 080 0 64 165 128 045 020 o50 0 25 095 045 6 100 100 105 110 205 210 7 095 090 095 0 90 190 180 8 080 0 64 080 064 165 128 29 105 10 105 110 210 220 to 085 072 ogo 064 165 136 Total 16 55 Sum Square Total 14 40 Legend AV appraiser variation k number of appraisers AV appraiser variation lower control limit LCL lower control limit AV appraiser variation sum square MS appraiser x parts mean square AV appraiser variation upper control limit MS gage error mean square CF correction factor MS parts mean square DF degrees of freedom n number of parts CHI CHI probability distribution PC percent contribution CHI y inverse of CHI probability distribution PV part variation DF degrees of freedom PV part variation lower control limit DF appraiser x parts degrees of freedom PVss part variation sum square DF app appraiser degrees of freedom PV jc part variation upper control limit 156 DF gage error degrees of freedom DF parts degrees of freedom EV equipment variation EV inverse of equipment variation EV equipment variation lower control limit EVss equipment variation sum square EV equipment variation upper control limit Finy inverse of F probability distribution F F probabi
128. 7 3 2006 Record COCO 2 PDA of 7 In this screen you can view but cannot edit the list of gages that are currently checked out to this employee Chapter 6 Data Tools In addition to setup features the Data Tools menu also contain functions that help you maintain your program and database In this chapter we ll discuss these utilities including archiving or un archiving records backing up your data and exporting or importing records Data Tools Archive Un Archive Use this utility to archive or un archive your calibration and gage issue records Archive moves your records from the current group and puts them in a storage location within the database This makes your current group of records smaller and your database faster An archive is not the same as a backup Remember Always make a backup copy of your database file before you archive When you select this feature the following filter will appear E Archive Filter Record Type 2 Calibrations O Gage Issues Gage ID From Date To Date View Cal Meas You can archive your calibration or gage issue records by Gage ID or by Date To archive by Date enter the beginning date in the From Date field and the ending date in the To Date field When all criteria have been entered click the Archive button Tip In Settings Security you have the ability of specifying if Unsigned Unapproved Calibrations can be archived To view th
129. 989 1 73857 1 73099 1 72555 1 72147 1 71828 1 71573 EV Not calculated 152 AV Not calculated d xR GRA GRR 100 x GRR TV Or GRR 100 x GRR TOL 6 where TV is 60 Process Variation 6 AIAG Average and Range Method Long Form Note K K and K are all equal tp a 2 Equipment Variation EV Repeatability Trials 2 3 K 0 8862 0 5908 EV Rxk EV 100 x EV TV or if comparing to tolerance EV 100x EV Tol 6 Appraiser Variation AV Reproducibility Appr s 2 3 K 0 7071 0 5231 AV MX x Ko EV nx r where n of parts r of trials Note If a negative value results under the square root the AV is reported as 0 AV 100 x AV TV or if comparing to tolerance AV 100x AV Tol 6 Repeatability amp Reproducibility R amp R R amp R EF AV JoGRR 100 x GRR TV or if comparing to tolerance GRR 100x GRR Tol 6 Part Variation PV Parts 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 K 0 7071 0 5231 0 4467 0 4030 0 3742 0 3534 0 3375 0 3249 0 3146 PV R x Ks R Max X Min X X values are the averages of each measured part Note If you know the 6 Sigma Process Variation from SPC or Capability studies enter it into the Proc Var field If entered into the Gage R amp R Study form the software will calculate TV as TV 6Sigma Proc Var 6 and calculate PV as PV TV R amp R Total Variation TV TV VR amp R PV ANOV
130. 99 12 9 1 72555 14 8 1 72147 16 6 1 71828 18 4 1 71573 20 2 1 71363 22 0 1 71189 4 2 9 2 23887 5 7 2 15069 8 4 2 12049 11 2 2 10522 13 9 2 09651 16 7 2 08985 19 4 2 08543 22 1 2 08212 24 9 2 07953 27 6 2 07746 30 4 2 07577 33 1 2 07436 _6 SE a Confidence Bounds row is df g 2 row is d 5 3 8 2 48124 7 5 2 40484 11 1 2 37883 14 7 2 36571 18 4 2 35781 22 0 2 35253 25 6 2 34875 29 2 2 34591 32 9 2 34370 36 5 2 34192 40 1 2 34048 43 7 2 33927 4 7 2 67253 9 2 2 65438 13 6 2 58127 18 1 2 56964 22 6 2 56263 27 0 2 55795 31 5 2 55465 36 0 2 55208 40 4 2 55013 44 9 2 54856 49 4 2 54728 53 8 2 54621 5 5 2 82981 10 8 2 76779 16 0 2 74681 21 3 2 73626 26 6 2 72991 31 8 2 72567 37 1 2 72263 42 4 2 72036 47 7 2 71858 52 9 2 71717 58 2 2 71650 63 5 2 71504 6 3 2 96288 12 3 2 90562 18 3 2 88628 24 4 2 87656 30 4 2 87071 36 4 2 86680 42 5 2 86401 48 5 2 86192 54 5 2 86528 65 6 2 85898 66 6 2 85791 72 6 2 85702 7 0 3 07794 13 8 3 02446 20 5 3 00643 27 3 2 99737 34 0 2 99192 40 8 2 98829 47 6 2 98568 54 3 2 98373 61 1 2 98221 67 8 2 98100 74 6 2 98000 81
131. A Formulas Estimate of Variance Components Variance Estimate Gage v MS Interaction Ge MS MS r Appraiser ie MS MSp nr Part De MS MS o kr ANOVA Calculation Source DF SS MS F EMS Appraiser 2 0 04800 0 02400 T 2y 200 Parts 9 2 05871 0 22875 T 21 bo Appraiser x Part 18 0 10367 0 00575 4 45 T 2y 154 Gage Error 30 0 03875 0 00129 18 Total 59 2 2491 Significant at a 0 25 level Estimate of Std Variance Dev 0 t 0 00129 0 0359 Repeatability 0 00091 0 0302 Operator y 0 00223 0 0472 Interaction R amp R 0 00443 0 0666 t y 0 o 0 0371641 0 1928 Part Source AIAG Measurement Systems Analysis Guide Sample ANOVA Study This section contains data and calculations for a sample ANOVA study You can use this sample study as a model for your own ANOVA studies Readings Appraiser A Part fTrial1 Square Trial2 Square Sum Sum Square _1 065 042 060 036 125 078 2 lro too too 100 200 200 fess o7 DE 085 072 095 ogo 180 162 Toss ogo o4s ozo 100 oso Total 16 55 SS Total 14 27 Appraiser B Part Trial1 Square Trial2 Square Sum Sum Square 1 os5 ogo oss ogo 110 065 Part Trial1 Square Trial2 Square Sum Sum Square Sum Square Total 12 63 Appraiser C Part Trial1 Square Trial2 Square Sum Sum Square 1 oso o25 055 ogo 105 055 2 10
132. AGEtrak 6 5 My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents DESKTOP 091 a File name 20081001 D My Network Files of type ZIP zip x Cancel Places V Open as read only Select the drive and enter a name for the backup zip file For example you could save October 01 2008 s backup as 20081001 zIP For additional security the user can periodically create a CD or DVD with the backup files Consult your CD or DVD creation software manual for more information 278 Next select the database file to add to your zip file Choose your data file GTDATA65 MDB and click the Open button Select Database file to Zip My Recent Documents Desktop EE Newrpts mdb My Documents Qs hy Computer a File name GTD ata65 mdb a My Network Files of type Access mdb Cancel Places lv Open as read only Tip If your database is on your server you must change the drive letter to your network drive and select the appropriate folders then highlight GTDATA65 MDB If you aren t sure where your database is located check the database location on the lower right corner of the main menu before you back up your database If you use more than one database with GAGEtrak back up each one of your databases separately When the backup is finished you ll see this message Successful Operation E Operation completed successfully Your data is now backed up The resulting backup files wi
133. AGEtrak when someone is performing this operation If you cannot open your GAGEtrak database click the Windows Start button select Programs choose the GAGEtrak 6 7 program group and run Compact Database If the error message persists when you re trying to run the program contact Technical Support immediately at 480 922 7300 for additional instructions 402 Duplicate Value Error Message An error message may appear if you enter two records with the same key field values GAGEtrak 6 5 A Gage ID can not be duplicated You ll receive a similar message if you enter Two gage records with the same gage ID Two calibration standards with the same name for the same gage Two procedures with the same procedure name for the same gage Two calibration standard ID names on the same calibration record Two supplier records with the same supplier code Two procedures with the same procedure name Two parts with the same part number lf an error message appears click OK then click the Undo button or choose Undo from the Edit menu Previewing or Printing Reports Error Message An error message stating The sum of the margins and the height of the page footer is greater than the length of the page you are printing on appears if you install the P Touch label printer and assign it as the default Windows printer To eliminate this error select your report printer as the default Windows printer GAGEtrak is designed so
134. ALL Specifies that all fields from the specified table or tables are selected table The name of the table containing the fields from which records are selected field1 field2 The names of the fields containing the data you want to retrieve If you include more than one field they are retrieved in the order listed 304 Part Description alias1 alias2 The names used as column headers instead of the original column names in the table tableexpression The name of the table or tables containing the data you want to retrieve externaldatabase The name of the database containing the tables in tableexpression if they are not in the current database Remarks To perform this operation the Microsoft Jet database engine searches the specified table or tables extracts the chosen columns selects rows that meet the criterion and sorts or groups the resulting rows into the order specified The minimum syntax for a SELECT statement is SELECT fields FROM table You can use an asterisk to select all fields in a table The following example selects all of the fields in the Supplier_ Master table SELECT FROM Supplier Master If a field name is included in more than one table in the FROM clause precede it with the table name and the dot operator In the following example the Gage ID field is in both the Calibration Header table and the Gage Events table Select Calibration Header Gage ID Gage Events Gage ID Gage Events Even
135. AV INT and PV for clues as to what should be done This method is usually done with 2 or 3 Trials and 2 or 3 Appraisers and 10 parts Nested ANOVA Option When this option is selected the program will assume non replicable data where repetition takes place within a single group of parts rather than the same part e a row of trials are measurements on the same part group but not actually the same part For best results within group variation should be small e g consecutive parts and between group variation should be large e g different batches lots or time periods INT is not calculated If between group Part variation is significant you may be able to use regular ANOVA also called crossed ANOVA try it both ways if you wish Average and Range Method Long AlAG This method is the most familiar it became popular pre computer for its ease of calculation If GRR of TV or Tol is unsatisfactory you will be able to view EV AV and PV but not INT for clues as to what should be done This method also requires 2 or 3 Trials and 2 or 3 Appraisers and is usually done with 10 parts Range Method Short AIAG This method is quick and easy IF GRR of TV or Tol is unsatisfactory it provides no clues as to why not PV and TV will be calculated only if you provide an external estimate of 6 sigma process variation or tolerance This method is for one trial only and is usually done with 5 parts and two appraisers 138 In
136. Attributes Prefetch Count Translation Option Translation Library Name Description Check this box to use a Microsoft ODBC data source Selecting this check box will disable the Database Field and enable the fields below Note If you are unsure of any of these settings please consult your GAGEtrak administrator Check this box to use a Data Source Name Selecting this check box will disable the Database Field and enable the fields below Note If you are unsure of any of these settings please consult your GAGEtrak administrator DSN use the drop down box to select a Data Source Name that is currently available This field is required No others show up Check this box to use a file Data Source Name Selecting this check box will disable the Database Field and enable the fields below Note if you are unsure of any of these settings please consult your GAGEtrak administrator File DSN type a location for the file Data Source Name or click the Browse Button to locate it on your hard drive or the network This field is required No others show up Secify aname of the database This must be the same name as specified in your operating system as an ODBC data source This field is required Enter the User ID that is required to access this ODBC data source This field is required Enter the password that is required to access this ODBC data source This field is required Use the drop down menu to select an ODBC driver The type of driv
137. Bias by Control Chart Method Go to The Linearity Bias and Uncertainty Module and set up the information tab Choose study type Bias Only and enter 0 as a single reference value or you can do a linearity study with real data if you prefer Indicate in comments that Bias values will come from the Stability Module and specify study date Enter a column of 5 zeros in trials Then setup an Uncertainty Budget like this Uncertainty Setup Uncertainty Budget Uncertainty Contributor Type Plus or Minus Probability Cistribution Divisor Sensitivity Uncertainty dt Coefficient Contribution Linearity ae JA al Rectangular Ww 1 732 1 Bias wA w Dl Normal 1 v 1 1 0 4 Resolution ae A wt 0 001 Rectangular we 1 732 1 0 00057 737 Infinite Repeatability ae lA e O Normali v 1 1 0 4 e ba e e e wt wt wt v hd e e v t for 95 Confidence Combined Uncertainty 0 00057737 Coverage Factor k 2 Expanded Uncertainty 0 00115474 To complete the Uncertainty Budget enter the following from the Stability Module 1 For Bias enter Standard Error as the Plus or Minus value and df 2 Enter Resolution if you want to use half enter 0 5 as a Sensitivity Coefficient 3 For Repeatability enter Standard Dev as the Plus or Minus value and df 4 Enter any additional items you wish and press Calc Data Tab To add stability sub group measurements click on the first row in the Sub Group table Each sub group row represents the values of the repeated master
138. Bracket Front 0 900000 0 700000 0 500000 0 700000 0 600000 0 500000 0 500000 0 500000 0 400000 0 800000 0 700000 0 600000 df Std Dev EV of TV EV of Tol 59 000000 0 444349 Record M44 JPA of 6 The Bias tab calculates the following fields Field Button Name Description 1 12 or 1 60 Individual Bias estimates for each trial in the study For a Linearity and Bias study they are labeled 1 12 in each of 5 columns For a Bias Only Study they are labeled 1 60 Avg Bias The average of all the Bias estimates Std Error The standard deviation of Average Bias Field Button Name Description Lower The Lower 95 Confidence Limit Must not be greater than zero Upper The Upper 95 Confidence Limit Must not be less than zero DF Degrees of Freedom St Dev Standard Deviation the variability of the individual Bias estimates EV of TV Equipment Variation Standard Deviation divided by Total Variation If this is large it can cause false acceptance of statistical tests EV of Tol Equipment Variation Standard Deviation divided by Tolerance 6 If this is large it can cause false acceptance of statistical tests Histogram This chart is used to show the central tendency spread and shape of the distribution of Bias values Example Histogram 16 000000 NEN r q O _ _ _ Q 14 000000 4 pad Pa A A A daa 12 000000 4 perami ENTERI par Sue PRIUS RS EE URES
139. C O MICROMETE MITUTOYO SE COMPANY 4 5 OD MIC O MICROMETE STARRETT COMPANY 6 7 OD MIC O MICROMETE STARRETT COMPANY 7 8 OD MIC O MICROMETE COMPANY SDIO2 2505 GC PLUG GAGE gt Record KIKD Pe TATI of 6 Chapter 6 Entering Service Requests Service Request Entry You can use Service Request Entry to track and print service requests for both in house and outside service providers More importantly you can use it to document track and report on corrective actions that you ve issued for failed or malfunctioning gages Select Service Request Entry from the Main Records menu and the main entry screen will appear ES Service Request Entry CA Request No 0000000008 i Type Calibration Request Request Date 1 22 2003 LJ Service Supplier ACME GAGE amp TOOL Requester Allan Ching Status Open Insurance Amt 1 120 00 Completion Date O Comments Gage ID Next Due Date Completion Date Insurance Amt Status 11230192 v 1 10 2003 11 5 2003 45 00 Open 11 5 2003 11 26 2003 75 00 Open 0 00 Open Record 14 dl EE gt pip of 10 Field Button Description Name CA Request No This field automatically generates a number to track your requests You can set up automatic numbering in Setup using your own format Request Date Enter the date or click the small button on the right of this field to automatically enter today s date Requester Select or enter the name of person reques
140. CH For examples using uncertainty to summarize MSA studies see EA 4 02 and NIST SEMATECH where websites are referenced the publications can be freely viewed online downloaded or both We used the following publications as references in developing MSA studies we recommend them to expand your understanding of measurement system analysis AIAG MSA Measurement Systems Analysis Reference Manual Forth Ed Chrysler Group Ford General Motors 2010 highly recommended to order a copy call AIAG at 248 358 3570 and ask for document number MSA AIAG MSA Measurement Systems Analysis Reference Manual Third Ed DaimlerChrysler Ford General Motors 2002 highly recommended to order a copy call AIAG at 248 358 3570 and ask for document number MSA ASTM Special Technical Publication 15D Manual on Presentation of Data and Control Chart Analysis 1976 BOX G E P Hunter W G Hunter J S Statistics for Experimenters John Wiley amp Sons New York 1978 206 DUNCAN A J Quality Control and Industrial Statistics Fourth Ed Richard D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois 1974 EA 4 02 Expression of the Uncertainty of Measurement in Calibration 1999 www european accreditation org pdf EA 4 02ny pdf GRUBBS F E Errors of Measurement Precision Accuracy and the Statistical Comparison of Measuring Instruments Technometrics Vol 15 February 1973 HICKS C R Fundamental Concepts in the
141. CIE of 2 Kit Entry Reports Kitting reports list all or one specified kit and its associated Required Gage Types and Part To Be Measured To view or print the kitting report click Report from the main menu bar and select Kitting Reports Chapter 8 Entering Supplier Records Supplier Entry To begin entering supplier records go to the main menu then select the Main Records icon and click on the Supplier Entry button The Supplier Entry window will appear it is similar to the window shown below ES Supplier Entry Supplier Code Benett Phone 313 555 2100 Supplier Name Benett Gage Corp Fax 313 555 2121 Supplier Type Gage and Repair E Mail Contact Person H White Last Review 82422004 Last Rating 8 4 2004 Address 1245 Main Street ast Receive 10 6 2004 ity Detroit Last Reject State MI Enabled ip 149555 User Defined 1 OK to use Country USA User Defined 2 Calibration services Gage S N Description T Drawing No Drawing Date Change Level TE Gage ID P COMPARATOR 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Record KEKE 3 gt p of 3 To create a new supplier record click the New Record button at the bottom of the window Each supplier record contains the following fields Field Button Description Name Supplier Code Enter a unique supplier ID or code for each
142. CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE THE ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS and ANY ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE OTHERS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE NO LIABILITY FROM CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES In no event shall CyberMetrics its distributors its representatives or its suppliers be liable for any damages whatsoever including without limitation damages for the loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information or other pecuniary loss arising out of the use or inability to use this CyberMetrics product even if CyberMetrics has been advised of the possibility of such damages Because some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages the above limitation may not apply to you Table of Contents Chapter L Running GAGEMAK seert arenaetie senen neevedeen venne wiaveninn dee inmeoandensas deus wienen dte dean aniwensser denn eren 15 FAURE GAG ENAK o a E a T A A a to le a do DN O oen 15 ENStTEUMELOO Mia eel unas blagoh ad coll nadia nis gusedeaCnnbacadanerageatumsachioveraacstestss 15 Changing YOUN POSS WOM sch ssc dd daden 16 Chapter 2 Program Conventions iii 17 WON AVC radar ln anos 18 GAGEtrak s Help SS EN R 18 FOCUN TODA E E R 19 REPOSITIONING LING TOO WO AI zene aay e eames 19 Pop Up Caendar JOM DATE EAS ide 22
143. Calibration Schedule reports will skip over the gage Check this box to indicate that the record is for a calibration reference standard such as a gage block or reference weight not a gage For reference standards only enter the number that NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology provides for traceability purposes If it s not marked on the reference standard ask your supplier for the number Enter the actual gage manufacturer s serial number found on most gages In this field enter the gage s asset number usually issued by your accounting department Use this field to store the model number of this gage This field is a list box field from which you can choose or enter a classification of the type of gage such as Variable Attribute Dial Vernier Hard Digital or SPC Enter the actual units that the gage measures in such as In mm N LBf LBm Ohms or mA This field is a list box in which more choices will be available as you add them for other gage records If applicable enter the gage drawing number and date of the original drawing usually for custom designed gages fixtures or templates Otherwise use this field to store other information Enter the current change level ID of the current gage drawing and the date of the most recent drawing change level Use this field to store any comments about the gage Enter a brief but informative description of the gage Enter the gage s st
144. Double 8 Sk Double 8 s5 Double 8 s Double 8 s7 Double 8 s8 Double 8 s9 Double 8 s10 Double 8 LinBias Double 8 LinSlope Double 8 LinFit Double 8 MR Double 8 Notes Memo 0 Appraiser Text 50 MSA Ver Double 8 386 Table Name Staff Description Employee information Associated From Staff Master Auto Email List Calibration Cost by Staff Calibration Hours by Staff Graph Field List Data Type Length Employee_ID Text key 50 Social_Security Text 50 EmpName Text 50 ysnActive Long Integer 4 Job_Title Text 50 CraftCode Text 50 Date Hired Date Time 8 Date_In_Job Date Time 8 Department Text 50 Supervisor Text 50 Phone_Ext Text 50 Pager_No Text 50 EmailName Text 50 Address Text 50 Address_2 Text 50 City Text 50 State Text 50 ZIP Code Text 50 Home_ Phone Text 50 WorkPhone Text 50 DepartmentName Text 50 Date_Of Birth Date Time 8 Education Text 50 Industry_Experience Text 50 Related_Experience Text 50 Management_Experience Text 50 Salary Double 8 Comments Memo 0 SupervisorlD Long Integer 4 SpouseName Text 50 EmrgcyContactName Text 50 EmrgcyContactPhone Text 50 Seniority Text 50 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 387 Field List Data Type Length Shift Text 50 Crew Text 50 SkillLevel Text 50 User1 Text 50 User2 Text 50 Staff_Photo Long Binary 0 Overwrite_Warning Long Integer 4 Table Name Staff User List Description Staff and security user cross reference table Associated From
145. E 1 AD MIMI TS LOCALS A Temps GL Browse Long query time rillizeconds 20000 Log ODBC driver statistics to the log file CADOCUME 1 4AD MIM TS LOCALS 9 14Temp s T Browse lt Back Cancel Help 11 Click Finish The SQL Server Setup screen will appear 12 To check the data source click Test Data Source If you don t want to test it click OK 13 When you re finished close the ODBC Data Source Administrator Chapter 3 Running GAGEtrak Logon When you open GAGEtrak a logon window will appear if you have set up security Enter your User ID and Password and click OK LT Change Password Serial Number If you haven t entered your program serial number into the About box the following message will appear to remind you to enter it No Serial Number Entered Please Enter your Serial No in the About Box Click OK and the About window will appear Enter your GAGEtrak serial number located on your registration card and on the packing list that came with your package If you can t find your serial number contact Technical Support at 480 922 7300 GAGEtrak 6 60 Build 004 StandarlzInstallation CALIBRATION MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE For technical support call 480 922 7300 E Mail support cybermetrics com Please have your serial number available Web Site www cybermetrics com Knowledge Base www cybermetrics com support Current Number of Records in Database File License and System Infor
146. E ate ae A ad Ct A ty ated AAN Font 3 of 9 Barcode ForeColor EM Name Setsfreturns name of control Selected Field10 Barcode a Cancel Finish This illustration shows the source code for the currently selected report Use the Set or Build SQL Source for the Report button on the button bar and select the Edit Current SQL Source from the selection list to open the SQL Builder window 2 Report SOL Entry Main Mew SQL Source Edit Current S amp L Source Delete Current SQL Source Edits the current SGL Record Source of your report 322 Now you can directly modify the SQL statement for the source in the edit field as shown below a SOL Builder Edit Current SQL Source You can modifyiedit the existing query through the text box below SELECT ms_code as BCode FROM tblMaster ORDER BY ms_code Cancel Finish In the above example after including all the fields from the table toMaster another field is added The part of the statement ms code as BCode Contains the symbol also known as the concatenator symbol adds the symbol at the beginning and end of the code and then applies the alias scoae This new field name is now included in the Fields window To add a bar code to the report first click on the Bar Code button E and drag a rectangle area in the report field where you wish to put your bar code Now click on the title bar of the part of your canvas where you pla
147. EE EEEN NN ooo gs UCL 0 1254 Avg 0 0383 Part Appraiser Average Control Chart Using a standard average chart the averages of each appraiser s readings for each part are plotted including the overall average and control limits Appraiser groups the data with lines connecting each appraiser s points If half or more of the points are outside of the control limits then the measurement system should be able to detect part to part variation If less than half is outside the control limits it might be because the measurement system isn t able to thoroughly distinguish differences or because the part sample doesn t represent the expected process variation Example Part Appraiser Average Control Chart 1 0637 0 9637 0 8637 4 0 7637 0 6637 0 5637 0 4637 UCL 0 8796 Avg 0 8075 LCL 0 7354 Residual Plot by Size The averages of each appraiser s readings for each part are subtracted from each trial and the residuals are plotted versus the overall part average There should be no discernable patterns on this chart Any visible pattern would suggest that something is wrong with the data or the measuring system Residual Fitted Yalue Average and Range Formulas Range Short Form Method Values of d for one trial Parts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Appr s 1 41421 1 27931 1 23105 1 20621 1 19105 1 18083 1 17348 1 16794 1 16361 1 16514 3 Appr s 1 91155 1 80538 1 76858 1 74
148. Entry Graph Button To generate an accuracy chart for the current gage record click the Graph button in the Gage Entry Information screen By default the program charts the entire calibration history for the first calibration standard You can specify a time frame by entering beginning and ending dates in the From Calibration Date and Through Calibration Date fields D Gage ID C 002 Standard ID 1 INCH GAGE BLOCK From Calibration Date 1 1 1980 Thru Calibration Date 12 31 2100 8 15 2001 2002 85 2002 24742003 8492003 Record 14 1 gt gt t gt of 3 To view different standards use the navigation arrow buttons or press the PAGE DOWN PAGE UP keys Remember you can generate this chart only after you ve entered some calibration and measurement records see the next chapter for more information on calibration records As you can see in the sample screen the chart plots before and after values as well as the nominal minimum and maximum allowable limits Click the Print button to print the graph or go to the File menu and select Print the latter method lets you print multiple charts per page Gage Entry Calibration Button This button will take you directly to the Calibration Entry screen for the current gage ID When you go to Calibration Entry from Gage Entry you can see only the historical calibration records for the gage that you selected in Gage Entry To create a new calibration record for the partic
149. Etrak later uses this information to calculate the minimum value for calibration standards To enter this value as a percentage of the nominal enter the value followed by the percentage sign for example enter 13 Tip Check the placement of decimal points for example 1 equals one percent 1 equals one tenth of a percent This field contains the group of standards that the Gage uses It helps to update standards for a number of gages at once as well as fill in standards for common gages The standard also includes resolution precision plus minus tolerance values Enter the name or ID of the calibration standard or checkpoint for example Gage Block Each standard ID that you enter for the gage must be unique If you need to use the same name for multiple standards number or letter each name For example if you re using CMM Check in more than one standard ID number the name for each standard Your IDs would look like this 01 CMM Copheck 02 CMM Check 03 CMM Check This numbering also lets you control the list s sort order the program automatically keeps the list in alphabetical order by the Standard D value Two types are available Variable or Attribute Select variable for those standards that have a value that you actually measure such as 0 502 inches Select attribute for pass fail or visual types of checks Selecting Attribute does not calculate accuracy of particular standard Indicate the units being measured su
150. Footer 294 Frame Title Description Fields If you have established a database connection all available fields will appear in this frame You can then select any field and it to the designer canvas on the right Property Toolbox Lists the properties of the control when selected in the Explorer frame or on the designer canvas The properties displayed vary depending on the object selected Property ToolBox x ActiveReport Be AllowSplitters True Al documentName ActiveReports C ExpressionErrorMessage MaxPages 0 Print Width 9360 Ruler Visible True ScriptDebuggerEnabled False x Script Designer Canvas The canvas can be divided in different parts The example shows a page header the details section and page footer After building your format you can preview the outcome by selecting the Preview tab GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 295 Opening a Data Source When you create a report you must first connect to a data source The fields for your report will come from this data source On the toolbar select the button labeled Set or Build SQL Source for the Report as shown H Report Editor New Report EE E meson stat O Design preview E H MainReport PageHeader Detail PageFooter Report SOL Entry Main New SAL Source Property Toolbox Create a new SQL Record j Source for your report Acti
151. L 219 BOER uranio 219 A a cesoeadtaistabat AA A 115 118 212 FOMO JE mG se me OPA mea Ne a CR ete ee ee 79 calibration FregUEnNGy AE 60 111 Aner US PPP e o 61 BEOU E e E nee ene a a ne eee ee E A 61 Eon 60 DEN 60 62 OE 60 MON Sannen A A eenen 60 62 us o PA nn A A I E A E 60 62 VOAS EE 60 62 calbraton FISTO inercia ee E etende eT 66 Galibraton HOU stranden aad APEE ARATE T A TEI APET AATE Baan 62 211 Calibration Labels Calbratiom Label Rlsiiaiaasii dd 114 402 Calibration Stand avus tit taten 63 64 65 Orle gen le aken 0 anios 112 Ole cel len AAA A O 113 Ooo SE 59 GalPro Galbratiom Procequres usina 85 OT eo 112 Gertificates er Cabral seca neuesten a rociado ciudad 112 212 249 Gene LeV Elteren Geeneen atthe ine eas tele ie Gra hale ste Gane tele cae eee ele a eae cla ho 57 81 o rh ae eis rhe Rh teh ate tea tare See specific chart titles CIO SOU asia aida 223 34 MUSEO Melo AAA A nettere edentate 235 38 APP sean cassieoaie ua eecnatana saanaiaia Seanmoenadesaa nas uaanaiona Ponmamananaenns 334 CIOMING ade MeCOMS En 77 406 Index Comments aade EY eo e 57 compact Gage Dala prospi pea eae Made aii 284 GompaetRepalr Dalai s e Aa ees Aes 284 289 401 Copy EA 85 Correction Factor ANOVA tennesseensis 157 GO MECTIVE ACIO nasien E A A E a 89 90 213 Curent LOCANOM erinnern An 57 76 77 103 A EERE REE 60 221 Data Transier AIM senen si estas 334 Database heating a New DADAS e o a a e en a A 397 Open Data
152. LL StabType StabRes StabRef StabHistXBar StabHistSigma UseHistoric UseRange BiasOnly Data Type Double Text Double Double Text Text Text Text Double Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Double Double Double Double Double Double Text Double Double Double Double Double Double Long Integer Length 50 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 255 Field List LinearityData MSA_Ver Gage_Resolution GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 371 Data Type Memo Double Single Table Name Issue Tracking Length 0 8 4 Description Contains issue tracking records in relation to a particular gage master record Associated From Issue Tracking Entry Edit Issue Tracking Kit Gages History PopUplssue Field List Gage_ID Issue_Date Issue_Time Issued_To Issued_Dept Received Date Received Time Received From Notes Return_Cycles Part_No Issue_Tracking_Type PO_No ExpReturnDate Kit_ID Data Type Text key Date Time key Date Time key Text Text Date Time Date Time Text Text Long Integer Text Text Text Date Time Text Table Name Issue_Tracking_Archive Description Archived issue tracking records Associated From ClArchiveViewfrm Field List Gage_ID Issue_Date Issue_Time Issued_To Issued_Dept Received_Date Received_Time Data Ty
153. Languages Advanced Standards and formats Thiz option affect how some programs format numbers curencies dates and time Select an item to match its preferences or click Customize to choose pour own formats Samples Number 123 456 739 00 Currency 125 456 755 00 Time ai Calendar i 1 44 25 PM When a two digit year ts entered interpret it as a year between Short date 743 009 1930 and Nes E Long date Tuesday January 1 Customize Regional Options Numbers Currency Time Date Location Short date To help services provide you with Iq Short date sample 1 13 2009 weather select your present locatio Short date format Md pn Date separator Long date Long date sample Tuesday January 13 2009 Long date format dddd MMMM dd pop Maintaining Your Hard Drive We highly recommend that you run the Windows ScanDisk and Disk Defragmenter utilities to keep your hard disk running smoothly Run ScanDisk each week to clean up cross linked files and other problems Next run Disk Defragmenter to reorganize your files this keeps your files from being spread out in pieces all over the hard drive Your disk accesses will run somewhat faster and your hard drive will be less prone to problems To run these utilities check the Start button select Programs then choose Accessories Highlight System Tools then select the utility and follow the dire
154. Management Administrator Guide Length 8 50 50 50 255 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 363 364 Field List EstNext_Due_Date FloatFixed FloatFixedRR PrintlssueLabel Adjustment_Method Table Name GAGE Master Schedule Data Type Date Time Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Length AJAJ SA Description Contains calibration schedule information for a particular gage Associated From Gage Entry Schedule tab Field List Gage_ID Schedule ID Calibrator Schedule Frequency Schedule Frequency _UOM Schedule Hours ScheduleSkipDirection Next Due Date Last Done Date Notes AdjPlanCode AdjCalFreq MaxAdjCalFreq Data Type Text key Text key Text Double Text Double Long Integer Date Time Date Time Memo Text Double Double Table Name GAGE Regs Description Gage part and usage information Length 50 50 50 50 Associated From Part Master SubForm Gage Entry Parts Field List Part_No Gage_ID Step _No Dimension Method Freq Comments Data Type Text key Text key Text Text Text Text Memo Table Name GAGE Status Rules Description Not Used Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type UserlD Text key Status_ID Text key Status Text Allowlssue Long Integer AllowView Long Integer Waiting Long Integer RequireEntry
155. OCO AVE PESO SI as 148 A e oes 149 DCA eC FO APP A auniacessoumantenet none asumeaca A E a 149 Repeatability Range Control Chas sd dices 150 Part Appraiser Average Control CNE AAA 150 RESICIU GIMP IOUANOV Zin 151 Average a a RANGE FORMULAS weende en enal one donee aa ete ees 151 ANOVA FO FM IAS ias Sots sass cine sica 153 Sample ANOVA SUVs A AA ii 154 Eineonty Bids ana UNCTAD 160 Bean BIAS MUAY ii 160 Ba ONY SUON En 161 eld recess O 161 Bi ea E IS II AAE AIN AAA AE AAEE E 162 LIME AILEY STUOV Interpretation 165 BIOS TOD aa td ae 166 UNC a ANN oe 168 Uncertainty Setup SUI da o ld 170 Uncertain y Budget SUD taD ere nennen elende etenengenieten 172 Background on Probability DISTHIDUTIONS iaa 173 Background on Uncertainty Contributors 174 VFS AUT YO WIIG ii 176 aid Baraca E eae tate ashame eaeorecer 177 Uncertain A Aon an NE 179 SODIY OOO BIOS ita etek ank 179 Toa AAA PP O san a 180 Data A N a ne er ee 183 CON TOCAR od 186 ACOM oY pa oat AMOS a A ao aia 189 AOUT on 192 COS pe TaD aaa nS etree Wert Oar ne nei tet tad Cone E Re mE OP een A RMI ne U7 Comer SEO AOR eS ne Te 193 EOL tel gi a T a e ere eee te RE E ee tc aE aro A ennn het entend 194 WSS Rate ANalySiS Tab tbsites EAE E nenten EO 195 Sie hia DETECTION Tara Dona 197 AOE AMOG banen eeeh as nS eas aaa ce A en a 198 Hiormauon ToD aconineko aa A 199 Lower Spectator A OT 201 Upper SPECIMICALION Ta e 202 MSA V SUG Sineo eaa a aaa 205 Other Fechniques REFCIEN CES manna E A
156. OMPARATOR Part No 10 221 3 Gage Desc 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Front Uncertainty Setup Uncertainty Budget Uncertainty Contributor Type Plus or Minus Probability Distribution Divisor Sensitivity Uncertainty df Effective df Coefficient Contribution Cal Linearity A A A 0 89 Rectangular A 1 732 1 0 5138568 20 977 0 00332373 Bias lA e 0 02521312 Normal 1 A 1 1 0 02521312 44 9 1845E 09 Resolution A 0 1 Rectangular A 1 732 1 0 05773672 Infinite 0 Repeatability A A 0 238937 Normal 1 A 1 1 0 238937 55 5 9261E 05 Uncorrected le A e 1 1 Rectangular e 1 732 1 0 6351039 20 9077 0 00778167 Parallax o B o 1 Normal o 1 96 1 5 0 7653061 infinite 0 Temp Difference B 3 Rectangular 1 732 0 00000112 1 94E 06 Infinite 0 el el el z t for 95 Confidence 1 975488 Combined Uncertainty 1 146368 154 1 72701487 Coverage Factor k 2 Expanded Uncertainty 2 248472 Prefil Cac Chats Print Record 14 4 6 gt pip of 6 Up to four rows will already have been filled in according to the choices you made in Uncertainty Setup You may edit these choices here and doing so will not change Uncertainty Setup To enter additional Uncertainty Contributors select from the drop down list in an empty row You may add to most of the drop down lists Just type an entry or modify an existing entry The added item will appear the next time y
157. Prefill Calc Print Description In these fields enter the name of each appraiser Enter the appraiser s measurement results in these fields The Pass or Fail Decision made by the Reference Value will appear after you click the Calc button Enter measurements from a variable gage or rating system If variable measurements are not feasible you may substitute numerical codes like 0 and 1 from attribute decisions by an authority the customer for example If GRR was entered for the variable gage parts too close to the limit for consistent decisions are coded near limit after you click on the Calc button Parts that appraisers made mixed decisions about are coded mixed after you click on the Calc button You can use the Prefill feature to fill all measurements with the code for Pass or Fail if convenient After you enter all of the measurements click this button to see the results of your study If you want to print the study click this button Crosstabs Tab 3 Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis Sl Ea Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No MSA Gage ID MSA4 127 o Part No 10 221 1 o AB Crosstabulation B C Crosstabulation A C Crosstabulation E Fail Pass Total Fail Count 10 0 10 A Expected 5 555556 4 444444 10 000000 B Pass Count 0 8 8 kappa Expected 4 444444 3 555556 8 000000 1 000000 Total Count 10 8
158. Procedure_txt Memo 0 MediaPath Text 255 Author_Name Text 50 380 Field List Rev_Number Rev_Date Data Type Text Date Time Table Name Procedures OLE Length 50 Description Maintenance procedure file and image links Associated From Calibration Entry Procedures Gage Master Entry OLE SubForm Gage Master Entry Procedure SubForm Procedure Entry Field List Procedure_Name Procedure_OLE Data Type Text key Long Binary Table Name Program_Msg Description Program messages custom form Length 50 0 Associated From Messages Settings Interface tab Messages subtab Reset Original Messages Field List Msg_ID Msg_Text Msg_Flags Msg_Title Msg_Desc Msg_User Msg_Misc Table Name RepControl Data Type Long Integer key Memo Long Integer Text Text Text Long Integer Description Report control number information Associated From ReportControlForm Field List ControllD ReportName ControlText Alignment User1 User2 User3 User4 User5 Data Type Long Integer Text key Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Length 100 250 50 Length 4 100 75 50 20 20 20 20 20 Table Name ResultCodes Description Result Codes information GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 381 Associated From Edit Calibration Result Codes x_ResultList Field List Result Codes ID Data Type Lo
159. QL Que Allows you to manually enter the Report s SOL Report Source directly for Advanced Users Cancel Next gt gt GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 303 Clicking on the Next button will give you a window with a blank input field as shown below a SOL Builder Set Report SQL Source Directly You can modity edit the existing query through the text box below Cancel lt lt Back Finish The Report Editor uses the Microsoft Jet database engine a database management system that stores and retrieves data in user and system databases The Microsoft Jet database engine can be thought of as a data manager component with which other data access systems such as Microsoft Access and Visual Basic are built The seLecr soL statement is used to set up your data source A brief syntax explanation is shown below It instructs the Microsoft Jet database engine to return information from the database as a set of records Syntax SELECT predicate table table fieldl AS aliasl table field2 AS alias2 ly 1 FROM tableexpression IN externaldatabase WHERE GROUP BY HAVING ORDER BY WITH OWNERACCESS OPTION The serecr statement has these parts Part Description predicate One of the following predicates ALL DISTINCT DISTINCTROW or TOP Use the predicate to restrict the number of records returned if none is specified the default is
160. R CALIPERS www iso org Calibration Frequency 12 months can be modified according to stability purpose and usage 1 0 Scope This method describes the calibration of calipers inside and outside dimensions up to 72 inches 1800 mm and depth dimension up to 12 inches 300 mm Instrument resolution 0 001 or olooos inch 0 02 or 0 05 mm 2 0 References This document is based on the DOD procedures 3 0 Definitions TI Test Instrument DOD Department of Defense 4 0 General Requirements Environment Temperature Change should not exceed 2 deg Fihr 1 deg Chr Humidity No excessive humidity Air quality N A Record Id 1 DAA 1 Record 14 4 2 gt gt t gt of 47 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field Procedure Name To link a calibration procedure to the current gage select the procedure name from this list box Procedure In this section you ll see either the procedure text or any attached pictures View Print Button The Procedure text and the attached OLE image will open up in a new window for viewing printing The Procedure Image tab holds any images associated with the procedure as shown below ES Gage Entry gt Information Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuance
161. R Run Chart MSA2 Gage RR Scatter Chart Gage RR Scatter Chart MSA2 Gage RR Stability Gage RR Stability Chart Gage RR Stability Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Stability SubForm Gage RR Stability MSA2 Gage RR Whiskers Chart Gage RR Whiskers Chart_MSA2 Gage RR XY Chart Gage RR XY Chart MSA2 StabilityHistogramChart StabilityXBarRChart StabilitySBarRChart StabilityXMRChart Field List Data Type Length GRR_Results_ID Long Integer key 4 Gage_ID Text 50 Gage_Desc Text 50 Part_No Text 50 Part_Name Text 50 Characteristic Text 50 Company_Part_No Text 50 GRR_Results_Type Text 50 Approved Long Integer 4 Completed Long Integer 4 GRR_Results_Date Date Time 8 Trials Text 50 Parts Text 50 Ops Text 50 USL Text 50 LSL Text 50 GRR Text 50 GRR_PCT Text 50 EV Text 50 EVTOL_PCT Text 50 EVTV_PCT Text 50 AV Text 50 AVTOL_PCT Text 50 AVTV_PCT Text 50 RR Text 50 RRTOL_PCT Text 50 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 367 Field List Data Type Length RRTV_PCT Text 50 PV Text 50 PVTOL_PCT Text 50 PVTV_PCT Text 50 R_BAR Text 50 UCL_R Text 50 TV Text 50 Comments Memo 0 C Long Integer 4 a11 Double 8 a12 Double 8 a13 Double 8 a14 Double 8 a15 Double 8 a16 Double 8 a17 Double 8 a18 Double 8 a19 Double 8 a110 Double 8 a21 Double 8 a22 Double 8 a23 Double 8 a24 Double 8 a25 Double 8 a26 Double 8 a27 Double 8 a28 Double 8 a29 Double 8 a210 Double 8 a31 Double 8 a32 Double 8 a33 Double 8 a34 Double 8 a35 Double 8 a36 Doub
162. RECOIG NQVIQQTION BGM dto 22 SOBA EN 23 TOD SCICCLONS PP TO 23 Minimize7 Maximize Restore Clos Buttons wesende datada 24 POD CO WINS Sd la loa ela ria o 24 Remove Unwanted Information from Drop down Lists ooccccccconccnnncnnnonnnnnonacnnnnonononnnnnnnnncnnnononcnnnnnnnnncnnnenaninnnss 25 OE VIEW Of ROC ONOS aia 26 Elements ora Recordin FORM e Wiritisia rodar 27 Datasheet Mew of RECON S a A doo sd ated Old ae 29 Elements ota Recordin Datasheet Vie Warea eo OO acia 30 FIET RO 35 Supported Wildcard Characters in Search Fields ccccsccccssssccceseccccenececceesccseusecessuecessuscessueesssecessensesseaeeessuses 35 UNC PNG cat caseen ens APP A e o O Inn 36 AVANCE It ati ida 38 REMOVING FI Sit ai aca 43 PAGO JAR e cora SI A A A A ene 43 Soor aaa oti se crease e a e OS 43 Replace COMMON att ii 44 QUIENSO RECON UNA A antes attire esate Nea anata A A ATA 46 BIN fot ae Roly Bo agt 46 SENO COMING NG asii 47 select Record CONNOR A A Ad 47 select All Records COMM CNN a omen 48 ENTERAN SO rain 48 a ENE 48 Adding NCW ReCOr0s verassend aaa aleen eaten ed 49 GOTO Gores dolen gl 50 Deleting Record nne 50 Undo Changes to FICIGS ONG REC dio 50 SVOR CO OS rendeert neotenie Me etal esac eae Manet als 50 Baling and SAOMCUENENVS ss 50 Keyboard snortcuts Generalus cu Ata 51 Fed Editing and Selection KEYS id See can E clues eneen sted ses E O 51 Datasheet Taple Keyboard shortened neder banat use Gace ea Nanette ennen 51
163. Ready Properties Type Microsoft PS Document Writer Where PSPaore Comment Paper Size Letter Source Automatically Select T Network Orientation fe Portrait Landscape wes Tip To save paper and time first view the report on screen and then adjust the print setup values Any changes will be visible on screen after you click the OK button When you close the report window the program will save the new settings Report Descriptions This table contains a description of the most commonly used reports including special filtering options Report REPORT QUEUE Report Gage Bar Code Labels Gage Detail Report Gage Issue History Report Gage Labels Gage Listing by Description This feature allows users to Save View Printand Print All commonly used report filter criteria Once you have a report filter set up as required simply add the filter criteria to the queue These saved filters can be retrieved at a later date or printed directly from the reports queue Users can save multiple sets of criteria for each report report criteria may be fixed dates such as January 1 2009 or variable dates such as 30 days before the current date Report Queue allows several reports to be printed consecutively GAGE REPORTS Description Use any of these reports to print a pre designed bar code or group of bar code labels Make sure that the label height matches the ca
164. Separate linear regressions are done for upper and lower specification limits The custom for these charts is opposite of the usual practice x or P will plot on the vertical scale and y will plot on the horizontal scale y b axx Ex 2 Xy 3x 2 E n Ex brl afz n n Bias Specification Limit b GRR AA Go 5 152 The 1 08 empirical correction factor compensates for the adjustment that was made above to the P values On the probability plot the regression line ends at 2 576 1 08 MSA v2 studies For customers coming to the current versions of GAGEtrak from earlier versions the MSA v2 are provided for backward compatibility so that users can view older records created in those versions Hence they cannot be used for new records There are five options for MSA v2 studies namely MSA2 Average and Range MSA2 Linearity MSA2 Stability MSA2 Attribute and MSA2 ANOVA Please refer to the older manuals for a description of these options Other Techniques References GAGEtrak includes the basic measurement system analysis MSA techniques These rely on proven statistical tools such as Confidence Interval Determination Control Charting Performance Curve Plotting and ANOVA For more information on how the tools work see especially NIST SEMATECH Duncan or Box in the list below To view the studies in GAGEtrak see AIAG chapter 3 To see alternative or special purpose applications for MSA see AIAG or NIST SEMATE
165. Text Long Integer Text Text Text Memo Text Text Description Records information about users Associated From Security Users Field List PIN User_Name Title Location Phone Gage_Ac Gage_A Gage_M Gage_D Calib_Ac Calib_A Calib_M Calib_D Proc_Ac Proc_A Proc_M Proc_D IT_Ac IT_A IT_M Data Type Text Text key Text Text Text Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Length al al al al O O O O AIJAI AIAI AA ATI SA A Field List IT_D Supp_Ac Supp_A Supp_M Supp_D GRR_Ac GRR_A GRR_M GRR_D MDR_Ac MDR_A MDR_M MDR_D REPT_M UTIL_M Part_Ac Part_A Part_M Part_D Data Type Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide Length AIJAI AIAI AIAI AI AIAJ AI ATIATI AIAI AJI AIAJ DAISSA 395 Appendix C Database Management Create a New GAGEtrak Database You can use multiple databases with GAGEtrak For your convenience the program installs an empty data file in the same location as your database n
166. Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Length 50 50 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 375 Table Name Letter Description Service Request notification and update letters Associated From Edit Service Request Letter Letter Entry Field List Data Type Length Letter_Type Text key 50 Date_Authored Date Time 8 Authored_by Text 50 Letter_Body Memo 0 Table Name Man_Sequences Description Internal program use Associated From None Field List Data Type Length Key_Field Long Integer key 4 GRR_Results_ID Long Integer 4 MDR_No Long Integer 4 ezs_SearchCriteria Long Integer 4 ezy_AuditLog Long Integer 4 tbl Filters Long Integer 4 tblCriteria Long Integer 4 Authorized_Persons Long Integer 4 Bookmark_ID Long Integer 4 Event_ID Long Integer 4 Stability_ID Long Integer 4 Table Name MDR Description Contains related information of a particular service request Associated From MDR Entry Service Request Entry Edit Service Request MDR Gages Field List Data Type Length MDR_No Text key 50 MDR_Date Date Time 8 Requester Text 50 Gage_ID Text 50 Ins_ Amt Double 8 Letter_Type Text 50 Service_Supplier Text 50 Status Text 50 376 Field List Completion_Date Comments Data Type Date
167. To when selected a list of all gages that have a due date on or before the current data will be created and included in the email body e Send Auth Persons an email will be sent to the list of person in the Gage Entry Auth Persons form is the Restrict Issue is set to either Not Restricted or Program Default e Send Gage Info After Email Body if selected the body of the email will contain the following information Gage ID Description Model N Current location Issued To Issued Dept and a text message specific to the Email Event triggered Content included in email transmission Select staff personnel from the dropdown list box that will be emailed when added to an Email Event Setup Multiple Choice Entry Selecting this module allows a user to edit built in program lists For example In Gage Entry Calibration Schedule you will notice that for Calib Freq the user has the opportunity to select a predefined UOM from the dropdown list of choices this is one of 15 lists of choices that can be edited based on the users needs lf the user would like Days to reflect No of Days this is the module that will allow you to make that revision Changing the text does not effect how the program uses this field It merely changes what the user sees on the screen and any changes made to the text fields will appear throughout the program 266 E Multiple Choice Entry Description OF Multiple Choice Th
168. To Issued Dept Part No PO No Promised Date Description These fields track the date and time at which you issue the gage the current date and time prefill the fields in which can be edited Select the reason for issue this field creates its own list from your entries Enter or select a user from the dropdown list box of the person to whom you issue the gage The name selection for this field will be dependent on the Gage Entry Auth Persons Restrict Issue selection For more information see Restrict Issue under Gage Entry Auth Persons Select or enter the department or job number that will use the gage Use this field to track the part or group of parts that the gage will measure You can enter a Purchase Order number if you re sending the gage out to a supplier for repair or calibration or are manufacturing parts for a customer Enter the date on which you expect the gage to be returned to you 76 Field Button Name Issue Label button Received Date and Received Time Received From Cycles Use Left Notes Description Click on this button to print an issue label for the gage being issued Note A label printer must be installed to accommodate this request When you click on Issue Label the Select Label Type window will appear ES Select Label Type Select Label Type Calibration Label 1 2W x 2L Calibration Label 1 24 x 3L Calibration Label 1 4W x 1L Calibration Label 1 4W x 2L Calib
169. ToolBox Detail ColumnDirectic 0 DownAcross ColumnSpacinc 0 height 720 KeepTogether True Design Preview ma eo Appenalx A Data Transfer Utility The Data Transfer Utility Wizard has three options Run Scripts this option is for users who have opted to use MSSQL to store their data When the Run Scripts utility is ran the utility will run the scripts needed to build the tables Transfer Data this option is used to migrate data from older versions of our software to upgraded versions e g GAGEtrak 5 0 to GAGEtrak 6 5 Update Add Reports this option is used to update older versions of reports and or add new reports Use this separate utility only once and only if you re upgrading to GAGEtrak 6 5 from an earlier version of GAGEtrak v5 59 or earlier requires a data transfer or if you re using a client server setup with Version 6 Note A data transfer is NOT necessary for current GAGEtrak 6 5 users Version 3 3means any GAGEtrak Version 3 or higher including GAGEtrak 97 and GAGEtrak Version 3 For GAGEtrak 97 32 bit the database file is DATA9731 MDB the archive file can be named either ARCH9731 MDB or ARCH9735 MDB For GAGEtrak Version 3 16 bit the database file is DATA30 MDB the archive file is ARCHIVE MDB Version 4 4 means any GAGEtrak Version 4 The database and archive are in one file GTDATA40 MDB Version 5 5 means any GAGEtrak Version 5 The database and archive are in one file GTDATA50 MDB
170. Total Field Button Effectiveness per Part False Alarm Rate per trial of acceptable parts Miss Rate per trial of unacceptable parts Description The percent of trials that agreed with the variable gage The percent of trials that rejected when the variable gage accepted The percent of trials that accepted when the variable gage rejected All the percentages add up to 100 Miss Rate Per Part Description The percent of parts that consistently matched the variable gage The percent of parts that were accepted by the variable gage and had at least one rejection by the appraisers The percent of parts that were rejected by the variable gage and had at least one acceptance by the appraiser s The percentages add up to 100 Study Effectiveness Summary Description The percent of parts that consistently matched the variable gage The percent of parts that were accepted by the variable gage and were rejected by the appraisers The percent of parts that were rejected by the variable gage and were accepted by the appraisers Signal Detection Tab lf reference values are available from a variable gage this tab estimates Gage Repeatability GRR for the attribute gage Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis Fos x Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No MSA Gage ID MSA4 127 o Part No 10 221 1 o 6s ZTV ZTal GRA fo
171. Usage and cycle gages only Usage cannot be greater than one It is used to calculate the estimated due date based on Issue Return If the calibration date falls on a skip date this determines whether to move the calibration date forward or backward Select the default to use the skip direction setup in the Settings form If you want GAGEtrak to change this gage s calibration frequency according to its as found condition before calibration make a selection from the Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval field Based on your selection GAGEtrak will automatically adjust calibration frequencies based on the A7or 43 method whenever you enter a new calibration record according to the rules you defined in the Adjustment Calibration Frequency Setting tables Please see the System Administrator s Guide for more information Tip Do not make an adjusting method selection unless you fully understand this feature and decide that you want GAGEtrak to automatically adjust your calibration frequencies This is the minimum value that GAGEtrak can recommend for a calibration frequency interval The default is 1 but you can change it according to the type of units you use for example perhaps 1 year is too long to be used as a minimum and 1 day is too short This is the maximum value that GAGEtrak can recommend for a calibration frequency interval The default is 123 but you can change it according to the type of units you use for example 123 years is
172. Wie Am WP sone HE aD Design Preview 6 8 28 0 SRE MainFeport H Detail Property ToolBox Detail Be lgj Mame Detail BackColor Aa BackStyle 0 ddBkKTransparei Canara True CanShrink False ColumncCount 1 ColumnDirectic 0 DownAcross Selected Detaili Section Label Wizard The Label Wizard takes you step by step through the process of building your labels You will have to choose your label printer from the list of all available printers the label size the table to use and the fields to include in your label GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 327 To open the wizard click the Create New Report button and select the Label Wizard icon from the template list Select Report Template Blank Report Standard Report Custom Label 1 InchLabel 278 11 2 Inch Label Bid Click OK then follow the steps listed below 1 Select Label Printer Select from a list of all available printers You should have a least one label printer In the absence of one the program will try to approximate the smallest possible printable size for your printer After you have made your selection go on to the next step by clicking on the Next button AS Label Designer Wizard Select Label Printer Choose from printers list below HP LaserJet 4500 PostScript Microsoft Office Document Image Writer Microsoft XPS Document Writer Cancel Next gt gt 2 Select Label S
173. a 265 Setub Setub CA Service Request aa 266 SETUP S tOUS TEN A A A A tc 267 DEU GATO EVENS antennae IA NA O daa 267 Chapter 5 Entering Personnel o 269 SUE dados 269 Stalen Y INOM ACO Nudos 269 Staf Entry EAM dd ad 270 Sam lm LO a A T E ie meas 271 Staff Entry Autnorized Gas ia id A baa eeen dbnl ben 272 e ISSUE GALES rend aten en edad eeen celta a asa Sait aol cohen Waitin 273 Chapter Data TOOLI ina aususpssisiubae aeseauicneibessaeduansat nies A 275 Data Toos ARCHIVE UNA a a o ado 275 Data TOO AUAI LOE corran r A E A 276 Data Tools BacktlG Restore aiou a A aaa 276 Data TOON Mere E WENEN aten nete dee da eau o anaes 282 Data Tools Compact RED all Dian a ia aci 284 Data TOOS EXPO AMO sia did 284 Data To00ls MOI ia 286 Data Tools Reset mess de ESen a a a e a 287 Data Tools Calculate All Due Dates tdci 288 Data OOS Ole All Wales aii nta 288 Data Tools Remove Spaces Om Gage IDS sures aiae a A EO A OO 289 Data Tools Reset Gage Ssue Status ta 289 Data Tools Set Formatof Standards ario A A A E E E i 289 Data TOO Set Status OCASO 289 Chapter 7 C stomizing Repo Sauna dto na de AS teaser derde veeevide raden de deeene deden uenide de dendieannned 291 SING CUSTOM REDOIES tn eat ede ate alena ananda mahal aanta TAO 291 Create EOS DO gE 292 Creatine a NOW REDO usos add 292 USC NUNCA Si 293 opening a DATO SOUCO ai ira 295 SIMP QUE dc cidos 296 Advanced CUE o a o e 298 MT A OS 302 credtinNa VOUT EOVOUE hetnet o
174. a gt The nest form allows you to specify where the A GAGEtrak 6 6 program will be installed Do not specify a network location Itis recommended that you accept the default location C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 Setup will install GAGE trak 6 6 in the following folder To install into a different folder click Browse and select another folder You can choose not to install GAGE trak 6 6 by clicking Cancel to exit Setup M Destination Folder C Program FilesCyberhdetrict Comp GAGEtrak 6 5 Browse Cancel 6 Unless you re using the program with an MS SQL database the installation program will now let you select a location for the GAGEtrak database If you are using GAGEtrak in a client server environment skip to step 9 7 l you are using the program on a single workstation select the default directory C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 If you have a network license of the program and are using it with an Access database click the Browse button and select the network directory where you will store your database If you are running the setup from a network drive the path to the SETUP EXE file will be the default database location GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 227 8 If the folder you have selected has already been created a message window will appear to confirm that you wish to install to that directory anyway Click Yes to continue installation
175. abels are GroupHeaderN and GroupFooterN where N is an integer from 1 onwards The name and other properties of the group can be changed in the properties frame on the left after selecting the data field you will group on If you know the name of the field you can type it directly in the field or choose from the drop down list of available fields It is also advisable to change the group header and corresponding group footer name to the name of the field you group on This change will be reflected in the header and footer names on the canvas You can add as many groups as you wish Explorer El ENE a MainReport a E ReportHeader ReportHeader PageHeader StudyID Details 7 GroupFooter 1 PageFooter ReportFooter Comp Loge 10000000 Status CETAN Gage SM Description GM_Type flecte e Current Loc Property jen E NOTE Select folder and AESHNA Toolbox Note ES change properties as with group header They should have the same name Mame StudyID BackColor BackStwle O ddBKTransparel Canara True Canshrink False Colummlayout True DataField st_ID r GrpkeepToget 0 None height 795 keepTogether False ReportFooter Gage Becordis prir 308 To add a field to your group just drag and drop the field from the Fields frame Just make sure that you include the field defining the group The information on the fields that you put here will be only of the firs
176. ach attachment separately for viewing The Procedure Attachment tab displays any file attachments to the procedure In this particular example the procedure does not have any attached file ES Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH PA PA Image Procedure Attachment Procedure Name ICP22E Revision 12 01 99 File Description Record 14 4 zz b CO of 1 Record 14 4 2 gt gt i gt of 38 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Name Gage ID File File Description View Print Button Description The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Path of file attachment Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file Description of attached file type For example if the attached file is a Microsoft Word document the Description field will contain Microsoft Word Document Select this button to open the selected file with that file type application Calibration Entry Signature and Scans If your system administrator has enabled security calibrations can be electronically signed or unsigned Signatures are drawn from the User ID listing in Setup Securit
177. ad of AND Click OX to apply the changes you have made to your criteria Click Cancelto discard the changes you have made to your criteria Adding a Bar Code Bar codes of Gage IDs can be created by adding the terminator character at the beginning and end of the Gage ID and formatting the resulting character string in a bar code font Since the Gage IDs are taken directly from the field data it s easy to do this GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 321 automatically to all your Gage IDs without altering your database One way to do this Is to modify the SQL statement for your data source and add a new field containing the terminator characters and the Gage ID field giving it an alias such as BCode Hi Report Designer Gage Listing with Barcode a 5 Oj x File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help mm a Design Preview aE 3of9Barcode 18 B 7 U mgl aa ol te e lt a NE A E B MainReport E E ReportHeader a H ReportHeader H PageHeader H E Detail s H PageFooter Y gi al Edits the current SQL Record Source of your report EAT cx Edit Current SQL Source Alignment 2 ddTXCenter BackColor C Bar Width 1 Caption CaptionPositior 0 No ddbeCaptionNor DE EEA ern FAA ce or ie ea You can modify edit the existing query through the text box below 4ms_code as BCode FROM tblMaster ORDER BY ms_code Direction D ddbcLeftToRight DC
178. add bar codes too the process is the same as the process of adding bar codes to any other report Custom Label When you select this option you will first be prompted to set up your label printer Print Setup Printer Mame Brother PT S500RC Status Ready Type Brother PT S500RC Where FILE Comment Paper Size 36 mm Source Mormal T Network Properties Orientation Portrait k Landscape Cancel GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 325 You must specify the label printer and the size of the label you will use correctly If your default printer is not a label printer and you choose to use it anyway a dialog box will appear asking if you wish to continue using that printer cReport2D esigner lol x gt Selected printer doesnt appear to be a label printer lt 7 Use it anyway The program will attempt to set the canvas to the smallest possible area your chosen printer can handle An error message may come up just click OK and the canvas will appear and you can just go on making your label For now you can ignore this message the report editor is simply telling you that it does not have a proper label size to use Create your label as you would a report You may notice that the designer canvas only contains a Details section that is because it is the only section required for developing labels 326 Lhd Report Editor Mew Report E OsbOh 6089 IBAS Raab
179. ages are options that can be used to determine the exact operations required to merge the records when identical equipment ID s are found Note This procedure merges data from the Source to the Destination database and can be a time consuming process dependent on the quantity of records being merged 284 Data Tools Compact Repair Data Whenever you delete a record the program doesn t actually delete the record it only marks it as deleted and then re uses the space whenever you add new records 1 e your data file size does not decrease If you delete many records you should compact your data file so that the program actually removes these records decreasing the size of the data file You can do this by running Compact Repair Data from the Data Tools menu Data Tools Export Import For your convenience GAGEtrak includes an automated export program To export or import data from the menu select Data Tools Export Import This screen will appear ES Export Import Export Import Table s To Export Format ta Export To Calibration Header Text Calibration Measurements ES Gage Calibration Standards Saved Advanced Filters Custom Field Labels Gage Pat Li Expat Tables Gage Part Links Export T able s Exporting Data From the left side of the Export screen highlight the table s you want to export and from the right side of the screen choose the Export To file format ES Export Import Export Im
180. ait C Landscape ES Collate Printer Default v id Setti Duplex Printer Default v Ps PaperBin Default Printer z Styles Cancel GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 311 Field Name Description Paper Size This list box shows the paper sizes your default printer can handle It is best to view your selection and set this option before you create a report to ensure that your report falls within the boundaries of your page setup Most printers have default margins or nonprintable edges Consult your printer manual to determine these settings Width and Width and height are specified in twips Divide this value by 1440 to convert to inches divide by 567 to Height convert to centimeters Orientation If you select Printer Default check this setting in your Printer Control Panel The other settings are Portrait and Landscape In portrait orientation the page is oriented vertically in landscape it is oriented horizontally When you change these settings the page preview icon will change to give you a visual representation of the result Collate Select Collate when you are printing several copies of a multi page report to print each report sequentially When Don t Collate is selected all copies of page 1 will be printed then all copies of page 2 will be printed and so on Duplex If your printer offers duplex printing you can choose this option to print automatically on both sides of the paper Not all do
181. ak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 247 a e ere Al Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Frequency Adjustment Factors _ ResultCode Factor Pfa o o o 11 jor S _ New Certificate of Calibration Statement itis hereby certified that the above described instrument conforms to the original manufacturer s specifications and has been calibrated using standards whose accuracies are aceable to the National institute of Standards and echnology within the limitations of the Institute Calibration Services or have been derived from accepted values of natural physical constants or have been derived by the ratio pe of self calibration techniques Our calibration system satisfies ISO 9000 05 3000 and the ANSI 2 540 requirements Calibration Measurement Tab Stop Behaviour Before After and Comments 9 Before and After Selected Control A3 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting ReliabilityTarget Significance Threshold 03 F Maintain Calibration Procedure History Print Issue Label When Issuing Gage NeverPit E Failure Notice Statement Itis hereby stated that the above described instrument does not conform to the original manufacturer s specifications and has been failed based on accuracies that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology and are within the limitations of the Institute Calibration Services or have pon derived from accepted values of natural physic
182. al constants or have been derived by the ratio type of self calibration techniques 248 Field Button Name A1 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting A3 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Reliability Target Significance Threshold Maintain Calibration Procedure History Print Issue Label When Issuing Gage The table below describes the fields on this form Description Method A1 usually changes the calibration frequency every time you calibrate even after the calibration frequency has achieved high end of period reliability Most users will prefer less frequent changes and may not want the short calibration intervals that go with high reliability Method A1 is included for users who are familiar with it and wish to continue using it If you check the Auto Adjust Cal Frequency box in Gage Entry for any gage whenever you enter a new calibration record for it GAGEtrak automatically adjusts its calibration frequency according to the rules you define in the Frequency Adjustment Factors table This table is preset to use the NCSL RP 1 Method A1 see Appendix B of the User s Manual for NCSL s address This method increases the existing calibration frequency by 10 if the as found condition of the gage is in tolerance multiplied by 1 1 If the as found condition of the gage is out of tolerance then it reduces the interval by 55 of the existing frequency multiplied by 45 If the gage is new and you ve n
183. alendar Select Recurrance Active Days Start Time 8 00 AM y Field Name Select Calendar File Format Select Recurrence Start Time Include Reminder Alarm Create Event Include Reminder Alarm Description Select the file format that the calendar event will use iCalendar is a multi platform standard used with newer electronic calendar applications and allows more functionality like Recurrence and Alarms vCalendar is an older standard that does not support Recurrence or Alarms Select whether the event will be scheduled Every Day of the week or if it will only be scheduled on Active Days Active Days are determined by days of the week in Settings Calendar Skip Dates Entry Select the time of the day when the reminder will be scheduled Check this box to include an electronic reminder when the event is due The nature of the alarm depends on the nature and configuration of the electronic calendar application Create an event based on the settings in this form and export it to the default electronic calendar application If you wish to email this event to another user the event can be found in the default application directory C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 7 Important Note This utility will not perform the backup of the database All it does it create a reminder to perform the backup It is the administrator s responsibility to insure that the correct database is being backed up on a r
184. alibration Header Sig GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 351 Description Lists and links signature information for every calibration entry Associated From frmSubApprovedBy_ Sig Calibration Entry Signature tab frmSubCalibratedBy_Sig Calibration Entry Signature tab Field List Signature_ID Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time UserlD Signature_Name Signature_Type Signature_Date Signature_Time Signature_On Table Name Calibration Measurement Data Type Long Integer key Text Date Time Date Time Text Text Long Integer Date Time Date Time Long Integer Length 4 50 8 8 150 50 Description Contains information on calibration measurements for every calibration header Associated From Calibration Measurement SubForm Calibration Entry Measurements tab Edit Calibration Measurement Field List Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time Gage_Standard_ID CM_Before CM_After Minimum Nominal Maximum Uncert CM_Calibration_ID LimitUse Units CM_Type GM_Type Data Type Text key Date Time key Date Time key Text key Double Double Double Double Double Double Text Long Integer Text Text Text Length 50 50 50 50 352 Field List Comments GT_Format StdDueDate StdLastDate Data Type Length Memo 0 Text 50 Date Time 8 Date Time 8 Table Name Calibration Procedure Link Description
185. alibration data and document work assignments for your personnel 212 CALIBRATION HISTORY REPORTS Report Certificate of Calibration Calibration Costs and Labor Report Calibration Labels Batch Calibration History Standards Traceability Report PART REPORTS Report Gage Requirements by Part Part Bar Code Labels Description Calibration certificates prove that you ve performed the proper calibrations and that the procedures used meet exceed certain minimum requirements GAGEtrak retrieves the certificate information from Calibration Entry You can update only three fields in the report screen Customer nformation Statement and Uncertainty Format If you need to add or edit other information go to Calibration Entry Customer Information Enter what you want to print on the certificate This might include the customer s company name contact name address telephone number or other important information Statement You can edit the calibration statement for each certificate Any changes you make to the calibration statement apply only to that record If you want to change all future calibration statements go to Settings Calibration Options see the System Administrator s Guide Uncertainty Format Use the dropdown list box to select the number format for the sum of uncertainty standards that you used to calibrate the gage You can view or print certificates for the most recent calibration or fo
186. ame network location and then instruct users to run SETUP EXE from that location To install GAGEtrak follow these instructions 1 To begin installation click the Windows Start button and select the Run command Click the Browse button to navigate to your CD ROM or network 223 224 drive then select setup exe The sample screens show a CD and a network installation Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open D Setup exe J Cancel Browse Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windowsil open it For you Open I GAGEtrakisetup exel v Cancel Browse 2 Next you ll see the Welcome screen Make sure that you ve closed all other programs and then click Next Welcome Al Welcome to GAGEtrak 6 6 Setup program This E program will install GAGEtrak 6 6 on your lt computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup Program Click Cancel to quit Setup and close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Version 6 60
187. amed GTDATA65 EMP Copy this empty data file for each additional database that you want to use Before you add a new data file you may want to create a new folder in which to store it Use Windows Explorer or My Computer to create the new folder You can name your folder to identify which GTDATA65 MDB file it contains such as PLANTS or CALIPERS or by the name of a customer or a supplier For example if you had a database for three locations you might name your folders as follows C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 CHICAGO GTDATA65 MDB C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 MIAMI GTDATA65 MDB C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 SEATTLE GTDATA65 MDB After you ve created your new database run GAGEtrak and select File Open Database while in the main menu Click the Browse button to navigate to the new directory containing the second GTDATA65 MDB file then click OK In the lower right corner of the main menu you ll find the name of the database file that you re currently using as shown here A ee ee e Leed 397 398 GAGEtrak will remember which database file you last opened even if you quit the program and restart it later To open and use your original GTDATA65 MDB file select File Open Database again but this time go to your original directory usually C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 Important Currently no foolproof method exists for transferring r
188. an index This plot compares one appraiser s readings to those of another appraiser If the appraisers readings matched perfectly the plotted points would form a diagonal straight line Example Appraiser Comparison X Y Plots B vs A A vs C B vs C Scatter Plot The Scatter Plot charts individual readings by appraiser by part to help you determine consistency among appraisers occurrences of abnormal readings and the interaction between the parts and appraisers Example Scatter Plot A ist X 2nd 3rd Readings ZHaoOoLtHESLZaSGTASZAS ZB Appraiser Pa C6 A7 B7 C7 AB B8 c8 Ag B9 c9 AIO B10 C10 4 150 Repeatability Range Control Chart Using a standard range chart this chart plots the ranges of the readings by each appraiser for each part including the average range and control limits Appraiser groups the data and lines connect the points for each appraiser Repeatability Range Chart Interpretation The Range Control chart shouldn t show data patterns relative to the appraisers or have any out of control points An n control Range Control chart is a sign that the appraisers use the gage in the same way With the Range Control chart you can determine whether repeatability is the same for all appraisers the numerical methods do not answer this question Example Repeatability Range Control Chart 0 1280 0 0280 NM MDO Pm ODO NN ri ODO O OR ONO fa IE IE IE
189. an t unfreeze specific columns you can only release all frozen columns at once Saving Changes in Datasheet View Any changes made to a Datasheet View such as column widths displayed hidden columns column locations gridlines and fonts will be saved when you close the screen Datasheet formatting is retained within the program file in the current application installation new application installations show the default datasheet layout Filters Some reports open with filter windows that you can use to select a subset of records that match the criteria you enter This may not seem useful at first but you will appreciate this feature later when you have hundreds or thousands of records from which to select GAGEtrak s Quick Filter and Advanced Filter commands may be used to find a subset dynaset of records that match the criteria you enter Supported Wildcard Characters in Search Fields The asterisk question mark number sign exclamation point hyphen and brackets are all wildcard characters You can use them in record filters and in Find Replace commands to include all records that begin with specific characters or match a certain pattern Character If You Enter GAGEtrak Finds wh what white and why works like MS DOS commands at cat bat and what ball bell and bill matches any single character 1 3 103 113 123 matches any single digit not for use with date fields use asterisk
190. anagement Administrator Guide 357 Table Name Dist_ Factor Description Records Distribution Factor data used in calculating Uncertainty in Linearity Studies Associated From Linearity Field List Data Type Distribution_Type Text key Distribution Factor Double Table Name Events Description List of events for a specific gage Associated From Events Field List Data Type Event_ID Long Integer key Event Text Description Memo EAction Text ETrigger Text Table Name ezs SearchCriteria Description Stored search criteria Length 50 Length 4 50 0 50 50 Associated From Edit Search Criteria ezs_zCriteria Field List Data Type SearchName Text Source Text CriteriaNumber Long Integer key CriteriaText Text Table Name ezy_AuditLog Description Audit log records Associated From Audit Log Field List Data Type FS DateTime Date Time FS User Text Object Text Action Text DataKey Text ltemNumber Long Integer key Table Name ezy_AuditLogData Length 50 50 4 255 Length 8 30 100 100 100 4 358 Description Specific pre and post edit audit data Associated From AuditLog Advanced AuditLog_Basic frmAuditLog_ Detail Field List Item_Number Field Name Old_Value New_Value Memo_ Value Data Type Long Integer key Text key Text Text Memo Table Name ezy_GroupCustomer Description Specific pre
191. ance tip Select this command if you want to see information about the program Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Gage Entry To begin entering your gage records select Gage Entry from the Main Records menu The window below will appear ES Gage Entry Information Calibration Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Gage ID Status 1 w Active Ref Standard O NIST No Gage S N Issue Return Clone Gage Graph Calibration Attach Standards Attach Procedures Record EKE 1 P of 1 Since you don t have any gage records entered yet the fields are blank After you enter your gage records you can use the Quick or Advanced Filters to narrow your record searches Click the Find button to go to the gage record window A more detailed discussion of filters can be found in Program Conventions Help SLEE AARRE Quick Filter l o Advanced Filter Current Location Clear Filter Close Searching or Filtering Records If you want to search for a particular gage and don t know its ID then select the list box button it has a downward pointing arrow next to the Gage ID field A list of all available gages showing both gage ID and description will appear Similarly for the other fields you can select from the list box if one is available or type in information that applies only to the particular gage s you want to find In any of the list box fields after you type in on
192. ange the current users password All Groups List Box When a User ID is entered in the User ID field the default or added Group names become available in the All Groups list box and are available for user to be a Member Of assignment Members Of List Group selected user has been assigned to Box Add gt gt Button Select from the All Groups list and click this button to add the group or groups in which this user will be a member Remove lt lt Button Select a group or groups from the Member Of list and click this button to remove user membership 262 Security Group Permissions Modify group access permission to the different forms and reports of the program ES Security Groups Users Group Permissions Object oe Status Group Admin Select Object Form Form Control O Report O Report Control O Functions Select Form Gage Entry Select Control Gage ID Default Permissions Permissions exceptions to the default properties Read Only Disabled Read Only Enabled Read Write The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Group Select Object Select Form Report Control or Functions Permissions Description Select the group for which you want to establish permissions Select the type of object to set permission rights for for example Form Reports Controls and Functions Dependent on what was selected in Select Object there will be one
193. ar Tip You can also issue and return gages by selecting Issue Gages and Return Gages from the Main Records menu However Issue Gages and Return Gages are designed for consecutive gage issues or returns for large batches of gages and to facilitate bar coded data entry Issue Tracking is designed for issuing or returning a single gage ES Issue Tracking Entry Issue Date Issue Time Calibration Past Duel Cumulative Times Used 1 Gage ID COMPARATOR 12 16 2008 3 54 AM Type Calibration Issued To Adam Aaron Issued Dept QC Promised Date Return Received Date Received Time Part No 10 221 1 PO No 12 18 2008 Issue Label 12 16 2008 9 55 4M Received From Adam Aaron Record 14 1 gt gt t gt of 1 You must use Issue Tracking records for any gage whose calibration schedule is based on usage or cycles instead of elapsed calendar days These records track usage days and operating cycles they also update the next due date and or estimated due date of gages with these frequencies If you consistently use the Part No field you ll create manufacturing traceability For example if you find that a gage is out of tolerance you can immediately generate a part recall report that lists all parts that you might have measured incorrectly The table below explains the fields and buttons in the Issue Tracking Entry screen Field Button Name Issue Date and Issue Time Type Issued
194. as described in Opening a Data Source Tj rae NN Standard Report Custom Label 1 4 Inch Label _ Cancel 3 8 Inch Label 1 2 Inch Label 3 4 Inch Label 1 Inch Label 1 1 2 Inch Label Label Wizard After setting the data source remove the page header it is not needed in a sub report because it should already be present in the main report To do this select the Page Header title bar right click and choose Delete Selection from the popup menu that appears Only the Details section will remain this is where the fields for the contents of the report will go 318 Now you need a group heading The data field you use for this heading should be the field that you use to link with the master report It is not necessary to reflect the content of the data field in the heading but you must make sure to set the DataField in the Property ToolBox into the link field EE a of Explorer hi E c MainReport i HE GroupHeader1 Detail Name BackColor BackStyle CanGrow CanShrink GroupHeader 1 0 True False ColumnLayout True I i GrpKeepTogetl0 None I i Selected GroupHeaderl Section i You can add more groups to this report but make sure that the topmost group contains the link field When you are done save the sub report with an appropriate name We suggest that you indicate within the name tha
195. asswordDays Long Integer 4 NoAllowLogin Long Integer 4 NoAllowLoginEmails Memo 0 PasswordMinimum Long Integer 4 LoginInactivityPeriod Long Integer 4 LastDateSetting Date Time 8 Overwrite_Warning Long Integer 4 Restrictlssue Long Integer 4 SecurityRestrict Long Integer 4 LastDueEmail Date Time 8 GIDLastNumber Text 50 GIDNumberFormat Text 50 Scanned_Image_Path Text 255 ReliabilityTarget Double 8 OOT_Rate_Target Double 8 DesiredDispPrecision Long Integer 4 MinAllowInterval Double 8 MaxAllowInterval Double 8 ConfidenceLevel Double 8 SCNumberFormat Text 50 SCLastNumber Text 50 FirstDayOfWeek Long Integer 4 PrintlssueLabel Long Integer 4 PagerPause Long Integer 4 DoNotArchiveUnsignedCalib Boolean 1 DoNotArchiveUnapprovedCalib Boolean 1 ProcControl Long Integer 4 Failure_Notice_Statement Memo 0 EnableAutoGageNumber Boolean 1 Significance_Threshold Single 4 A3_NumberFormat Text 50 Table Name Skip Dates Description Skip date information Associated From Edit Skip Dates Settings Calendar tab Field List Data Type Length Skip Date Date Time key 8 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 385 Table Name Stability Results Description Lists Stability Study information Associated From Stability Study SubForm Field List Data Type Length ResultID Long Integer key 4 GRR_Results_ID Long Integer 4 GRR_Results Date Date Time 8 SubGroupNo Double 8 ChartNo Long Integer 4 s1 Double 8 s2 Double 8 s3
196. at menu 34 m FA Cell Effect Gridlines Shown Flat Horizontal Raised Vertical 5 Sunken Background Color Gridline Color L White ray Sample Border and Line Styles Datasheet Border e Solid Direction Left to right Right todeft Remove the checkmarks from the Horizontal and or Vertical checkboxes to remove the gridlines Changing the Row Height To adjust the height of all rows in a table choose Row Height from the Format menu and entering the desired value in the Row Height field The default row height is 10 5 The default row height will be retained if the Standard Height checkbox is checked Changing the Column Width Choose Column Width from the Format menu and enter the desired width in the Column Width field The default column width is 18 8 The default column width will be retained if the Standard Width checkbox is checked Freeze and Unfreeze Columns To prevent columns from moving off the screen freeze columns select the columns you want to freeze and choose Format gt Freeze Columns If you haven t selected any columns when you choose this command the program freezes the column in which your cursor is active GAGEtrak adds new frozen columns to the right of existing frozen columns A bold line separates the frozen and unfrozen columns To release frozen columns choose Format gt Unfreeze Columns When you unfreeze columns they remain in the same order they were in while frozen You c
197. bases ss od ass odas tear ao 232 240 Date NO ais alll el O mbu Dato add 61 Nex RAR DUS Dates 62 A hhe entend hl dentende eet aatueaee 57 A nr ee ee eee eee 57 A tene terre detained 57 Di A Sea ee Sale a a cas 399 DEDEN Ener eneen nee neee ee eee hee ehehe 102 111 NA genannten ar een ee csr aren etiketteren 212 alineada ee ee ee ee ee ee 57 ME aa A EE A E 57 71 81 A oN RES Me NI RO Me Ne Se ae ee 288 Employee ID GRO AUING sc ncaasascerditececensanavsnaniaeaccueseaaieneapaieneacane aan lt oatenasaameanecnadeneananennecsadeassenaenancnaiemesgue 269 282 Environmental la 112 0 A 60 Edu upment Varallonitey sure 135 EOS AN reisen betande setae teens O eau utaebearteeesucutan 145 Error Message Duplicate MEN INS N ascii 402 moogt onl 918 ree eee amentenr ie idol See Exporting Data and Importing Data EXPORMO Dala nad adi 284 Filter ATCNIVO UMACI V O cri darna ee darna addon dad cere as hoa Edna earn nende 275 calibration BA tetten neten Ann ante Aen 109 ROPO cent et ne cent ne ce tet ne ete eet ane eee em ener ees 207 Gade Frequency AUSTIN IMM os pos 105 Gage ID NS A A E O Pen Ere Pen nate 275 Automatic Calibration Due Report occccocccccccncccccnccccnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnennnninnnos 245 calibrato N ENUY EEEN 111 Calibration Lapelis ssns Et 212 EMON EN 56 EO WG AGO wanten eee ieee cman Gene eben eben 402 e A eat RAD E 59 A inenen nebe a tend De Dn Dt tatu 66 SUS FACKING erneer nette tete t
198. be issued at this time Do you want to see a list of the gages that could not be issued as part of this kit If you select Yes the following screen appears ES Gage Type Gages Not Issued Kit Required Gage Type Not Issued Kit Required Gages Not Issued X No available gage based on the following gage type Gage Type Past Due Record 14 d 11 CO of 1 ES Gage Type Gages Not Issued Kit Required Gage Type Not Issued Kit Required Gages Not Issued Ls Gage ID Already Issued Record 14 1 gt I of 1 What this screen represents is that there are no Bore Gage gage types that are currently available for issuance GAGEtrak will disallow the issuance of a specific kit when gages that comprise it are not complete or the gage belonging to the kit is presently issued to somebody else 96 Returning a Kit A kit must have been issued before you can check it in ES Kit Return Kit ID Kit 001 Issue Date 2 5 2004 Issue Time 9 32 AM Type xxx Issued To Randy Issued Dept Dept Promised Date 5 6 2004 leceived Date 12 17 2008 ieceived Time 3 51 AM ieceived From Notes Record 14 d 1 gt pi b of 3 Filtered Field Button Description Name Received Date These fields are prefilled with the current date and time but are editable fields Time Received From Enter or select a name from the dropdown list box of the person returning the kit Notes Document any important comments suc
199. be when printed Actual physical distances on the screen vary according to your monitor s size and resolution Email transmission setup e Email Method select protocol for sending email between servers e SMTP Server insert name of server e From Email insert your email address e Remote Port check with your System Administrator for an acceptable port number e User Authentication is the process of identifying an individual usually based on a User Name and Password o Test Email performs validity of information entered in email setup In the data entry screens you can click the floating toolbar to resize or move it If you don t want the toolbar to be visible un check the Open Automatically checkbox within the Floating Toolbar Frame Please see the Program Conventions section of the User s Manual for more information on the toolbar When a gage is attached to a Service Request the application can automatically change that gage s Status ID based on the Type selection for the Service Request Choose Do Not Change to prevent such changes Automatically Change to have the change made without user intervention and Ask To Change to ask the user if such a change should be made When a gage attached to a Service Request has been returned from the Service Supplier and its Gage Service Request Status is set to Closed the application can set the status of that gage back to Active This change will also be done if the Status for the entire S
200. bration checkbox is checked the Do Not Archive Unsigned Calibration checkbox should be checked an approved calibration can only be archived if the Calibrated By and Approved By Signatures have been created for that calibration entry Settings Automatic Numbering GAGEtrak automatically generates a number sequence for your Calibration Certificates Service Requests Gage ID Calibration Scan File Name and Path Option numbering and Gage Numbering Schemes for cloning records Use this screen to set the desired format E Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Calibration Certificate Numbering Numbering Schemes Format gt Number Field 1208 000 Last Number Issued Gage Type Format Service Request Numbering Last Number Issued ramddyy HHH Format Test 012004 0000 Last Number Issued Record 14 1 gt I O Enable Automatic Gage Numbering Formal Enter the for Tn at to use for Automatic Ni umbering into Test Format Use for let i at will be incre ed and iter or lette numbers 0000000121 Last Number Issued for digits the at Gage ID Numbering that v vill n ot be ine cemented eel text appea i S es 4 Calibration Scan File Name and Path Option to ine te inf he Auto mber ente the date codes from the table below in ithe Format Lea HHHHHHHHHH Format ihe armed Gla ta de ratie cremental numbering 0000000002 Last Number Issued Date Information C Temp Fil
201. bration standards available Variable V or Attribute A Select Variable for those standards that have a value that you actually measure such as 0 502 inches Select Attribute for pass fail or visual types of checks Selecting Attribute does not calculate accuracy of particular standard GAGEtrak copies it from Gage Entry if entered or you can select it here The program also copies the units of measurement from Gage Entry GAGEtrak copies the gage s Minimum Nominal and Maximum values from Gage Entry Enter the type of the reference standard being used as to Attribute or the specific type of the reference gage Specify the format for the numeric display 116 Field Button Name Before After Accuracy Before Accuracy After Limited Use Gage ID of Standard Std Due Date Uncertainty Description Enter the actual measurement observed before you adjust the gage The button to the right of this field brings up the Calibration Formula Listing for more information see Calibration Formula Listing Next enter the actual measurement observed after you adjust the gage The button to the right of this field brings up the Calibration Formula Listing for more information see Calibration Formula Listing This field shows the accuracy value based on the before measurement Before minus Nominal In this field you ll see the accuracy value based on the after measurement After minus Nominal Based on
202. brations Be sure to include any return shipping and insurance charges in your estimate Please include the following information in your calibration documentation 1 The calibration environmental conditions including but not limited to relative humidity and ambient temperature A calibration certificate which states that the calibration technique or standard which is directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology or an internationally accepted naturally occuring phenomenon Record 4 4 1 gt P of 3 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 267 The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Letter Type Name of the letter must be unique name Date Authored Date letter was written Authored by Name of person that developed the letter Body Body or main contents of the letter Open Editor Select this button to open the letter contents in the RTF editor Note This editor supports rich text therefore text defined in another word editor such as MS Word can be copied and pasted into GAGEtrak Setup Status ID Entry Select this utility to enter the descriptions you want to appear in the Status drop down list in Gage Entry You must use the status ID 1 for current gages because the 1 tells GAGEtrak that the gage is active On Calibration Due Listings Calibration Work Orders and Calibration Schedules GAGEtrak includes only
203. button to add to the Group Member list box of the currently selected group Select a group member or members from the Group Members field and click the Remove lt lt button to remove the selected groups from the list box GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 261 Security Users Add and remove application users using this screen ES Security MIE Groups Users Group Permissions Object Permissions Status by UserID Default User Ww Name Bill Jones Open Form All Groups Member Of Calibration Guest lssue User The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description User ID Select the user you wish to view or enter a new user name Note If a User ID is the same as a retired User ID in 21 CFR Part 11 the retired user ID cannot be duplicated Name Full name of this user Open Form Select the form that you want this user to see when the application starts Add and Delete Add or delete a user from the current user listing Button ne Note If 21 CFR was selected upon installation and the Default account with Admin rights is deleted a new Default User will be created upon re login If Standard was selected upon installation and Enable Security was enabled after an Admin user was added and then deleted the application will automatically open without login restrictions and Enable Security will still be activated Password Button Select this key to add or ch
204. cation using the network login ID With SQL Server authentication using a login ID and password entered by the user To change the network library used to communicate with SOUL Server click Client Configuration Client Configuration Connect to SOL Server to obtain default settings for the ia i i additional configuration options Login ID UserlD Password ae lt Back Cancel Help 8 Enter the Login ID and Password for your SQL server and then click Next 9 You ll see the Configuration screen If needed change the default database check the box next to this field and enter or select a new database Create a New Data Source to SOL Server Change the default database to master ka Attach database filename Create temporary stored procedures for prepared SUL statements and drop the stored procedures f Only when you disconnect When pou disconnect and as appropriate while you are connected Use ANSI quoted identifiers Use the falover SUL Server if the primary SUL Server is nat available lt Back Cancel Help r 10 Now click the Next button You should see a screen similar to this one 237 238 Create a New Data Source to SOL Server English had t Use strong encryption for data le Perform translation for character data Use regional settings when outputting currency numbers dates and x times _ Save long running queries to the log file CADOCUM
205. ced your bar code In this case select the Detail bar GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 323 Currently there is only one way of linking the bar code item to the bar code field Bcode you created Click on the View Script button al to open the script window E Script Editor If you want to use a numeric field for your bar Object Detail Events OnFormat y code use the amp instead of the sign Sub OnFormat rpt Sections 2 Controls Fieldi0 Caption rpt Sectior Haa Sib War g ms id amp NAM The amp converts the value of the numeric field into string so it can concatenate properly with the two Follow the syntax below to set up your script for linking the bar code to the bar code field Sub OnFormat rpt Sections 2 Controls Field10 Caption rpt Sections 2 Controls DataControll Recordset Fields BCode Value End Sub Here rielazo is the name of the bar code field that you created in your report and acode IS the data field that you created in setting up your data source This is VBScript Just copy the script and remember to keep the lines 2 3 and 4 together or in one row between Sub and End Sub The line has been divided into 3 parts for illustration purposes only to fit within the page margins asten In rpt Sections 2 2is the index number of the Detail Section You le b
206. cedure from the list box You can choose only procedures that you ve entered in Procedure Entry Gage Entry Parts Use these records to define the parts and operations for which you ll use the gage By linking this information to each gage you re facilitating manufacturing traceability Before you can link a part to a gage you must enter the part s record in Part Entry ES Gage Entry gt Information Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Gage ID C 00d Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Part No Description Operation Drawing No Drawing Date Change Level Change Date gt 10 2211 v Bracket Rt Hand Stamping 100 221 2 13 1998 AB 10 221 2 Bracket Lt Hand Stamping 100 222 10 221 3 Bracket Front Stamping 100 223 Record 14 4 2 gt gt t gt of 47 Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field Part No Select the part s ID number After you select the part number GAGEtrak will fill in the other fields with the information that you entered in Part Entry Part information on this form is read only Description The name of the part will appear in this field Operation This field stores the production operation or work center description such as Stamping or Machine 13 Drawing No The blueprint drawing number of th
207. ceseuseceeeuecetsenecetsueeetens 85 CalPre Callbra ton Procedure Susi A ES 85 Procedure Entry Procedure Med AE 86 Procedure Entry Procedure Attachments ais 87 Proceaure Entiy Gage ist Aaa 88 Chapter 6 Entering service Requests ais 89 SERVIC Request TY a ASA as 89 Chapter 7 KIE ENV iaa aaa iaa 91 KEEN N Orma o ie a a a a a a 91 KEEN Required GAEETVPES ainsi bednet o 92 KEE thy RE GQUIFEG GILS as 93 E arsteica a cena son eta enbariesa ve nrateca a reiera can tea enaameeadouniaGs osocm eatin cnaeeaeenatsnetears 94 PRE ECU MIS sel O tates 96 IEE ERY AITON ea sattansesnseate yaa a neleke and abn natac ened R aA 97 KEER ReDO Sist 97 Chapter 8 Entering Supplier Records iaa 99 SHOEI osain an a a a bereden aaar ads 99 Chapter 9 Gage Issue and Return Batch Mode ssessessessessesseoseoseossossoescessessesseosecseoseoseossoesoessesoesseoseoseoseossossoseoe 101 IS SUC CTET E Cis EE EE seat ole E e OET E OE 101 RCA Te a Se En 103 CONDI QUIN STATUS en deedeetee neee attendant eee tias 104 Chapter 10 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval csccscsscsscsscssccscccceccscceccsccnccscceccsccsccscescescescescesceccecceccnccnscncens 105 Method AS FOrMUlA Susto 107 EX Cha OlaLIOM FONOS a oe 108 Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records ccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccsccscecceccncceccsccnccscceccnccsccscscescescescescecceccesceccnscncens 109 CONDI GTION ENV CANDIA taa 109 Callbration ERGY Measurement sia dd 115 Calibrati
208. cessary trailing spaces that your old program used and that were in any databases that you imported into GAGEtrak It also rounds your calibration measurements to six decimal places removing any extraneous digits added or transferred during the import process Depending on how many records you have this process can take from one to ten minutes Note This utility is not the same as the GAGEtrak Compact Data utility The Compact utility doesn t remove spaces it removes old deleted records that you no longer need Data Tools Reset Gage Issue Status This utility goes through each gage in the database and checks to see if the gage has been issued and not returned All of the currently issued gages are flagged as issued Use this utility if any issue tracking records have been deleted Data Tools Set Format of Standards Use this utility if you have upgraded from any previous version of GAGEtrak It sets the number of significant decimals for the calibration standards tor each gage according to each gage s most precise tolerance or resolution Data Tools Set Status of Gages This procedure updates the Gage Entry Status field for all records to which you haven t assigned a status It changes these empty Status fields to status 1 Active This utility won t change the status of any gages in your database that already have a status Note Use this utility only if you re upgrading from a 1 x version of GAGEtrak or if you import
209. ch as inches mm or degrees When you enter the nominal measurement GAGEtrak automatically calculates the minimum measurement based on the gage s tolerance This value is the minimum acceptable value for the gage when you measure this standard for example 0 999 Enter the nominal value for the gage when you measure this standard for example 1 000 When you enter the nominal measurement GAGEtrak automatically calculates the maximum measurement based on the gage s tolerance This value is the maximum acceptable value for the gage when you measure this standard such as 1 001 Select the type of Reference Standard that will be used for this standard This list box will show the Gage Type of every reference standard in the database Select from a list of available standard IDs The list is limited by the Ref Type field An empty Ref Type field would show all available IDs Select numerical format for measurement appearance on reports Note The format does not affect how measurements are shown in forms only in reports Standards Prefill Entry Use Standards Prefill Entry to save time when you have multiple calibration standards and their nominal values are evenly spaced for example if you have a group of standards with the values 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 ES Standards Prefill Entry Gage ID C 002 Number of Standards 6 Start Value 1 Increment Value 1 Standard Names Gage Block Type V Ref Type GAGE BLOCK S Ga
210. cific factors Look for any uniform patterns in your Error chart including the following one appraiser s second or third set of readings is consistently higher than his first one appraiser s average is higher than the other appraisers averages and or one part standing out as more difficult to measure consistently 146 Example Error Chart 0 1305 0 0305 0 0695 0 1934 0 0934 0 0066 0 1066 Run Chart and Average Chart Run Chart by Part This chart plots the averages of each appraiser s various readings using part number as an index The Run chart shows part variation and can detect reproducibility and appraiser x part interaction error Example Run Chart If the patterns are not at the same height there is a reproducibility error If the patterns are not the same shape there is an appraiser x part interaction error Average Chart by Part The Average chart is much like the Run chart except that it also calculates the overall average and control limits From this chart you can determine the measurement system s acceptability Example Average Chart poe of WAY AA UCL 0 8796 Avg 0 8075 LCL 0 7354 The three zigzag patterns show the pattern of Part Variation PV as measured by three different Appraisers These patterns vary a lot more than the control limits which is good the control limits show the variation expected due to Repeatability EV as if we always measur
211. cludes label design software fonts clip art and bar codes features that let you use it for many other quality control and production labeling applications For more information about the kit please contact CyberMetrics Corporation or your distributor Calibration Entry Measurements ES Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals N Gage ID C 004 Standard ID Ref Type Gage ID of Standard 1 INCH GAGE BLOCK GAGE BLOCK S MSGB1 2 INCH GAGE BLOCK GAGE BLOCK S S N 2345 3 INCH GAGE BLOCK GAGE BLOCK S S N 3456 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Type Units Minimum Nominal Maximum A Format Before Accuracy Limited Std Due Date Uncertainty After Accuracy Use ON 0 999 1 1 001 v 000 1 0008 OU 0 001 v O 1 2 2006 0 00000000 1 0003 O 0 000 a ON 1 999 000 2 001 _ v _ 4872005 0 00050000 2 0004 _ ON 2 999 v 000 3 0012 _ v _ 871572005 0 00050000 3 001 _ ON v General Number 10 You can use this screen to compare the actual before and after measurements of the gage with the standards that you use to calibrate the gage You will use these fields in the Measurements screen Field Button Name Standard ID Type Units Minimum Nominal and Maximum Ref Type Format Description GAGEtrak copies the Standard Ds from the Calibration Standards table that you defined in Gage Entry Two types of cali
212. column Uncertainty Contributor Repeatability or GRR Hysteresis Stability of the reference standard Consistency of the reference standard Details For Linearity amp Bias studies use the pooled standard deviation For Bias Only Studies use the Standard Deviation of Bias The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 GRR Studies are not ordinarily used for this but they can be The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 for an updated study otherwise use Normal with a Divisor of 5 15 Linearity amp Bias studies can be designed to use multiple gages from a gage family in which case the result will be GRR rather than Repeatability Both Linearity amp Bias and Bias Only can be designed to use more than one appraiser For example by having two appraisers do six trials each Use the maximum difference between upscale and downscale readings on the same artifacts This test should cover the full range of the gage For example gently add weights to a scale one at a time until you get to the full range then gently remove the weights one at a time Record readings at each step The weights don t have to be known values The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Include this item if the reference standard is a variable gage and if a Stability study shows instability of the X bar chart See the next table for instructions The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Include this item if the reference standard is a va
213. cord 14 1 gt gt of 2878 Report Label Options Open Normally O Open with default label text Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Field Name Description Default text used to describe the field in GAGEtrak GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 255 Field Button Name Description Label Text Text that goes in the function field Default Label Text If a field is to have a value at all time this is the value that the system will default to Normal or Bold The weight appearance of the font Report Label Select Open Normally to show the user defined label text and use Open with default label text to Options show the default label text Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button Close If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu The field names are in alphabetical order Scroll down the list to find the field name you want to change If for example you wanted to change Model No to Tool No in the Label Text area you would replace Model No with Tool No Once you change a field name here it will be changed on all entry screens filters and reports Settings Gage Calibration Custom Gage Custom is the same as Gage Entry User Interface it s your preference as to what method you d like to use in customizing the label text Although modifying the labels through this screen provides for
214. cords You must also set the Sort Order to Ascending or Descending If no setting is specified the application default is set to Ascending Click on the Next button and view the SQL statement summary on the next window The following summary screen will show you the actual SQL statement that will be used to open your data source 302 SOL Builder MIE Summary Below is the Summary record source for your report You can modityviedit the existing query through the text box below Select Calibration Header Gage_ID Gage Events Gage ID Gage Ewentzs E went ID FROM Calibration Header INNER JOIN Gage Events ON Calibration Header Gage ID Gage_Events Gage_ID ORDER EY Calibration_Header Gage 10 Gage_Events Event_ID ASC Cancel Back Finish Direct SQL Query Advanced users can directly enter the SQL statement using this third type of query preparation It is assumed that you know the full syntax for creating SQL statements We have however included the basics for creating SQL statements or statement structure to help you get started a SOL Builder Select Query Type What type of Report Query would you like to build C Simple Query Display fields from a single table in the database recommended for Single Table Reports Advanced Query Display multiple fields from multiple tables in the database using user defined table relationships used for Reports with multiple source tables and summary queries Direct S
215. cription of attached file type For example if the attached file is a Microsoft Word document the Description field will contain Microsoft Word Document Highlight the record indicator to the left of the File name and or place the cursor in the File name field and select Delete from the floating toolbar to remove the attachment from the gage record Select this button to open the selected file with that file type application Gage Entry Issuances This form can be used to record any authorized persons that are associated with a gage record Individual gages can have specific triggering events for example a Gage Issuing Email or if running of an external application if a calibration has failed An external application can be an AutoCAD drawing or a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet ES Gage Entry Information Calibration Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Description Caliper 0 6 inch Restrict Issue Print Issue Label When Issuing Gage Program Default Authorized Persons Name E Adam Aaron Dan David Event Parameter Application gt Status Change Report w Gage Issue History Y Record 14 1 gt gt t gt of 51 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field Restrict Issue The option sele
216. ct OK and then click on Browse to find the directory where the Scripts file is located Enter the name and server location of the GAGEtrak 6 5 data file The letter for the drive must be its physical drive letter not a mapped letter For example if your server has a physical drive D that s mapped to as a different letter F enter D followed by the rest of the path Remember to include MDF master database file as the file extension MS SQL users should enter the name and server location of the log file We recommend that you use the same path as for the data file again using the drive letter of the physical drive Remember to include LDF library definition file as the file extension Enter the Administrator User ID SA and password of your database administrator MS SQL users must enter the server name in this field For example if the server name is Company_NT enter that name in this field Not supported When you ve finished entering all of the necessary information click this button to run the scripts Click this button to make sure that you re connected to the correct path before you run the scripts To exit this screen without running the scripts click Cance to return to the main DTU screen 336 When you re finished running the scripts you can begin transferring data and or updating or adding reports Data Transfer Instructions Version 5 5 5 4 and 3 Access Users to
217. cted gage will appear in this field Resolution Use this field to store the resolution of the gage This is the smallest or least count unit of motion that the gage is capable of measuring and displaying For example 0 001 is the resolution on a typical dial caliper Uncertainty This field holds the uncertainty value use it only if this record is for a reference standard You can obtain this value from the manufacturer It s expressed in units such as percentage 0 5 proportion 0 005 or measurement units 0 0001 inch Operating Range Enter the gage s allowable operating range as to the minimum and maximum size it could measure Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field 64 Field Button Name Tolerance Tolerance Standard Group Standard ID Type Units Minimum Nominal Maximum Ref Type Gage ID of Standard Format Description Use this field to store the uppertolerance for the gage as published by the manufacturer GAGEtrak later uses this information to calculate the maximum value for calibration standards To enter this value as a percentage of the nominal enter the value followed by the percentage sign for example enter 13 Tip Check the placement of decimal points for example 1 equals one percent 1 equals one tenth of a percent Enter the owertolerance for this gage as published by the manufacturer use a positive value GAG
218. ctions in this list box are Program Default Restricted and Not Restricted and control the persons authorized to Issue gages If Program Default is selected the application will check whether or not Restrict Issue to Authorized User is checked in Settings if it is the Issued To field in Issue Gages will list only the authorized users that were entered on the Gage Entry Auth Persons for that gage Program Default is Restrict Issue the default If Restrict Issue to Authorized is not checked all staff will be listed in the Issue To in Issue Gages form If Restricted is selected it will override the program default and the Issued To in Issue Gages will be restricted to the authorized persons for that specific gage You will not be able to select this option until Authorized Persons have been added to the List If Not Restricted is selected it will override the program default and the Issued To in Issue Gages will be populated with the staff list 74 Field Button Description Name Print Issue Label Select Print Issue Label options include Always Print Never Print Ask To Print OF Program When Issuing Default Option selection made directly in Gage Entry Specification will override the Program Gage Default in Settings Cal Option which can be set to Always Print Never Print Or Ask To Print Name Authorized person s name Note Information of person s affiliation with use of gage Event List box of Events are actions taken within
219. ctions on your screen GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 401 Please check with your IT department or whoever is responsible for maintaining your computer before running these utilities We also recommend making sure you have a current backup of your GAGEtrak data before performing any hard drive maintenance Maximizing Your Performance We recommend that you keep a large amount of empty hard drive space for your operating system s virtual memory management If you have limited resources and GAGEtrak runs slowly try closing all other applications to devote all available system resources to GAGEtrak Installation Fails If for any reason you can t install your CD or you receive any error messages during installation try reinstalling the CD If installation fails again please write down any error messages and call Technical Support at 480 922 7300 for further instructions Repairing Data Files Although GAGEtrak has been designed to be as trouble free as possible error messages may appear because of occurrences like power outages accidental resetting of your computer network disconnects and other mishaps In these cases you might need to repair and compact your data file GTDATA65 MDB You can do this by selecting the Compact Repair Data utility from the Data Tools menu Depending on the size of your file this may take several minutes to complete Network users should make sure that no one else is running G
220. cuments need to be printed in this manner so we have included this setting to be activated only when printing reports Paper Bin If your printer has more than one paper bin you can use this option to select a specific paper bin You might use this option to print on paper of a different size than the printer s default or to print on letterhead as opposed to blank paper Grid Settings The tiny dots you see evenly distributed over the designer canvas are the grid which is intended to give you guidance in the design and layout of your report The dots will not appear on your printed report The spacing of the dots in rows and columns is defined under Grid Settings By default there are 16 dots to the inch both horizontally and vertically Report Settings Y Show Grid lW Align Controls to Grid Page Setup Grid columns 16 Grid rows 16 Ruler Units e Inches Printer Settings C Centimeters Grid Settings PS Styles Cancel 312 By default the Show Grid checkbox is checked Uncheck this box to hide the grid Check the Align Controls to Grid checkbox if you want the elements on the designer canvas to snap to the grid Note Sometimes you may want to uncheck this option to position elements closer together than your grid will allow Do not forget to recheck this option if you want the elements on the designer canvas to snap to the grid Grid settings can be changed to suit your requirements Use the Gri
221. cy chart for this gage click Graph To go to Calibration Entry for this gage click this button Note When you enter Calibration Entry via Gage Entry the calibration records presented will be of historical records for the particular gage ID record you were viewing in Gage Entry In other words if the user is in Gage Entry looking at the gage record for the Gage ID C 002 and selects the Calibration button only the calibration records for C 002 will be visible To create a new calibration record for the particular gage ID select the new record icon button and or the new record button in the record navigator toward the bottom of the form Allows you to attach a Standard Group to the selected Group Type Allows you to attach a procedure to gages with the selected Gage Type Gage Entry Schedule In this screen you ll set up the calibration schedules for each gage P information Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Calibrator In House Calibration Hours Last Calibrated By No User Name Est Calibration Cost Calib Freq 365 Days R amp R Freq 5 Years R amp R Skip Direction Skip Forward v Skip Direction Skip Forward v Last R amp R Date 3 22 2004 Next R amp R R amp R Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval None v Next R amp R Due Date 3 23 2009 Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Last R amp R Result Initial Time Last Cal Date 9 25 20
222. d columns and Grid rows fields to specify how many dots per ruler unit are desired use the Ruler Units radio buttons to specify the unit of measurement in inches or centimeters Note If you change your grid unit to centimeters you may want to reduce the number of dots per ruler unit to 10 or even 5 to keep your canvas from being overcrowded with grid dots Styles This feature gives you a quick way to style the type in your reports appropriately and uniformly Four basic styles are included for your convenience Normal Heading 1 Heading 2 and Heading 3 Each of these styles has different attributes according to how they might be used in a document for instance the heading styles are all bold for emphasis while the style Normal is plain rather than bold and of a suitable size for body text on a page You might want to style the most important elements in a report Heading 1 less important headings Heading 2 the least important headings Heading 3 and body content Normal You may use the controls in the right hand pane of the Styles window to modify the font size color or alignment of a style You may also create new styles by clicking the New button under the list of styles in the Styles window GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 313 Note New styles or modifications to existing styles in a given report appear only in that report Report Settings ge Normal Heading Heading Headings Heading4 Printer Se
223. d to do this only once for an administrator setup To set up each workstation follow steps 3 10 1 Run the appropriate scripts for your server to create the database and tables The scripts are located in the GAGEtrak6 5 SCRIPTS directory The files have prefixes to their names Step1 Step2 to indicate the order in which you should run them You might need to modify the data file in the table space for your system See the Step 1 script for details 2 Next run GAGEtrak s Data Transfer Utility Version 6 to import existing data from a previous version or prefill the database 3 Open GAGEtrak 6 7 and select Open Database from the File menu 4 Inthe Open Database screen check the Use ODBC checkbox 5 Place a check in the Use DSN checkbox Important If you used a different Database Name DSN User ID and or Password during installation enter the information you used instead of the values listed below 6 The Database Name should read cagemg s or the name that you entered during installation 7 The DSN field should show mssoL Gagemg6s the DSN that you entered during installation this value may be different 8 Your user ID should be cagemg s this field may also vary according to your setup 9 The Password field should contain the password you entered during installation Note that the password is displayed as asterisks for security purposes 10 Your screen should look similar to the one below When you re finish
224. e existing reports in the current database ES Transfer Report Data Destination Connection Information C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 GTS amp65 mdb et Available Reports for updating Report Name Your Yersion Curr Yersion Action New Report Name 1 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label JJ sp O aj Inch Label E a E T E 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label AROMA sa SS inchlabel SS RR a RO 1 2 Inch Gage Barcodelab AR Eske ijZinchtabel see 4 Inch Label 11 j 4 Inch Label 8 Inch Label Frequency Adjusting Report nalytic Gage Performance nalytic Performance Curve udit Log Detail Report lt lt lt lt lt v v EA AA AAA AA AAA Pe eee P uw lt Action Legend Overwrite overwrites your existing report with the updated one Note Do not choose this option if you have customized the report earlier Save as save the updated report with a new report name Skip skips the report update Note Reports that need to be updated are automatically set to Overwrite action by default Overwrite All Skip All Cancel Transfer Data v You can take an action for each report available for updating these actions are i Overwrite overwrite the existing report with the new report Save As save the current report with a new name Skip do not do anything with the current report Note If you have not modified any reports in the past then click Transfer Datato have the updated versions of the
225. e Path LJ au sone numeric day of the en o di 31 of the week Sun at mam numeric month 01 to 12 text month Jan to Dec Y o digit year 99 5 JLI Sot Je ar 1999 The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Format The format that will be used to create numbers for new records Use for incremented letters for incremented digits enter text in all capitals Leave field blank to use the default Last Number This field contains the last number issued You can modify this number but be sure you enter the Issued values correctly or there may be duplicates Test Select this button to view next formatted number of the sequence File Path Select the drill down button to the right of the file path field to access the Browse For Folder dialog box to select location for stored files 254 Field Button Name Numbering Schemes Enable Automatic Gage Numbering Cancel Close Description Allows for custom numbering conventions for Number Fields and Request Types If the numbering format does not fall within the numbering convention in Numbering Schemes it will default to the format defined in Settings Automatic Numbering The Number Fields and the Calibration Type dropdown lists contain predefined lists of fields that can be affected by the defined criteria in the Numbering Schemes section If this checkbox were checked then the automatic numbering of n
226. e Text Procedure Image Procedure Attachment Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 DIAL DIGITAL AND VERNIER CALIPERS www isoorg Calibration Frequency 12 months can be modified according to stabilty purpose and usage 1 0 Scope This method describes the calibration of calipers inside and outside dimensions up to 72 inches 1800 mm and depth dimension up to 12 inches 300 mm Instrument resolution 0 001 or 0 0005 inch 0 02 or 0 05 mm 2 0 References This document is based on the DOD procedures 3 0 Definitions TI Test Instrument DOD Department of Defense 4 0 General Requirements Environment Temperature Change should not exceed 2 deg Fihr 1 deg Chr Humidity No excessive humidity Air quality NA Stabilization Stohilize aratinmarks and otancdarde at ambiant tamnarah wa Record Id 4 1 PI gt of 1 The first procedure appears automatically to view additional procedures for this gage click the record navigation button at the bottom left corner of the inner window Tip You can t edit procedures here you can only view them To edit procedures go to Procedure Entry The following table describes the fields in this area Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field Procedure Text Information under this tab includes the Proced
227. e Type it is not necessary to select gages of that particular gage type under Required Gages because when a gage type is selected under Required Gage Types you are essentially telling the application that the kit will include one or more gages of that type Likewise when you select a gage in Required Gages you are telling the application that that kit will include that exact gage So there is no need to pick a specific gage when you have already specified that a gage of that type would be included in the kit Refer to scenarios after Required Gages ES Kit Entry E DIAL E FIXTURE E FLOWMETER E GO NO GO Information Required Gage Types Required Gages History X Kit Description Test Kit Quantity Parts Measured With Gage Type Description w Bracket At Hand Record 14 lt 1 gt PIJP of 1 Record 14 1 gt e of 4 Record 14 4 1 gt PIP of 2 Field Button Name Gage Type Quantity Parts Measured with Part No Description Description Gage Type Unit of Measure Size select the types of gages that are used in the kit These fields can contain an unlimited number of gages types units of measure size Total per Gage Type Select the parts that will be measured with each gage type Using this feature helps you keep track of gages and parts by automatically linking parts to gages when a kit is checked out The information in these fields is optional and you
228. e a gage GAGEtrak inserts the current date and time as the issue date and time It also changes the gage s Current Location field to a description that consists of Issued To plus Issued Dept For example soe Jones Assembly 2 GAGEtrak assumes you want to return a gage if its current record is incomplete After you enter the Received Date and Time and save the record GAGEtrak changes the gage s Current Location field to its storage location Pop Up Issue Information In the Gage Entry Information tab the Current Location field turns yellow to show that the gage is currently issued out Double click on this field to open a pop up window that shows you the date time person department and part information from Issue Tracking Double click anywhere in the pop up window to close it ES Issue Tracking Issue Date 12 17 2008 Issue Time 8 55 45 AM Issued To BOB SMITH Issued Dept QC Part No 10 221 1 Cloning Gage Records lf you want to copy a particular gage record including its set of calibration standards procedures and parts click the Clone Gage button located at the bottom of the Gage Entry window This window will appear ES Clone Gage When you clone a gage fields that are specific to the orginal gage will not e brought over to the cloned gage Some of these fields are Last Calibration Date Next Due Date Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Minimum Frequency and Maximum Frequency Gage S N and ot
229. e archived records click either the View Records or View Cal Meas button To put archived records back into the current record group set up the criteria in this screen and click the Un Archive button 275 276 Archived records are stored within the database After you archive records you can decrease the size of your data file by running Compact Data from the Data Tools menu group Data Tools Audit Log You can click this Audit Log button to view the audit trail if you have enabled an Audit Trail in the Security tab of the Settings screen under Setup lf the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak was installed during setup all audit trail records are retained permanenily With the standard installation of GAGEtrak you have the opportunity to select any type of audit trail tracking If No Audit Trail is selected and the Audit Trail button is selected in Data Tools you will be presented with the following message GAGEtrak 6 5 Mo Audit Trail Enabled IF ou would like to enable an Audit Trail select this option From Settings Security When OK is selected the Advances Audit Trail form will be displayed for your reference but the system will NOT be tracking any records until an audit trail has been selected Data Tools Backup Restore You should periodically back up your GTDATA65 MDB database file we suggest that you do so every day We recommend that you use GAGEtrak s built in Backup Restore function f
230. e data is being transferred to selection functions the same as the Source Destination First verify that the Destination Database drop down box has Version 6 5 Data as a selection After you have selected the Destination Database you will need to specify Destination Connection Information the path of where the Destination Database can be located Click the button that is labeled Browse You will be presented with an Open Database window where you can choose the file path for you Destination Database GAGEtrak 6 5 database GTDATA65 MDB Note The default location for your Destination Database is C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 GTData65 mdb However depending on the options you selected during the setup of GAGEtrak 6 7 this may not be where your database is located 5 Click the Transfer Data button 338 Data Transfer Instructions for Version 3 Archive File Converting your archive file archo731 MDB or ARCH9735 MDB ES Data Transfer Utility Wizard Seles Data Transfer Utility Page 2 of 3 Source Database ka Version 3 Archive 3 Source Connection Inform version Dala 54111998 971 1999 1171 2000 1171572001 4228 2003 7 26 2006 Version 6 5 New 2262006 1 Under Source Database select version 3 Archive 2 Click the Browse button on the right of the Source Connection Information field to navigate to your ARCH9731 MDB Or ARCH9735 MDB file 3 Select the Next button 4 The Destination Databas
231. e or two characters the first option that begins with those characters will appear in the field To save time if this is the selection you want you can instantly go to the next field instead of entering the rest of the characters If there is filter criteria in the Quick Filter and you don t want to enter any filter information select the Clear Filter button and click the Find button GAGEtrak will present all of your gage records At first you ll probably use this method more than the search options 56 Gage Entry Information ES Gage Entry P Information Calibration Schedule Gage ID Status 1 Ref Standard O Gage S N Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Description Storage Location Current Location Service Date Model No Type Retirement Date Supplier Code Bi os t Unit of Meas Purchase Date Drawing No Drawing Date Change Level User Defined Manufacturer Owner Change Date Record 14 4 52 gt I gt of 52 To enter a new gage record click the New Record button it looks like a blank sheet of paper on the floating toolbar or click the New Record button at the bottom of the screen Use your mouse cursor or TAB key to move between the available fields in the gage record window Press the F2 key to edit existing field information Gage Entry Information records contain the following fields Field Button D
232. e part appears in this field 72 Gage Entry Additionals ES Gage Entry gt Information Calibration Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals ssuances Gage 1D METE User 9 User 10 File Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH User 1 Shop Floor User 11 ser 2 9 16 1992 User 12 User 13 User 14 User 15 User 16 User 17 User 18 User 19 User 20 File Description gt C Documents and SettingsAdministratorsM ad Text Document J Record 44 z gt JOU gt of 51 The table below describes the field in this area Field Button Name Gage ID Description User Defined File File Description Delete button View Print Button Description The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field The description of the selected gage will appear in this field These fields can be used to store additional information and can be customized the label names changed and the Data Types altered in Setup Settings Interface Gage Custom Path of file attachment Selection of files is made easier by selecting the drilldown button to the right of the file field that brings up a Locate File To Attach dialog box for file selection Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file Des
233. e selection functions the same as the Source Destination Click the small button on the right of the Destination Connection Information field to navigate to your GAGEtrak 6 5 database GTDATA65 MDB 5 Click the Transfer Data button GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 339 All Versions Verify Data Transfer After you click Transfer Data you will be prompted with the following message Data Transfer Utility Transfer Data Procedure This procedure will erase any data in the destination File You may create a backup copy of your existing data For safety purposes Do wou wish to continue NEEN If you select OK the transfer of data will begin and GAGEtrak automatically moves your data from the old database version of GAGEtrak into the new GAGEtrak 6 5 database The data transfer may take a few minutes depending on the number of records in your existing database If you select Cancel the DTU will terminate Note If the Source and Destination file path are identical you will be presented with the following message and you must redefine you file paths GAGEtrak 6 5 Source database and Destination database are the same You must pick a different database When the transfer is finished you ll see this message Transfer Completed ed _ Data Transfer Complete Click OK will be presented with the Data Transfer Utility Records Count screen where you can check the transfer and verify that it
234. ea you can add to your inside margin width increasing the nonprinting area of your document If you expect to print reports that will be bound in a ring binder you might want to add a gutter of Y to 2 to allow for holes to be punched Click on the up or down arrows to increment this value by 365 twips 74 or enter a value manually as desired If you are printing on the front and the back of a page and your left and right margins are different or if you have added a gutter to your pages you will probably want to check the 310 Mirror Margins checkbox Checking this box automatically sets your margins so that the inside margins of facing pages are the same and the outside margins as well just as if they were reflected in a mirror When you check this box the margin display changes from a single right hand page to two facing pages with mirrored margins i Mirror Margins Preview Printer Settings By default the program follows the default settings of the printer These settings can be found in the Properties setting of the printer in the Windows printer setup For your report setup convenience we have added a facility within the report editor to modify these settings To access Printer Settings select the Printer Settings icon in Report Settings The window shown below will appear Report Settings PaperSize Default Printer X Preview Height Orientation f Printer Default Printer Settings C Portr
235. eader Detail and Page Footer The Header and Footer sections appear on every page of your report while the Detail section contains the body of the report Grouping Your Data Some reports require grouping of data common record information is printed on one row and rows below include other varying details of the records For example in creating a report on the studies done on gages a group header would contain the ID number of the gage and the rows beneath would contain the type of studies done for the particular gage 306 To create a group right click anywhere in the designer canvas and select Insert Group Header Footer from the popup menu Detail J X Delete Section rr Report Header Footer Nen ea etn O AAA A AAA A A A E I a I PageF ooter 1 I You can also use the Insert menu from the main menu bar and select Insert Group Header Footer H Report Editor New Report File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help Ca HE et Page Numbers p El E Date and Time le Sl mi Design SE 22 Insert Report Header Footer 27 Insert Page Header Footer E g Insert Group Header Footer X Delete Section A new section on the canvas will appear a group header and corresponding group footer appropriately labeled A 1 I 13 a PageHeader E Detail GroupFootert PageF ooter mn zn GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 307 The default l
236. eck Manually Enter Y Axis Range before you click a chart button This will allow you to determine the range used for that chart We ll discuss each type of chart next Range Chart by Appraiser Part and by Part Appraiser Using a standard range chart this chart plots the ranges of each appraiser s readings including the average range and control limits You can choose to plot the data grouped by part or grouped by appraiser Example Range Chart Appraiser Part 0 1280 0 0280 e prere NNM OM Et rr ND o OP Ee Ee OQ OO OO DDO OO zho4YaoZBotas too T Ooztao Mora S UCL 0 1254 Ava 0 0383 Range Chart Interpretation The Range chart can help you determine both statistical control in regard to repeatability and homogeneity of the measurement process among appraisers for each part Neither chart should show patterns in the data relative to the appraisers or parts Out of control points on this particular chart usually indicate typos or measurement mistakes The suspect data will be flagged on one of the Appraiser tabs Error Chart The Error chart shows the individual deviations from the accepted reference values GAGEtrak calculates the individual deviation or error for each part according to the following formula Error Observed Value Average Measurement of the Part Before you do any other statistical analysis you should thoroughly screen the deviations for clear causes of variations that you can ascribe to spe
237. ecord Undo the last change made to the current record Remove or delete a record or records GAGEtrak asks for a confirmation to make sure you really want to make the deletion T Cut your selection when editing field entries and store that text on the clipboard Copy your selection when editing field entries and store that text on the clipboard Paste text from the clipboard into the active field Display your records in Form View the default presentation of your records Form View you can see all of the Ate for a record but you can see only one record at a time Display your records in Datasheet View a tabular format Datasheet View allows you to view many records at a time available only in certain record entry screens Place your cursor in the field by which you want to search and then click this button The Find window opens and you can enter the information that you want to E E locate After you ve closed the Find window click the Find Next button to locate the next instance of the information for which you re searching Place your cursor in the field containing the information you want to replace The Replace window will prompt you for Find What and Replace With You can replace any or all occurrences of the same information Yz Use the Quick Filter to quickly find records based on a simple search Use the Advanced Filter to search for a group of records that match specific criteria You can also
238. ecords between databases Although the Merge Utility can bring records from other databases it is a complicated process and can easily be rendered unusable due to differences in record keeping and documentation practices Please consider this if you decide to use multiple databases If you do use multiple database files and later want to merge them please contact Technical Support for assistance there may be a small charge for this service Appendix D System Maintenance and Troubleshooting Date Formats GAGEtrak supports all of the available numeric date formats within Windows For example you can represent the date of November 1 2008 as 11 1 08 11 01 08 11 1 2008 08 11 1 08 1 11 or 2008 11 1 Because GAGEtrak s reports use only numeric dates you can select only numeric date formats Therefore you can t use dates like November 1 2008 or 1 November 2008 As a precaution you may want to verify your date settings in Windows Control Panel Select Start Control Panel then run the Regional and Language Options In the Regional Options tab click on the Customize button The Customize Regional Options window will open up The date formats that you enter into GAGEtrak must match the Windows date setting otherwise errors will occur while you re running the program The sample screen shows the most popular format used in the United States 399 400 Regional and Language Options Regional Options
239. ect Form Dependent on what object was selected will be what is available for selection for example Report Control or selecting Form will require you to select a form from the dropdown list box When the form is Function selected a comprehensive list of all Control Name and Type Group and Permissions are available for viewing 264 Security Status The screen below shows the current security status of GAGEtrak Groups Users Group Permissions Object Permissions Status I System Status Logon System EZ Security Current User ID No User ID Security Enabled No Security Warning Yes Setup Auto Email Header The Auto Email Header function allows plain text emails to be sent automatically from the program based on the Email Event selection The Email Event list is predefined and entries cannot be added to or deleted ES Auto Emailer A Send Issued To Email Text This Service Request has been closed Employee ID Name Email Address v Administrator administrator yourdomainname com Record CuK 44 gt P gt k of 11 The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Email Event Select the event you would like to modify The predefined email events are e Gage Issued Out when a gage is being issued from the Gage Entry Issue Return or either the Issue Gage form Field Button Name Email Selection Email Text Empl
240. ect to the associated procedure and returns you to Procedure Image Procedure Entry Procedure Attachments In the Procedure Attachments screen you can attach additional information related to the specific procedure name for example an amendment to the existing procedure explaining revised processes ES Procedure Entry Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments Gage List Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 File File Description P CAProcedure doc aad Microsoft Word Document E C J Record 14 4 2 gt PIP of 6 This screen contains the following fields Field Button Description Name File The File textbox can accept manual input of a path and file name of files to attach to a procedure or you can select the drilldown button to the right of the File textbox and browse for the path and file name with the help of Locate File To Attach form Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file File Description When a file is added manually to the Procedure the user has the opportunity to include a name in the File Description textbox If the file was automatically inserted with the aid of the Locate File To Attach feature the file format of the selected file attachment will be displayed in the File Description textbox for
241. ed click OK ES Open Database Use ODBC Use DSN Required Fields Use File DSN Database Name GageMgr65 DSN MSSQL_GAGEMGBS User ID GageMgr65 Password Configuration File Settings If you want to reconfigure your G_CONECT INI file follow these guidelines GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 233 Note The brackets x contain instructions about the information you should enter after the equal sign on each line Database dbType o for a Microsoft Access Database 1 for a client server database UseDSN o for No 1 for Yes used only for client server UseFileDSN o0 for No 1 for Yes used only for client server File Name of the database file used for Microsoft Access Database Path Path mapped drive or UNC to the database file used for Microsoft Access Database DSN Data Source Name for the database used for DSN FileDSN Name and path mapped drive or UNC of the DSN file used with FileDSN Driver Driver name only if not using FileDSN or DSN server Name of the server used for Microsoft SQL Sever Database Name of the database used for client server UlD User ID used only for client server PWD Password used only for client server APA Application Attributes used only for client server not required DBA Database Attribute used only for client server not required PFC Prefetch Count used only for client server not required TLL Translation L
242. ed calibration cost To track your costs enter any expenses related to this calibration such as internal labor material costs or outside calibration service costs There are two fields for hours The gray Hours field will display the estimated hours that you entered for this gage in Gage Entry The white Hours field applies to this particular calibration Enter the actual amount of time the calibration required or click the Start button to use the built in calibration timer see below Enter an account number or other tracking number associated with the cost examples include a job purchase order invoice or customer number Record the certificate number issued by the outside calibration provider or your company You can use this field in one of two ways You can type in any alpha numeric information you wish or you may use automatic numbering If you want to use automatic numbering you must first set up your numbering in Setup Settings Automatic Numbering You can specify a numbering format and view the last number used This field is for the Uncertainty sum input by user This multiplier is used to convert Combined Uncertainty to Expanded Uncertainty This is also called effective degrees of freedom If input on the Calibration form this value will appear on the Certificate of Calibration and on the Failure Notice reports Enter the relevant environmental conditions for the calibration Humidity Temperature Pressure
243. ed data from another program or file format If you re upgrading from a 1 x version of GAGEtrak run this utility after the Data Transfer Utility see Appendix A Chapter 7 Customizing Reports This Customizing Reports chapter is an overview of how to work with the Custom Reports module For a comprehensive Report Editor User s Manual visit http www cybermetrics com CustomBReport asp to download a complimentary guide GAGEtrak 6 7 now offers the ability to manipulate your reports You can create new reports or edit existing reports import reports from other compatible databases or export reports You can also delete reports from the Custom Report list that are no longer in use The Report Editor design environment describes how to add and modify controls in your report It includes detailed descriptions of Report Editor user interface elements including menus and toolbar items and preference settings In addition you will learn about some basic operations while using the Report Editor such as selecting and moving formatting and aligning controls in your report Note For complex custom report design users must have knowledge of basic VB Scripting and of Data Dynamic Objects variables and report events in order to successfully program with the Report Editor Using Custom Reports Custom Reports is a new utility in the Setup section of GAGEtrak 6 7 To start click on the Custom Reports button the window below will appear
244. ed on elapsed calendar days Weeks each week equals seven days schedule is based on elapsed calendar weeks Months the schedule is based on months Years each year equals 365 days the schedule is based on elapsed calendar years If the gage R amp R date falls on a skip date this determines whether to move the schedule date forward or backward Default Skip will move the schedule date forward When you first enter the gage record enter the gage s last R amp R study date As you add new R amp R records for the gage as long as you use an R amp R Frequency value other than zero GAGEtrak automatically updates this field This field shows the last gage R amp R study results usually this is the gage error GRR expressed as either a percentage of TV or a percentage of tolerance Later it will be automatically updated as you add new R amp R records for the gage as long as you enter an R amp R Frequency value other than zero This field tracks the next gage R amp R due date GAGEtrak automatically updates it whenever you add a new R amp R record for the gage or you can manually enter a date into this field If the today s date is past the next due date you ll see a Past Due message Tip To calculate this date immediately click the Next R amp R button only if you ve entered an R amp R frequency and a last R amp R date Click this button to calculate the Next R amp R Date and three future R amp R dates You can use this button to
245. ed the same part The three patterns are not close in height which is called Reproducibility AV error The three patterns are not close in shape which is called Appraiser x Part Interaction INT Normalized Individuals Chart by Part Appraiser and by Appraiser Part In this chart the plotted data consists of the individual readings minus the overall average of the readings The normalized data is plotted grouped by appraiser or part number This chart can help you determine reproducibility consistency among appraisers occurrences of abnormal readings and the interaction between the parts and appraisers Example Normalized Individuals Chart 148 Whiskers Chart The Whiskers chart plots and connects the high and low data values and the average by part by appraiser This chart helps you see consistency among appraisers occurrences of abnormal readings and the interaction between the parts and the appraisers Example Whiskers Chart X Y Plot of Averages by Size This chart plots the averages of each appraiser s various readings for each part using the overall part average If the appraisers disagree on certain parts Appraiser x Part interaction this can help to determine whether that depends on part size Example X Y Plot Averages by Size Measured Average Comparison X Y Plots In a Comparison X Y Plot the averages of each appraiser s readings on each part are plotted against each other using appraiser as
246. ed to be more client expressive for example the Measurements tab can be revised to read Capacity in Calibration Entry ES Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface i Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Menu Bar Name Std Archive v Menu Bar Default Name DE Sub Menus Sub Menu Default Name gt Close Menu Bar Custom Name File Sub Menu Custom Name Close Record 14 4 11 hI gt of 1 Filtered The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Menu Bar Name Menu Bar Default Name Menu Bar Custom Name Sub Menu Default Name Sub Menu Custom Name Cancel Close Description Is the name of the menu group for example e Std Default MenuBar the visible menu when any module is selected from the Main Menu e Std Form MenuBar the visible menu when entry forms are activated e Std Form MenuBar Filter add to Bookmarks filter The default name assigned to the field within the selected menu You can customize field values in the Menu Bar Custom Name field by entering a new value text in this field for example changing File with sOptions will display Options on the menu bar instead of File Default option names available under the main menu default name for example File as a main menu option will contain additional options
247. ee EC agree kappa oe EC disagre e Attribute Analytic Gage theory tells us that a gage with no bias should have a fifty fifty probability of accepting a part that was made exactly on a specification limit That is true of both attribute and variable gages It is also true for both types of gages that because of repeatability problems parts just inside the limit will have a probability of acceptance that gradually increases to 100 and parts just outside the limits will have a probability of acceptance that gradually decreases to 0 A chart called a Gage Performance Curve shows how this works for both attribute and variable gages Gage Performance Curve Probability of Accepting S 8 8 8 000000 9 000000 11 000000 19 000000 20 000000 21 000000 f 22 000000 The chart shows how the probability of acceptance gradually changes in an f curve near the Specification Limits The horizontal width of the f curve is about six times the Repeatability and the horizontal distance between a specification limit and the 50 point on the curve is Bias With the data for making this chart GAGEtrak is able to calculate Repeatability and Bias for an attribute gage To plot this chart for attribute gages we need parts that are made near and on both sides of a specification limit The study can be done at either specification limit or at both limits We need variable measurements in addition to attribute data for each
248. egular basis Data Tools Merge Utility The Merge Utility lets you merge elements from different databases for example you can merge a single gage record into another database This can be archived by selecting the Merge Utility from Data Tools GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 283 ES Merge Utility Wizard Merge Utility Page 1 of 2 Source Database Version 6 5 Data v Source C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 516 TData65 mdb Load Destination Database Wersion 6 5 Data v Destination C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGE trak 6 5 GTSamp65 mdb Cancel This screen lets you merge data from another GAGEtrak database into your current database The Source Database is the database where data is being retrieved from and the Destination Database is the database accepting the data If particular records are needed from the source database the Merge Utility lets you select a single Gage ID Part Number or Procedure Name to merge from the dropdown list box If all records from the source database need to merge into the destination database select the checkbox to the right of Gage ID Part No or Procedure Name for entire database merging ES Merge Utility Wizard DO Merge Utility Page 2 of 2 Merge Options on Identical Gages Skip Merge history records Add a prefix Overwrite Add a suffix The Merge Options on Identical G
249. ency has been achieved GAGEtrak will recommend changes to the calibration frequency until the specified reliability is obtained The default Reliability Target is 80 but you can change it Specifying higher reliability will result in more frequent calibration This is the maximum amount of risk GAGEtrak will take in recommending a change i e the risk that a recommended change will turn out not to have been necessary The default is 0 3 Specifying lower significance will increase the number of calibrations required to make a decision Significance must be between 0 never change and 1 always change Checking this will enable Procedure History to be recorded In a Standard installation this will be unchecked by default For a 21 CFR install this will be checked and locked Default print label selection for label issuance GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 249 Field Button Name Description Certificate of This statement is included in the Certificate of Calibration document see the Reports section of the Calibration User s Manual This field scrolls up and down to allow for longer statements Statement Failure Notice This statement is included in the Calibration Failure Notice document This field scrolls up and down Statement to allow for longer statements Cancel Click the Cance button to discard any changes and exit this window Close To save your changes and return to the main menu click the Close butt
250. er the resolution of the gage This controls the minimum resolution of the Histogram chart The value of the reference standard used in the study Used to calculate Bias If selected bias statistics will be calculated from an R chart otherwise the RMS standard deviation will be used If selected control limits will be calculated from historic values of X bar and sigma If available enter a known value for the grand average This might be known from a Linearity or Bias study or from a previous Stability study If available enter a known value for the standard deviation This might be known froma Linearity or Bias study or from a previous Stability study To see the following fields enter data on the Data tab and click on the Calculate button These estimates should not be used unless the control charts have been confirmed to be 182 stable If the charts discussed below do not appear stable the following estimates will be incorrect Field Button Name Description Bias if stable The bias of the gage Standard Error The variability of the bias estimate Lower The lower 95 confidence limit of Bias This will be unacceptable if greater than zero Upper The upper 95 confidence Limit for Bias This will be unacceptable if less than zero df Degrees of freedom for the Standard Deviation and Standard Error Standard Dev Standard Deviation The repeatability of individual measurements Creating an Uncertainty Budget for
251. er you will use is dependent upon the type of data source i e Microsoft Access file This field is required Enter the ODBC server name This field is required This is a string that a server application responds to when a client attempts to establish a conversation with the server This parameter may be required for certain connections Consult your ODBC Administrator for more information This parameter may be required for certain connections Consult your ODBC Administrator for more information If the database engine supports this this property sets the number of result set rows to be prefetched when executing a query the purpose of which is to minimize server round trips and maximize the performance of applications Value controlling translation functionality value of which depends on the database engine being used which is specific to the translation DLL being used The translation DLL contains the required functions that the driver loads and uses to perform tasks such as character set translation This is the name of the translation DLL to be used in the Translation Option property GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 343 When you have located your database click the Test button to ensure connectivity Upon successful connection click the OK button to close the dialog box and the OK button to close the Open Database Window Once located and loaded GAGEtrak will scan the new database and compare it against th
252. erance Minus Tolerance Supplier Code GM Cost Purchase _ Date Calibration_ Hours Est Calibration_Cost CalibSkipDirection Next Due Date Last Calibration_Date Notes Status User Defined RefStandard GM Format Calibrated By GM _ Usage AdjPlanCode AdjCalFreq MaxAdjCalFreq RRFreq RRFreqUnits Data Type Text Text Date Time Text Date Time Text Text Date Time Date Time Text Double Text Double Text Text Text Text Text Double Date Time Double Double Long Integer Date Time Date Time Memo Text Text Long Integer Text Text Double Text Double Double Double Text Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 CO CO A 50 50 50 50 50 50 Field List RRHours RRSkipDirection LastRR NextRR RRResult LabelCode Uncert PriorCalDate Nist_No Customerlnfo CalLabelSize UseLeft UseUsed Calibration_Frequency_DOM UserDef1 UserDef2 UserDef3 UserDef4 UserDef5 UserDef6 UserDef7 UserDef8 UserDef9 UserDef10 UserDef11 UserDef12 UserDef13 UserDef14 UserDef15 UserDef16 UserDef17 UserDef18 UserDef19 UserDef20 Restrictlssue Min_CalFreq Max_CalFreq Data Type Double Long Integer Date Time Date Time Text Text Double Date Time Text Text Text Double Double Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Long Integer Double Double GAGEtrak Calibration
253. ervice Request is set to Closed 246 Field Button Name Automatically Read Temperature and Humidity From Sensor Read Temperature In Main Menu Color Scheme Use Grey Form Background Cancel Close Description The application has the ability to read ambient temperature and humidity from a variety of USB sensors and place that information in a Calibration record Check this box to have the application automatically read these values when a Calibration record is Approved The user can also manually read these values from the sensor by double clicking in the appropriate field in Calibration Entry Use this option to tell the application if the temperature reading for the USB sensor will be read in degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit This setting applies to the automatic and manual temperature readings Use this option to select one of the defined color schemes for the Main Menu You will see the new color scheme when you close the Settings form GAGEtrak uses the Windows Theme settings for forms and buttons This controls the look of the forms as well as the colors used in forms To turn off Windows Theme and use the older grey form check this checkbox This setting will not take effect until you close and reopen the GAGEtrak application Click the Cancel button to discard any changes and exit this window To save your changes and return to the main menu click the Close button Settings Cal Options GAGEtr
254. es Do you wish to continue Mo Click Yes to have GAGEtrak calculate the Next Due Date for every Gage Entry record based on Calibration Frequency and Last Due Date It deletes or overwrites any manually entered dates and dates calculated by issue tracking Data Tools Edit All Tables This utility provides a direct interface for you to make changes to your records instead of going through GAGEtrak s normal data entry screens When you open it the Edit All Tables menu will appear you can choose from the following data tables Calibration Header Issue Tracking Calibration Measurement Part Record Calibration Result Codes Procedures Calibration Standards Search Criteria Field Labels Service Request Gage Master Service Request Letter Gage Procedure Links Skip Dates Gage RR Links Standard Group GRR Results Header Standard Group Header GRR Results Measurements Status Supplier Records Warning When editing data from this utility you are working directly with the tables in your database none of the GAGEtrak features that protect against data entry errors or relational integrity corruption are in place Please be extremely cautious when using this feature GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 289 Data Tools Remove Spaces from Gage IDs Run this utility once after you ve imported data from any other gage management program This utility removes any unne
255. es the probability that a change is not needed called significance If significance is below the significance threshold then GAGEtrak suggests a recommended change When a change is found to be necessary method A3 uses formulas that optimize the calibration frequency in fewer steps than Method A1 When Method A1 is chosen as opposed to Method AS the calibration frequency usually changes every time you calibrate even after the calibration frequency has achieved high end of period reliability Most users will prefer less frequent changes and may not want the short calibration intervals that go with high reliability Method A1 is included for users who are familiar with it and wish to continue using it Method A1 does not make use of the module we are discussing but does use parameters that can be changed in Setup Settings Cal Options A1 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting 106 ES Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface A1 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Frequency Adjustment Factors Certificate of Calibration Statement 43 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting ReliabilityTarget 80 Significance Threshold _ Maintain Calibration Procedure History Print Issue Label When Issuing Gage Ask To Print v Failure Notice Statement lt is hereby certified that the above described instrument conforms t
256. esceiesecssahsuncec staan sten asbest an nhon cess uaseeeceiaenvoceneak wandbeen kats haesen anusncecesnas cesses tapas Seasons 345 KO o es 345 Combination KEV FEIA Sussie 345 table De LONS criss io 345 Appendix C Database Management ssesesesessssesecececscsesecececscsesececececsesececececsesesecececsesesecececsesesecececsesesecsecessesesececeee 397 Create a New GAGEtrak DOtabOSe ccccccsssecccsssscccsnseccsauseccsauseccsusecesausecssauseessaecesausesssauseessauecessusesesauseessaussessuneeess 397 Appendix D System Maintenance and Troubleshooting ccscsscsscsccsccsccsccsccsccnccnccnccsccsccscescescesceccescecceccnscnsones 399 Blondel agg CEE 399 Mamtamimno Your RATA DVE ai o 400 MINING Your Per ORNATO 401 HAS COUGTION FONS aid 401 RED GIANG Data les A A aaa 401 Dublcate VOC EO Mes SA 402 Previewing or Printing Reports Error MCSSQ0C sorsia r nde sdiciaiiee Had Meal aU amine N eens 402 P2TOUCH Printer DOCS NOT Punt LODO Si ios 402 Sl A NO 403 Chapter 1 Running GAGEtrak Once you have installed GAGEtrak it s time to launch it Launching GAGEtrak To launch GAGEtrak double click on the GAGEtrak shortcut icon that was placed on your desktop during installation or click the Windows Start button and navigate to All Programs gt GAGEtrak 6 7 program group gt GAGEtrak 6 7 First time Login GAGEtrak requires users to log in if you have installed the standard application and activated security through Sett
257. escription Name Gage ID In this field enter a un que alphanumeric identification code for each gage In order to save the gage record you must enter an ID For consistency and efficiency you ll need to develop your own gage ID numbering system Tip Avoid using the characters and in your gage IDs or other fields as these are considered wildcard characters in GAGEtrak It is also recommended that you do not use or for gage IDs If you must use these characters such as in Gage 1 then you must place brackets around the wildcard character whenever you want to search or filter your records for example you would enter Gage 1 For more information about wildcards please see the Program Conventions section of the User s Manual Field Button Name Status Ref Standard NIST No Gage S N Asset No Model No Type Unit of Meas Drawing No and Drawing Date Change Level and Change Date Notes Description Storage Location Current Location Service Date Retirement Date Supplier Code Cost Purchase Date User Defined Manufacturer Owner Description Use the list box to pick from your available choices for example 1 act ive This field is required To add more choices to the Status field go to the Setup menu and select Status ID Entry see the System Administrator s Guide for more information Tip If the Status field is notset to Active the Calibration Due and
258. escription of attached file type For example if the attached file is a Microsoft Word document the Description field will contain Microsoft Word Document View Print Button Select this button to open the selected file with that file type application Delete Button Highlight record indicator or click within the File field and select Delete from the floating toolbar Calibrations Standard Group To enter calibration records select Standard Group from the Calibration menu Standard groups are defined using this menu This is the basis of the drop down list for Standard Group in the Gage Entry Standards section ES Standard Group Standard Group Gage List Standard Group Digital Caliper 06 Group Description Digital Caliper O In to 6 In Resolution 001 Tolerance 001 Operating Range 0 to 6 Inches 001 Standard ID Type Ref Type Gage ID of Standard P T Block 0 Inch y Vv GAGE BLOCK S v MSGB1 2 Block 1 Inch GAGE BLOCK S 3 Block 2 Inch GAGE BLOCK S 4 Block 3 Inch GAGE BLOCK S Record 14 1 gt JU gt of 1 128 Field Button Name Standard Group Resolution Operating Range Group Description Tolerance Tolerance Prefill Button Update Button Description Enter the name of the standard group you wish to define Enter the Resolution of the gage This is the smallest or least count unit of motion that the gage is capable of measuring and displaying
259. ese are the choices for the type of program audit log Default Text No Audit Log No Audit Log Basic Audit Log Basic Audit Log Advanced AuditLog Advanced Audit Log Record 14 lt 1 P PI gt of 14 The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Description of Explanation of where choices are used and what they are used for Multiple Choice Default Un editable values for available choices in built in list Text This is an editable field and is where the new text for a predefined list can be entered This module only permits editing of the text fields The user will not be able to add or delete any items from this module Setup Setup CA Service Request The CA Service Request form from the Setup menu automatically generates a letter for preview and printing based on a predetined letter format To set up service request letters or corrective action request notices choose Setup CA Service Request from the Setup menu The Letter Entry screen will appear Here you can enter the Letter Type Date Authored Authored By and the Body of the letter Enter as many letters as you need ES Letter Entry Letter Type Calibration Request Date Authored 2 1 2 2008 Authored by Sample Enclosed is one or more instruments which are in need of calibration Upon receipt of these units please call me at the number below with the estimate for the cost of the cali
260. euten 101 Procedure LISTING sirenenet eeen 213 Removing Spaces MON irriteerde ellende ele hentende emi biteentendeltnladbikd 289 A ee E eee semen a a dlereneece ean ae en so T E 103 Gage Records A asa Aare nan tea eten dennen Acute 77 Pe Ie GING A viene nia atmerte meee aerunaninent yun ureeeet meou eee ent rename eet einen nme name 59 Gage RequitementS uti a 81 Gage Sendi Numb assistia dni 57 111 A ENEN 78 113 GTDATAG5S MDB e e es en oe 240 241 276 278 397 401 A A aoe eaectoneaes 62 113 211 Upata a A e e CE E EAEE 112 MPA MBE EEEN 286 ASSR ODIS A eter Aenean Ghar eae ato eeen ee eee Oee AE Gan ed ee ae tee delen 244 INSDECHOMN EFE QUEEN ia A AA AAA 82 Stalin usina 223 34 MS ALIS aaO 235 38 Problems A bd 401 SUS Dat E oe oe ee ae er ome 75 102 408 Index SSUS TIN Onana ike teh 75 102 ECO A 60 61 75 76 103 Batch MOUE eere 101 SUECA OD os gia a a Repememree et emer A et te ee eee a 76 103 SSUCO TO A AAA A 75 76 102 103 Ce A a 345 AS Qe echt ter ee Th rarer eT ee hence hr ce A i ree ence tenn 91 El EE 212 EE gl Src ti ao e A 100 LAS RECON cios 100 EA JOC A o O E E 100 A oetan 100 E A A on eben A AA 116 ESM CARO CCOO POE O 131 132 165 Link COMPanyvio dolls tata boca 244 Location current Locator da 57 76 77 103 Storage Boere 57 en than dunensacuust hanteren R 244 LOJON PE 239 Selec MENO an 252 Man Menus di 240 Maximizing Your PerormanC Omnia 401 NED ra biga MEE 64 66 115 a eau 64 66
261. ever calibrated it then the interval remains the same multiplied by 1 Simulation studies show that you achieve measurement reliability target of 95 EOP using this approach EOP stands for End Of Period it refers to the reliability of a gage at the end of its calibration interval You can change the table to use different factors if you need to use another frequency adjustment method Example If the frequency is 30 days and the as found condition before calibration is ntolerance then the frequency would be set to 33 days 1 1 x 30 33 days If the as found condition was out of tolerance the frequency would be automatically reduced to 13 5 days 45 x 30 13 5 days Method A3 lets you specify a Reliability Target and requires a certain amount of statistical Confidence before deciding that a change is necessary Method A3 tends to eliminate unnecessary changes When a change is found to be necessary method A3 uses formulas that optimize the Calibration Frequency in fewer steps than Method A1 Method A3 s recommendation is available even for gages that do not have Auto Adjust Calibration Frequency turned on To see these recommendations click on Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval in Main Records This is the desired end of period reliability for example the desired probability that the as found condition of the gage will be in tolerance at the end of the calibration period after the optimum calibration frequ
262. ew gage records would proceed exactly as it does in the current build If the checkbox were unchecked then all automatic numbering of new gages would be disabled This would include gage numbering by the gage type and the basic gage numbering as defined to the left of this form Typical functionality for Calibration Certificate and Service Request Numbering To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu GAGEtrak provides a way to customize the appearance of the user interface of forms labels tabs and much more Listed below are descriptions and options available to users for customization Settings Custom Label This screen lets you modify the text labels of the fields you can use in the GAGEtrak 6 7 program User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Field Name Default Label Text Cycles Remaining Cycles Remaining Usage Remaining Usage Remaining Certificate No Certificate No h mm ss AMPM h mm ss AMPM Label Text Font Weight Cycles Remaining Normal Bold Usage Remaining Normal Bold Certificate No Normal Bold Costs Normal Bold Gage ID Normal Bold h mm ss AMPM Normal Bold Hours Norma O Bold Re
263. f Standard ne 001E GELF Gage Block 0 050 4 0 in 81 grade O k Gage Blocks 81 grade U A O02E OMIC Micrometer 0 1 0001 JE Outside Mic 0 1 0007 O02F OMIC Micrometer 0 1 0001 Outside Mic 0 1 001 You can then work with it as a whole For example click the column header to select a column that you want to move or hide You cannot move the contents of one column to another column Hiding and Displaying Columns You can temporarily hide columns while in Datasheet View This feature helps you remove nonessential data from the screen and reduce a report s width when you re designing a custom report To hide columns select the column selector button you want to hide column header To hide multiple columns drag across multiple column selector buttons When all desired columns for hiding are selected select the Format menu and choose Hide Current Column To Display Hidden Columns go to the Format menu and choose Show Hide All Columns rnae Comae inlets Column C Description O Status Ref Standard C NIST No C Gage S N C Asset No C Model No Type Unit of Meas O Drawing No O Drawing Date ra ma i 1 In the Unhide Columns window check the checkbox of the column name you want to show When you ve selected all the columns you want visible click Close Hiding and Displaying Gridlines By default the program shows gridlines around each cell in Datasheet View Select Gridlines from the Form
264. f needed time cycles human technique and other important factors After calibration make the equipment tamper proof if possible with sealed adjusting screws lead sealed lock wires stamps and other devices Record the results of your calibration checks and any required adjustments or repairs At minimum record the following information Date on which calibration was checked Person that checked calibration Any deficiencies seen in the equipment Accuracy data if able to measure accuracy Causes for out of calibration conditions 222 Appendix B Gage Calibration and Control Repair time and calibration time Review this information periodically to see if you should reduce checks on stable equipment increase checks on unstable equipment or redesign replace the measurement equipment References The following books and publications discuss gage calibration and control JURAN J M Juran s Quality Control Handbook Fourth Ed 1988 JURAN J M Quality Planning and Analysis Second Ed 1980 FARAGO Francis T Handbook of Dimensional Measurement Second Ed 1982 National Conference of Standards Laboratories NCSL Establishment and Adjustment of Calibration Intervals RP 1 Second Ed 1989 U S Dept of Defense MIL STD 45662A Calibration System Requirements 1988 Resources for Books Publications and Reference Materials American Society for Quality Control ASQC Phone numbers 800 248 19
265. f traceability is important because without it uncertainty would inevitably grow to the point where customers and suppliers could not trust each other s measurements To quote from 15017025 Reasonable estimation of uncertainty shall be based on knowledge of the performance of the method and on the scope and shall make use of for example previous experience and validation data Sources contributing to the uncertainty include but are not necessarily limited to the reference standards and reference materials used methods and equipment used environmental conditions properties and condition of the item being tested or calibrated and the operator The uncertainty contributors to be included are selected on the basis of judgment and knowledge of the measurement method Items selected are designated as Type A which means derived from an MSA study or Type B which means some other source such as a certificate or an experience based educated guess Keep in mind that uncertainty is not an estimate of gage error it is the potential variability in gage error i e the extent to which gage error is unknown Here are some examples of potential uncertainty contributors and where they come from This is not an exhaustive list Uncertainty of Calibration Type A Uncertainty Contributors Where Available Linearity This Module Uncertainty Contributors Where Available Bias This Module or the Stability Module Resol
266. f you know the table name you can type it directly into the provided field a SOL Builder Select report fields Which fields do you want in your query You can choose from any of the tables below Tables BE eel lat Mete Report Tables CalFormula_Links CalFormula_Values CalFregT rack Calib_Attachments Calib_Defined CalibFPormulaz Calibration_Header Calibration Header Sig Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Selecting a Table and Choosing Fields When a table has been selected in this case the Calibration Header table the list of available fields for the table will appear on the Available Fields list box You can now select the fields you want to appear in your report by clicking on their names in the list You can GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 297 select more than one field at a time if you select a field by mistake you can unselect it by clicking on the field name again a SOL Builder Select report fields Which fields do you want in your query You can choose from any of the tables below Tables Calibration _Header na Available Fields Selected Fields Calibration_Time Calibration_T ype Calibration _By Department Results cl Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt gt Calibration Date gt gt gt lt lt lt Now click on the selection buttons between the listing fields to move the fields you have highlighted to the SELECTED FIELDs list b
267. for destructive or non replicable measurements See Chapter 4 of Measurement Systems Analysis Third Edition MSA3 for more information and other applications For subgroups sizes larger than 1 the other charts are usually preferred but if their limits seem too tight or too loose then use X amp MR 186 Note Despite the name Individual Chart when the subgroup size is greater than 1 averages are plotted Histogram This chart is used to show the central tendency spread and shape of the distribution Example Histogram Frequency Calculated Control Chart Fields These are calculated from the data unless you specified to use historic values for X bar and Sigma Field Name Description UCL Upper Control Limit for mean or range etc AVG Average mean or average range etc LCL Lower Control Limit for mean or range etc Control Chart Formulas m subgroup size number of observations in sub group g number of subgroups X individual sample measurement Xo reference value R Range X subgroup average S subgroup standard deviation o repeatability standard deviation SE standard error of bias A2 A3 B3 Ba Ca do D3 Da control chart constants based on value of m as shown in the table below m A 2 1 87997 3 1 02333 4 0 72865 5 0 57682 6 0 48325 7 0 41928 8 0 37253 9 0 33670 10 0 30826 X amp R Charts X 2X m R Max X Min X R 2R 8 UCLa Rx D LCla RxD X X 2
268. for reference values a process capability or performance target may be entered typically 1 33 or 1 67 GAGEtrak will use it to reduce Tolerance to be an estimate of Process Variation If variable data will be used for reference values and you know the 6 Sigma Process Variation of the characteristic that you re measuring enter it here It will be divided by 6 and used for Total Variation TV If the variable gage has a known GRR for this part characteristic enter it here Note The program needs standard deviation multiplied by 6 Do not use percent Select the format you want for calculations Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis po e Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date Gage ID Appraisers A Randy 1 1 1 1 NE 1 1 3 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 1 1 0 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Prefil 4 25 2012 Co Part No IMSA MSA4 127 o Part No 10 221 1 B Alan C Danny Decision Reference Value Code Appraiser Signal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 476901 in in 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 509015 in in 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 576459 out out 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 566152 out out F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 57032 out out J 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 544951 near limit Mixed Record 14 4 2 PL of 2 The Input tab contains these fields and buttons Field Button Name Appraiser A B and C Appraiser 1 50 Decision 1 50 Reference Value 1 50 Code 1 50 Appraiser Signal
269. for your study A process capability or performance target may be entered typically 1 33 or 1 67 GAGEtrak will use it to reduce Tolerance to be an estimate of Process Variation If you know the 6 Sigma Process Variation of the characteristic that you re measuring enter it here It will be divided by 6 and used for Total Variation TV Select the format you want for calculations Select the format you want for calculations Lower Specification Tab Gage RR Attribute Analytic Method Information Lower Specification Upper Specification Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No MSA Gage ID MSA3 139 oa Part No 10 221 1 e Gage Desc Part Desc Bracket Rt Hand LSL BIAS 2 43875572 LSL GRA 1 46836548 t Stat 10 09416 X TV t Critical 2 09302 Tol 44 051 Reference Values LSL 10 Entry required If multiple entries enter three largest 0 18 16 Need six total For row with excess enter randomly 11 1 AS 2 14 4 4 15 5 13 6 11 6 7 gt 10 5 12 J 9 Entry required If multiple entries enter three smallest 10 20 10 3 Pref Chats Print Record 14 1 ICE of 1 Field Button Description Name LSL BIAS Bias for the Lower Specification Limit LSL Bias will appear after you enter LSL data and click on Calc t Stat The Bias number is converted to a t Statistic The absolute value should be smaller than t Critical t Critical A 95 confidence limit for t Stat LSL GRR Gage Repeatability and Reprod
270. formation Tab Gage R amp R Lolo F Information IPR Appraiser B Appraiser C Study Date 1 24 2008 Co Part No 100021457221 1 Gage ID 022E DCAL Kd Part No 10 221 1 o Gage Desc Caliper 0 12 inch Part Desc Bracket Rt Hand Appraisers 3 Trials 3 Parts Characteristic Pivot Depth Study Type Long AlAG Specification Limits Min 11 28 Max 1 32 MSA Version Be Y Approved Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Comments Number Format 000000 Percentage Format 0 Std Dev Contribution of T of Tol Repeatability EV 0 006105 0 264708996755 51 4 91 6 R bar 0 010333 Reproducibility AV 0 009876 0 6927665319772 83 2 1 48 1 UCL R 0 026660 Appraiser x Part INT Study Variation 0 011866 GRR 0 011611 0 9574755287322 97 9 174 2 Total Variation TV 0 011866 Part to Part Pv 0 002447 0 0425244712678 20 6 36 7 Tolerance 6 Tol number of distinct categories 0 297149 Prefill Calc Charts Print Record ZIKE 3 gt P of 3 When you are ready to start entering your R amp R measurements click the tab for Appraiser A and enter the appraisers name in the Appraiser A area Next click your cursor in the first column for Part 1 After you enter the measurement click the TAB or ENTER key and your cursor will be blinking in the area for the first measurement for Part 2 Subsequent clicking of the TAB or ENTER key after entering the measurements will advance you to all
271. g into the same directory as your GAGEtrak program file Data Tools Modify License Modify License is only required when GAGEtrak s license registration period is about to lapse When you first run GAGEtrak you will be presented with the following message Application License Registration T This program needs to hawe its license registered Please contact the distributor to obtain a trigger code to register the license GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 287 Seven days before the license registration period expires GAGEtrak will begin a countdown to the end of the registration period For your convenience this period will not expire on a Saturday or a Sunday If you have entered your serial number and you have an active Internet connection select the Get Trigger Online button on the Modify License form Depending on your operating system s configuration the application will either a Automatically obtain the Trigger Code register the application license and close the Modify License form In this situation no further action is required b Open the Trigger Code website fill in the required information and obtain a Trigger Code In this situation enter the Trigger Code from the website into the Trigger Code text box in Modify License and click OK At this point you will get a message saying the application license has been registered This can be confirmed by opening the About Box and lo
272. gage type will have the selected procedure attached to it For safety measures GAGEtrak will question whether you wish to continue with the new procedure attachment Chapter 4 Part Records Part Entry Use Part Entry to track parts and set up lists of gage requirements lists of gages that you need to use to inspect parts as you produce them From the Main Records menu select Part Entry ES Part Entry Ea Part No 10 221 4 Drawing No 100 223 Description Bracket Front Drawing Date Operation Stamping Change Level Part User 1 Change Date Part User 2 Inspection Procedure Visual Checks Burrs Scratches Corrosion Missing Holes Gage Requirements Description Method Dimension Comments Caliper 0 6 inch CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Digital Indicator G 9128M81 80 Record 14 1 PP of 3 Field Button Description Name Part No In this field enter the number of the part use either the customer s or your internal part number Description Enter the name of the part or a description that includes the name Operation Use this field to track the production operation or work center description that uses or installs the part such as Stamping or Machine 13 Part User1 Use these fields to track additional information on the part and 2 Drawing No Use these fields to record the blueprint drawing number and drawing date
273. ge ID of Standard MSGB1 Units Inch Standard Format 000 End Value 6 Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Number of In this field enter the number of standards Standards Start Value Enter the smallest nominal value for the similar standards Increment Value Standard Names You can enter the difference between the sizes of the nominal values of the standards such as 5 or 005 in this field Enter the part of the names that s the same for all of them For example let s say that you ve entered 6 as your Number of Standards and 1 as the Start Value Also you ve chosen an Increment Value of 1 with Inch as your Unit of Measure If you enter Gage Block in this field the resulting names for your standards will be 1 Gage Block 1 Inch and 2 Gage Block 2 Inch Tip If your number of standards is between one and nine your standard ID names will be numbered like this 1 Name 2 Name If you have from ten to 99 standards their names will look like this 01 Name 02 Name Type Select the type of standard variable Or Attribute Select variable for those standards that have a value that you actually measure such as 0 502 inches Select Attribute for pass fail or visual types of checks Ref Type Select the type of Reference Standard that will be used for this standard This list box will show the Gage Type of every reference standard in the database Gage
274. ger 4 Description Text 50 Gage_SN Text 50 Est Calibration _Cost Double 8 Calibration _Hours Double 8 Effective DF Double 8 Coverage_FactorK Double 8 Bill_To Text 50 InCal_Freq Double 8 InCal_Freq_UOM Text 50 Table Name CheckBox Description Program table used for multiple choice list boxes Associated From Multiple Field List Data Type Length FS Type Text key 50 FS_ Order Long Integer key 4 FS Value Text 50 Text Text 50 Description Text 100 Table Name CMArchive 356 Description Archived calibration measurements records Associated From CMArchiveViewfrm Field List Data Type Length Gage_ID Text key 50 Calibration_Date Date Time key 8 Calibration_Time Date Time key 8 Gage_Standard_ID Text key 50 CM_Before Double 8 CM_After Double 8 Minimum Double 8 Nominal Double 8 Maximum Double 8 Uncert Double 8 CM_Calibration_ID Text 50 LimitUse Long Integer 4 Units Text 50 CM_Type Text 50 GM_Type Text 50 Comments Memo 0 GT_Format Text 50 StdDueDate Date Time 8 StdLastDate Date Time 8 Table Name Customer_Adjustment_Factors Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Length Adjust_ID Long Integer key 4 Cust_ID Text 50 Description Text 50 Adj_Factors Double 8 Table Name Degrees Of Freedom Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Length Degrees of Freedom Text key 50 df Factor Double 8 GAGEtrak Calibration M
275. ghly proportional to the reciprocal of GRR Technically there is no reason to use both measures at the same time Whichever format you prefer will provide equally complete information The table below shows selected values of number of distinct categories and the corresponding values for GRR Comparing number of distinct categories to GRR number of distinct categories 4 5 5 10 14 20 28 35 Reject Limit for number of distinct categories The usual reject limit for number of distinct categories is 5 which corresponds to 27 GRR If you think it is important to have a reject limit that is closer to the AIAG specification limit of 30 GRR then use number of distinct categories 4 5 as a minimum Conversion Formula for number of distinct categories The relationship is number of distinct categories 1 41 1 00 GRR 1995 For GRR 30 then number of distinct categories 1 41 100 30 1 9 4 48 Note This conversion formula is not used in GAGEtrak but is presented here for information If you want to verify the formula just compare it to results in GAGEtrak Myths about number of distinct categories 1 Myth By using the specified number of categories you can eliminate errors in sorting situations such as making a histogram Fact There is always significant probability of a one category sorting error because measurements and actual values can fall on opposite sides of a boundary However being off by two categories is hig
276. gnificant linearity error that cannot be eliminated you may be able to use the gage by using the regression equation to correct future measurements In the automotive industry this requires customer permission Bias Tab This tab analyzes the bias for Linearity amp Bias as well as Bias Only Studies Enter Study Type and Part Reference values on the Linearity tab and then enter data in the Trials tab before coming to the Bias tab Note Bias studies using the control chart method are part of the Stability Module and are not included in this module ES Linearity Bias and Uncertainty Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty Lees Study Date 4 25 2012 Gage ID COMPARATOR o Gage Desc 14 Kodak Optical Comparator 1 2 3 1 0 700000 1 100000 0 200000 2 0 500000 0 100000 0 300000 3 0 400000 0 200000 0 100000 4 0 500000 1 000000 0 100000 5 0 700000 0 200000 0 000000 6 0 300000 0 100000 0 100000 7 0 500000 0 100000 0 000000 8 0 500000 0 100000 0 100000 3 0 400000 0 100000 0 400000 10 0 400000 0 000000 0 300000 11 0 600000 0 100000 0 000000 12 0 400000 0 200000 0 100000 Lower 95 Confidence Bounds Upper Avg Bias 0 053333 0 168121 0 061454 Std Error 0 057365 Acceptable Prefill Calc Charts Print Co Part No Part No Part Desc 0 400000 0 300000 0 200000 0 300000 0 200000 0 200000 0 200000 0 300000 0 200000 0 500000 0 400000 0 300000 10 221 3
277. h as damages or malfunctions GAGEtrak uses the following rule to manage the return of Kits 1 When a gage is returned GAGEtrak shows it as an open issue record allowing for the received date and time to be entered After you enter the Received Date and Time and save the record GAGEtrak changes the kit s Current Location field to its Storage Location 2 You will need to enter the number of cycles that the gage s on this kit used if returning a kit that contains gage records that have a calibration frequency of Cycles Use the number of cycles entered by the user to enter into the Issue Return record for every Cycles gage that was returned in the kit Usage Used Usage Left and Estimated or Actual Due Date for each gage will be calculated and reflected under Calibration Schedule in Gage Entry Kit Entry History Select the History tab to view all gages that were previously issued returned by a particular kit To view previous kit issue returns first find the appropriate kit PA Information Required Gage Types Required Gages History Kit ID Kit 001 Kit Description Test Kit Kit Issue and Return Events ssue Date Time To B 2 5 2004 9 32 26 AM Randy E 2 5 2004 9 27 41 AM Randy A 1428 2004 2 13 25 PM RV 1428 2004 3 09 20 PM Gages Issued Returned For Each Kit Event Description cTgoo2 GONOGO ISUNDSTRAND THREAD GAGE Record 14 ak TC of 8 Record 14 4 a TA
278. h coefficient is converted to a t Statistic so it can be compared to t Critical A 95 two sided confidence limit for the t distribution When the absolute value of either t Statistic is larger than t Critical the corresponding error is not acceptable 164 Field Name Description Upper Fitted May not be less than zero Confidence Limit at worst point Lower Fitted May not be greater than zero Confidence Limit at worst point Printing the Linearity Study E Print Gage R amp R Study as Select Print Option Print Data Sheet View This Study Data Sheet Close To print the study report click the This Study button that s in the Print section To preview the study report on screen click the This Study button that s in the View section Use the Data Sheet buttons to print or preview a blank data collection sheet you can use to record measurements during the study Viewing Printing and Sending Charts Click on the Chart button and choose Linearity Chart or Histogram Each chart has a button for Print and a button for Send as an email attachment We ll discuss each type of chart next Linearity Chart To generate a Linearity chart click on the Chart button You ll see a plot of individual and average Bias versus Reference Value as well as a best fit linear regression line and bow tie shaped confidence limits To be acceptable the zero Bias line must fit within the confidence limits
279. he program can t find your database file then the Open Database window will appear If this happens you ll need to tell GAGEtrak where to find the database file GTDATA65 MDB The Open Database window looks like the one shown here E Open Database Database C Program Filestyhermetricz Corp GAGEtrak 6 516 TDatabi5 1 Use ODBC Use DSN Use File DSN C Browse Required Fields Database Hame Gagehdar65 DEN MSSGL GAGEMGES File DSN User ID GageMgr65 Password Driver Server Service Name Database Attribute Application Attributes Prefetch Count Transaction Option Translation Library Name Browse Cancel GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 241 If this window appears click the Browse button and navigate through the available drives and directories until you find the database file Remember that the file name must be GTDATA65 MDB Where Is The Data File Look in 9 GAGEtrak 6 5 A BACKUP EG Scripts My Recent Dtu 5 mdb Documents g GTSamp65 mdb Gtw66 mdb 21 Newrpts mdb File name GTData65 mdb Y My Network Files of type Databases Cancel Places Open as read only Note Users who have their database file located on the network server must log in to the network operating system before they can open the database file If you re using GAGEtrak on a client server system you must set up the Open Database screen according to your database conf
280. he study report click the This Study button that s in the Print section To preview the study report on screen click the This Study button that s in the View section Use the Data Sheet buttons to print or preview a blank data collection sheet you can use to record measurements during the study lf you want the two page report the second page is an analysis report that includes more detail place a check in the Include Analysis Sheet checkbox 144 Generating Charts The GRR Module offers an extensive variety of charts to help you determine the causes of measurement error To generate a chart from your Average and Range study click the Charts button and the Gage R amp R Charts menu will appear Gage R amp R Charts ellen Range Chart by Appraiser Part a Whiskers Charts by Appraiser Fart Range Chart by Part Appraiser Le XY Plot of Averages by Size Error Chart Comparison Plots by Appraiser Run Chart by Part L Scatter Plot Average Chart By Part C Repeatability Range Control Normalized Individuals Chart by Part Appraiser Part Appraise Average Control Chart om Normalized Individuals Chart by AppraiserPart pa Residual Plot by Size Normalized Error Histogram Chart E Manually Enter Y Axis Range Caos Printing or Sending Charts Each chart has a button for Print and a button for Send as an e mail attachment If you find that the calculate Y Axis for the chart is not ideal for graphing your data ch
281. heet buttons to print or preview a blank data collection sheet you can use to record measurements during the study Viewing Stability Control Charts To view a Stability Control chart click the Chart button and then choose which chart you want Each choice shows a pair Control Charts except for the Histogram The top chart detects changes in bias and the bottom chart detects changes in repeatability For interpretation the program draws control limits and average lines on each chart Printing or Sending Charts Each chart has a button for Print and a button for Send as an email attachment We ll discuss each type of chart next X bar amp R charts Average and Range Charts These charts will be familiar to many users because they are used extensively in manufacturing They work best for small subgroup sizes and are not recommended for Subgroup sizes of 9 or 10 They do not work for a subgroup size of 1 Example Stability Control Chart Averages Ref 6 010000 UCL 6 296320 Avg 6 020600 LCL 5 744880 X bar amp s Charts Average and Standard Deviation Charts These charts work well for subgroup sizes of 2 and up They do not work for a subgroup size of 1 X 8 MR Charts Individual and Moving Range Charts These charts work for a subgroup size of 1 and up Control Limits are based on variation between subgroups rather than variation within subgroups The ability to use a subgroup size of one allows use
282. her fields Source Gage ID C 002 Gage Numbering Scheme New Gage ID 00000001 22 Clone Close Enter a new gage ID directly into the New Gage ID field or select a gage numbering scheme from the list box If you select a gage numbering scheme GAGEtrak will automatically input the next subsequent Gage ID for the New Gage ID based on the numbering scheme developed in the Setup Settings Automatic Numbering section then click Clone Click the Close button in the window s title bar when you re finished To clone more gage records based on the selected scheme continue clicking the Clone button Click the close button in the window s title bar when you re finished 78 If you filtered for just one gage when you re done cloning GAGEtrak will show you the original gage record from which you created the clones If you want to edit your cloned records youll have to re filter and find them to re filter click the toolbar button that looks like a funnel with a pencil A better way to clone gages is to re filter and find all of your gages before you clone any of them to re filter click the toolbar button that looks like a funnel with a lightning bolt You can then use the Find binoculars button on the toolbar to find the gage s that you want to clone If you use this method when you re done cloning GAGEtrak will show you the last cloned record that you created and you can enter each clone s unique information Gage
283. hly unlikely with number of distinct categories That is as good as it gets but error free is an exaggeration 2 Myth Number of distinct categories is at 97 confidence Fact Number of distinct categories is not related to any particular confidence level except when it is calculated based on tolerance When based on tolerance 6 compared to GRR the confidence level is 99 73 To see where ideas about 97 confidence and truncation started look at the second part of the next paragraph Want to Sort with number of distinct categories To actually use the specified number of categories for sorting into a histogram you would need to choose a width for the categories Since we now can calculate number of distinct categories from tolerance you would likely prefer to round that value to an integer and divide it into tolerance The resulting category width would cover the entire tolerance The authors that introduced number of distinct categories chose a typically narrower category width by truncating number of distinct categories to an integer and dividing it into the equivalent of a 97 confidence interval for part variation 4 34 PV Either category width would be suitable for practical use Printing the Study To print the study click the Print button and a Print menu will appear as shown here 3 Print Gage R amp R Study elles Select Print Option Print Data Sheet iew This Study Data Sheet To print t
284. ibrary Name used only for client server not required TLO Translation Option used only for client server not required Install InstallCode Installation Code found on software package and CD envelope Sample Configuration The following sample is for a single user Access database version of GAGEtrak 6 7 Database dbType 0 UseDSN UseFileDSN File GTDATA65 MDB Path C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 DSN FileDSN 234 Driver Server Database UID PWD APA DBA DBQ PFC TLL TLO Install InstallCode Chapter 2 MS SQL Installation If you re going to use GAGEtrak on an MS SQL client server system first install GAGEtrak see chapter 1 for instructions then create the data source name DSN for your setup following the instructions in this chapter Create Data Source Name DSN for MS SQL If you re using GAGEtrak with an MS SQL server follow these steps to create your DSN 1 Click Start then select Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Double click the Data Sources ODBC icon and the ODBC Data Source Administrator window will appear 2 Goto the System DSN tab 1 ODBC Data Source Administrator User DSN System DSN File DSH Drivers Tracing Connection Fooling About System Data Sources Mame Driver GTPALMES Microsoft Access Driver mdb Add Fase EN An DOBLE System data source stores information about how to co
285. ic gage ID only Enter a description for the gage The current location of the set of gages to be selected The storage location of the set of gages to be selected The type of the set of gages to be selected To see how your label will appear before you print it click on this button Prints labels Clears all filter entries Aborts label printing and goes back to the Custom Label Menu Use this button to open the Advanced Filter window You can then filter for a group of records that match the criteria you enter You can also open previously saved criteria for use and create and save new criteria Add filter file to printing queue You can view and print the file from the Report Queue Copy filter information from a saved file in the Report Queue Viewing and Printing Labels When you have finished entering your filter parameters click on the View button to see a preview of your label Make sure that the height of the tape cartridge in your label printer matches the height of the label you have selected under Calibration History Reports then click on the Print button to print your labels Appendix B Gage Calibration and Control This section discusses the basics of gage calibration and control it s intended for users with limited experience but it also serves as a review for more experienced users A list of references is at the end of this section Purpose of Calibration Gages test equipment and measurement standa
286. ific date and view the calibration schedule for the day Click on any date to get an itemized Calibration and R amp R List ES Calendar March v lt March 2009 09 y Time Until Automatic Refresh 10 Min Monday Tuesday Thursday Wednesday 1 Calib Job 1 Calib Hour 23 Calib Cost ES Calibration and R amp R List Jobs for 3 2 2009 Calibrations Gage ID Asset No 062001 1275 CURRENT 130 Calibration Formula Entry GAGEtrak has included a formula calculator with two 2 predefined formulas for your use Additional formulas can be added and tested using the calculator but Formula Entry only works with Calibration Entry ES Formula Entry Formula Mame Fahrenheit Variables Celsius A juilt in Functions QR v Operator Formula 1 8 Celsius 32 Close The predefined formulas are Formula Name Formula Fahrenheit 1 8 Celsius 32 Celsius Fahrenheit 32 1 8 The Formula Entry form will allow the user to add and edit formulas Each formula consists of simple mathematical expressions using the given variables enclosed in square brackets arithmetic operators etc This functionality will parse the entered formula to produce the result The user will be prompted to enter a numeric value for each variable when the Test formula button is clicked the formula computation is done when the Test button is clicked
287. iguration Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Before you begin entering records we recommend that you configure your GAGEtrak program To do so go to the Setup menu and select Settings E Main Menu Main Records MSA Setup Data Tools and Utilities Report Queue Gage Reports Open Calibration Reports Calibration History Reports Your Company Name Division Name Setup Settings BERE y Setup Click to Open Request Custom Reports Gage Events Gage Reports 1 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label Calibration Standard Report Gage Detail Report Gage Event Listing Gage Issue History Gage Label 1 2W x 1L Gage Label 1 2W x 2L Gage Label 1 2W x 3L Gage Label 1 4W x 1L Gage Label 1 4W x 2L Gage Label 1 4W x 3L Settings User Information Auto Email Header Multiple Choice Entry Status ID Entry In the first Settings screen User Info enter your company information E Settings AS User Info General Cal Options Calendar Securit Automatic Numbering Interface Company Information Name Your Company Name Division Name Address 11234 E Main Street Suite 12345 City State Zip Any Town Contact Admin Phone 555 555 5555 Fax 555 555 5555 L ogo Cyber Metric lt Paste Logo lt Insert Object The table below describes the fields on this form 243 2
288. in this field Calibrator This field is a list box field from which you can enter or select the code for the supplier that normally calibrates the gage the calibration service supplier You can also set this field to In House ora department or technician s name if calibrated within your own facility simply type the information into this field Later you can use this information to select a group of gages due for calibration by that calibrator Note If you have the GAGEtrak PDA you must enter a calibrator since the PDA downloads calibrations by this field For further information see the GAGEtrak PDA Software User s Manual Last Calibrated The name of the user who last calibrated the gage appears in this field By 60 Field Button Name Calib Freq and Calib Freq Units Description Enter how often the gage should be calibrated such as 45 DAYS When GAGEtrak calculates the next calibration due date it uses this value The field located just to the right of the Calibration Frequency field is the Frequency Units field it s not labeled Use the list box button to choose the calibration schedule type You can choose from these types Days the most common units schedule is based on elapsed calendar days Weeks each week equals seven days schedule is based on elapsed calendar weeks Months this option bases the schedule on months DOM Day Of Month allows you to set what day of the month the calibration
289. ing GRR If you tend to think of gage improvement in terms of reduced measurement variation reduced uncertainty then you may prefer GRR over number of distinct categories because with GRR reduced numbers are better Most manufacturing companies follow the Automotive Industry Action Group AIAG rules If GRR as a percentage of Total Variation or of Tolerance whichever is more appropriate iS Under 10 the system is acceptable Between 10 and 30 you might need to further analyze the system to find the cause of the error Over 30 the system is not acceptable You should perform further analysis on the system to find the cause of the error If you use Long AIAG you will be able to view EV AV and PV for clues as to what should be done If you use ANOVA You will be able to view EV AV INT and PV for even more clues as to what should be done It is important to also view the charts Interpreting number of distinct categories If you tend to think of gage improvement in terms of increased precision increased gage capability then you may prefer number of distinct categories over GRR because with number of distinct categories increased numbers are better Number of distinct categories 142 as the name suggests can be visualized as categories or cells of an imaginary histogram chart For every value of GRR there is a corresponding value of number of distinct categories in a format that is rou
290. ings gt Security or if you have chosen to install the 21 CFR Compliant application in which case security is automatically activated The Logon window shown below will appear r x User ID Password E Change Password Lancel Note The 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant version of GAGEtrak automatically activates security Therefore when GAGEtrak is launched for the first time you must log in Since your users and groups have not been set up User ID Default is provided so you can log in Once you have logged in set up your users and groups first and then delete the User ID Default Also the User ID is case insensitive whereas the password Is case sensitive 16 Enter Default in the User ID field and put your cursor in the Password field you will see this message arar xm Click OK The login window now appears like this o E User ID Kk Enter a password in the New Password field enter the same password in the Confirm Password field and click OK GAGEtrak will require you to enter this password the next time you log in Changing Your Password When you want to change your password enter your user name into the Logon window and then click the Change Password checkbox F m UserlD Default Password Hew Password Contin Password GAGEtrak will require you to enter your old password and then enter and confirm your new password Click OK You will receive a message that your password has
291. inite by default Click on the Calc button and GAGEtrak automatically calculates these fields Field Button Name Description t for 95 Confidence This is a multiplier that could be used to convert Combined Uncertainty to a 95 confidence limit It is based on the DF for Combined Uncertainty It is here for comparison to Coverage Factor k Coverage Factor K This multiplier is used to convert Combined Uncertainty to Expanded Uncertainty Most but not all calibration certificates use a Coverage Factor of k 2 for approximately 95 confidence You can change Coverage Factor k if you wish Values of 1 or 3 are sometimes used or a value equal to t for 95 Confidence Coverage Factor k should be stated on calibration certificates Combined Uncertainty This is the total of the Uncertainty Contributors added by the RSS root sum square method i e They are squared summed and the square root is taken DF for Combined This is also called effective degrees of freedom It is used to calculate t for 95 Confidence It Uncertainty is a good idea to include this DF on calibration certificates Expanded Uncertainty This is the value to be included on applicable calibration certificates Coverage Factor k should also be included DF of Combined Uncertainty is good to include also Background on Probability Distributions Normal Distribution The bell shaped probability distribution occurs so frequently that it is named Normal
292. ion Click Yes and then close the Find and Replace form Open the Type drop down list to verify the deletion of Dial s Form View of Records After you click Find in a filter window GAGEtrak looks through your database and opens the first record in the set displaying it in Form View Form View of records show you only one record at a time while Datasheet table View displays many records at a time each row represents a record and many rows records are displayed at once Form View is the default presentation of your data use the toolbar or the View menu to switch between Form and Datasheet Views Sample Form View of a Gage Record Gage ID OO1E GBLK Description Gage Block 0 050 4 0 in 81 grade 0 Status no el Active Storage Location Crib 2 Calibration Ref Standard NIST No gt Current Location Gage Crib 2 3 Gage S N 9087 3456 90807 Service Date 10 12 2007 Asset No BEB Retirement Date Model No Suppl Code Type Gage Blocks 81 grade O Cost 45 00 Unit of Meas Inch Lel Purchase Date m Drawing No User Defined Drawing Date Manufacturer Change Level Owner Company Change Date SS Record IA 4 1 PH of 78 Gage ID NUM SCRL Elements of a Record in Form View All record forms have the following elements Form Title Bar Located at the top of each f
293. ion Group name listing for reports Associated From N A Field List Data Type GrouplD Long Integer key GroupName Text Table Name tblReports Description Internal use Associated From None Field List Data Type ReportName Text key Structure Memo BaseSQL Memo TimeCreated Date Time LabelMode Long Integer PrinterDevice Text PresetConnection Text HardCoded Long Integer TimeBase Long Integer TimeField Text GroupID Long Integer OriginalStructure Memo RptVersion Long Integer UpdateRpt Long Integer Author Text Company Text Keywords Text Creation Date Date Time ReportName Text key Length 255 255 Length 255 Length 100 255 100 50 50 50 100 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 391 Table Name Training Description Staff Training information Associated From Training History Field List Data Type Length ItemNumber Long Integer key 4 Employee_ID Text 50 StartDate Date Time 8 EndDate Date Time 8 Description Text 50 FS_Hours Double 8 CEUs Double 8 School Text 250 Cost Double 8 Status Text 50 Certification Text 50 CertExpDate Date Time 8 Comments Memo 0 User1 Text 50 User2 Text 50 Table Name UncertaintySetup Description Stores data for uncertainty calculations Associated From Uncertainty Studies Field List Data Type Length GRR_Results_ID Long Integer key 4 Setup_LinBiasPlusMinus Single 4 Setup_OnlyBiasPlusMinus Single 4 Setup_Unco
294. ion Record 14 1 ICC of 78 Go to the first record 4 O Goto the previous record 2 Go to particular record type in the number of the record For example if you have 250 records and you want to go to the sixteenth record enter 16 in the Record box and then press ENTER to go to that record Goto the next record w Go to the last record Scroll Bars You might see scroll bars on the right the bottom or both sides of a form Use them to go to portions of the form that you can t see Sas tandard Next Due D a 7 EA al JENI 7 219 al 219 7 219 al 219 7 249 al 11412 7 11417 7 249 7 249 al 249 al 11417 7 11417 1 rr j Tab Selectors Each tab selector contains an entry screen that stores a specific category of information In each tab you can edit or view information for the current record The tabs shown here are available in Gage Entry 24 ES Gage Entry d Information Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additional lssuances Minimize Maximize Restore Close Buttons Use these buttons located in the upper right corner of the form to maximize the form s size to the largest size allowed or to minimize the form to an icon If you maximize the form then the Maximize button changes to the Restore button Click this button to return the window to its original size boe Minimize Maximize Close Restore Maximize Close Drop down Lists Drop dow
295. ion then a Next Due Date will be generated If the gage is due for calibration this message will appear when the past due gage is selected Past Due This gage is Past Due Deibration These fields track the gage issuance date and time the fields are prefilled with the current date and time but are editable fields Choose the type of issue this field creates a self building list as you enter different descriptions Enter or select the person to whom you issue the gage however the name selection for this field may be dependent on the Gage Entry Auth Persons Restrict Issue selection For more information see Restrict Issue under Gage Entry Auth Persons Select or enter the department or job number that will use the gage Use this field to track the part or group of parts that the gage will measure You can enter a Purchase Order number if you re sending the gage out to a supplier for repair or calibration or are manufacturing parts for a customer Enter the date on which you expect the gage to be returned to you This field shows where the gage is stored when not in use You cannot edit this field Show the current location of the gage You cannot edit this field This button clears all fields in the form If you have other gages to issue click this button to issue the gage Allows you to print a Select Label Type for the gage being issued Note A label printer must be installed to accommodate this request
296. ions Therefore you must treat the SOF TWARE like any other copyrighted material e g a book or musical recording except that you may a make copies of the SOFTWARE solely for backup or archival purposes and b transfer the software to hard disks provided that only one copy of the SOFTWARE is used at any time You MAY NOT COPY the written materials accompanying the SOFTWARE 3 OTHER RESTRICTIONS You may not rent or lease the SOFTWARE but you may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials on a permanent basis provided you retain no copies and the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement LIMITED WARRANTY CyberMetrics warrants that you may return the SOFTWARE and all accompanying written materials for any reason for a full refund for a period of 30 days from the date of receipt CUSTOMER REMEDIES CyberMetrics entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be at CyberMetrics option either a return of the price paid or b repair or replacement of the SOFTWARE that does not meet CyberMetrics Limited Warranty and which is returned to CyberMetrics with a copy of your invoice or receipt This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident abuse or misapplication Any replacement SOF TWARE will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or 30 days whichever is longer NO OTHER WARRANTIES CyberMetrics DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED IN
297. is and all other reports can be limited through Security At a glance MSA V2 and MSA V3 study type totals Description This report lists your suppliers Check Enabled to see only active suppliers To see both active and inactive suppliers uncheck Enabled Description Lists all or one specified kit and its associated Required Gage Types and Required Gage information For information on editing these reports and creating new reports see Customizing Reports in the System Administrator s Guide Appendix A Calibration Label Kit The following instructions will help you install and set up the optional GAGEtrak Calibration Label Kit You can use the kit to print durable oil resistant adhesive backed calibration labels for your gages test equipment and calibration standards The kit includes a dedicated Brother P Touch PC label printer cables black on white tape cartridge and software drivers for Windows and Macintosh If you ordered extra tape cartridges they are enclosed with your kit Installing the Label Printer and Windows Software First attach the Brother P Touch PC printer s serial port and cables and then put the tape cartridge into the printer Next install the P Touch PC Editor for Microsoft Windows software See the enclosed Brother booklets for more detailed instructions Printing Calibration Labels GAGEtrak can print standard calibration labels in widths of 112 1 1 2 and 1 4 Lengths
298. is field to enter any comments about this study Co Part No Enter your internal company reference standard part or job number if relevant Part No Select a related reference standard or part number such as the customer or supplier part number if relevant Part Desc This field displays the description or name of the reference standard or part Characteristic In this field enter the name of the characteristic you measured Field Button Name Specification Limits Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Use Range Method for Bias Number Format Percentage Format Part Reference Values 1 5 required Trials 1 12 or 1 60 required Description Be sure to enter the minimum and maximum Specification Limit values otherwise the software can t calculate the tolerance values for your study A process capability or performance target may be entered typically 1 33 or 1 67 GAGEtrak will use it to reduce Tolerance to be an estimate of Process Variation If you know the 6 Sigma Process Variation of the characteristic that you re measuring enter it here It will be divided by 6 and used for Total Variation TV If you want this option select Yes from the drop down list Otherwise GAGEtrak uses standard deviation Choose desired format from the drop down list Choose desired format from the drop down list Enter three to five Part Reference Values for Linearity amp Bias Enter one for Bias Only Studies Enter 5
299. is study should not be used The R s and MR charts detect changes in repeatability of calibration If the chart shows a shift or drift in repeatability the amount of change estimated visually is the Consistency contribution to uncertainty Information Tab 5 Stability Ea P Information Data Study Date 9 30 2003 Co PartNo MSA Gage ID MSA3 84 Part No Gage Desc Validation Data Part Desc Study Type Stability Characteristic Appraiser Specification Limits Min Max MSA Version 4 y Approved Pp for Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Comments Number Format 000000 Percentage Format 0 le Resolution 0 1 Use Historic Reference Value 48 5 Historic x Bar 0 Use Range Method Y Historic Sigma 0 95 Confidence Bounds Lower Upper Bias If Stable 0 019444 0 115306 0 154195 et 22 EV of TV Standard Error 0 065717 Acceptable Standard Dev 0 394301 EV of Tol Calc Charts Print Record 14 1 gt DL gt of 2 Each of the fields in the Information tab screen is explained in the table below Field Button Name Study Date Gage ID Gage Desc Study Type Appraiser MSA Version Approved Comments Co Part No Part No Part Desc Characteristic Specification Limits Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Number Format Percentage Format Resolution Reference Value Use Range Method Use Historic Historic X Bar Historic Sigma Description Enter the date of the study this field
300. it tells the program that you want all gage records with descriptions ending in the word Caliper such as 4 inch Caliper Furthermore if you enter Caliper it tells the program that you want all gage records with descriptions containing the word Caliper such as 4 inch Caliper and Caliper Digital You can specify as many filter fields as you need depending on how selective you want to be After you enter any filter values click the Find button to view the filtered record set To remove any filter information click the Clear Filter button Advanced Filter Use the Advanced Filter command when you need to find a particular record or group of records This command allows you to set up customized search filters for your records searching by any or all fields in the form You can even save search criteria so that you don t have to set up the same searches repeatedly An unlimited number of frequently used searches can be saved and retrieved The Advanced Filter is accessible from the Records menu and the program toolbar Records Bookmarks Help Quick Filter Advanced Filter Edit Filter Sort Show All Records Find records that match these criteria Define more criteria And Or Add to List Condition Advanced Filter Example To set up a criterion select values for the Field Condition and Value fields make sure you select the radio button for the first criterion 40 Find records that match
301. ithin appraisers This module will compare pairs of appraisers and perform hypothesis tests to determine if there is sufficient agreement If a variable gage is available that can check the same parts GAGEtrak will compare attribute and variable decisions and calculate gage repeatability and reproducibility GRR for the attribute gage If variable measurements are not feasible you can substitute attribute reference values from an authoritative attribute source the customer perhaps Information Tab 3 Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis fo mm P Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No Gage ID MSA4 127 Part No o Gage Desc Caliper 0 6 inch23 Part Desc Study Type Risk Analysis Approved MSA Version 4 y Lower Limit 0 45 Upper Limit 10 545 Pass Value 1 Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Fail Value 0 GRA 02375 Bs not 3 Number Format 000000 A Percentage Format 0 gt Comments Prefil Cale Print Record KEER 2 ICC of 2 The Information tab contains these fields and buttons Field Button Name Study Date Gage ID Gage Desc Study Type MSA Version Pass Value Fail Value Number Format Comments Co Part No Part No Part Desc Approved Description This field defaults to the current date but you can change it Select the ID code for the gage you re using in the study Once you select a gage ID
302. ize Select from a scrollable list of available paper sizes supported by your printer 328 Set Label Size Paper Size Paper Sizes Width inch Height inch Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt This list is automatically taken from your printer information file Clicking on a size from the Paper Size list displays the size of the label in inches in the Width and Height fields located below the paper size list In the design stage you have to consider margins for your printable page For custom label sizes you must enter the dimensions of your label in inches in the Width and Height fields Once you have done this go on to the next step by clicking Next Set Label Size Paper Size Paper Sizes ooo y Y PRC Envelope 8 y PRC Envelope 1 Rotated y PRC Envelope 2 Rotated RC Envelope 4 Rotated a Custom v Note for Custom Paper Size enter Width 0 inch paper dimensions here A Height 0 inch Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Select Report Tables Now choose from all available tables in your database by highlighting the table name and clicking the gt button You can select multiple tables but since the links will not be established you must make sure that both tables have records in them that match or have at least one common field Only matching records will be shown We recommend that you select only one table in making your labels GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrat
303. ize The cursor appearance will change to this symbol and can then be dragged up or down depending on the section size requirement A E PageHeader gk E GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 309 Report Settings Report Settings lets you set margins printer settings grid settings and styles used in building reports From the main icon bar select the Report Setup button to open the Report Settings window amp D uy Report ar ttings Converting from Inches or Top Margin fao Preview Centimeter to Twips Bottom Margin 1440 INCHES Page Setup LeftMargin fao E RitMaon A 2 Margin 1440 xn Gutter o CENTIMETERS Printer Settings Bickle M argin 567xn Where n is voir desired Cancel Page Setup The margin is the nonprinting area outside the main body of your report by default margins in the report editor are set to 1440 twips 1 inch all around If you prefer a wider or narrower margin click on the up or down arrow next to the field Top Margin Bottom Margin Left Margin or Right Margin you wish to adjust Clicking on the up arrow will add 365 twips or Y to the width of the margin clicking on the down arrow will subtract a similar amount from the width of the margin You may also enter a value manually if you want a 5 8 bottom margin for instance multiply 1440 twips inch by 625 Enter the resulting value 900 in the Bottom Margin field The gutter is an additional ar
304. l generate more efficiently if the logo size is within the 1KB range Click Cancel to return to the main menu without saving your changes To save your changes and return to the main menu click the Close button Settings General ES Settings User Info General Cae Reports Enable Automatic Gage Due Listing Start frequency End frequency 30 Days Indude Past Due Report Logo Setting Email Options ptions Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Floating Tool Bar Open Automatically Service Request Options Change Gage Status when Gage is sent Do Not Change v Wide Change Gage Status when Gage is returned Do Not Change v Email Method SMTP Settings Workstation Specific SMTP Server smtp gmail com From Email genyus234 igmail com Remote Port 587 Use Authentication User Name genyus234 qmail com Password Main Menu Color Scheme Blue Close Temperature Humidity Settings O Automatically Read Temperature And Humidity From Sensor Read Temperature In Fahrenheit O Celsius Sensor Serial Number T 2112 0829 Y Confirm Sensor Serial Number before taking reading Temperature Correction 5 Humidity Correction 2 O Use Grey Form Background The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Enable Automatic Gage Due Listing Report Start Frequency End Frequency Include Past Due Report Logo Setti
305. lax Details Use the Expanded Uncertainty from the reference standards incoming calibration certificate Expanded Uncertainties are usually Type B and the Probability Distribution is usually Normal 2 Look for the Coverage Factor k and DF Use k as the Divisor If DF is furnished enter it and consider choosing Type A There are multiple kinds of uncertainty that result from materials and gages not being exactly at 20 C 68 F Estimate the Plus or Minus values based on experience and calculate a Sensitivity Coefficient using the length and coefficient of thermal expansion The Probability Distribution is usually U shaped Although it was long thought to be Rectangular This variable occurs when a pointer or indicator mark is not in the same plane as the dial face or scale and the dial face or scale is not perpendicular to the appraisers line of site Recall trying to read a speedometer from the passenger seat The Probability Distribution is usually Rectangular More Information on Uncertainty For detailed and authoritative information about uncertainty we recommend consulting NIST Technical Note TN1297 It meets all applicable ISO and ANSI Standards and is more specific than the standards Lots of examples are good too and for that we recommend European Accreditation publication EA 4 02 Information on how to calculate Plus or Minus values for specific Uncertainty Contributors comes from the NIST SEMATECH e Handbook
306. ld List Budget_Uncert_Row5 Budget_Type_Row5 Budget_PlusMinus_Row5 Budget_Prob_Row5 Budget_Divisor_Row5 Budget_SensiCOE_Row5 Budget_UncertCont_Row5 Budget_DF_Row5 Budget_Uncert_Row Budget_Type_Row Budget_PlusMinus_Row Budget_Prob_Row Budget_Divisor_Row Budget_SensiCOE_Row Budget_UncertCont_Row Budget_DF_Row Budget_Uncert_Row7 Budget_Type_Row7 Budget_PlusMinus_Row 7 Budget_Prob_Row7 Budget_Divisor_Row7 Budget_SensiCOE_Row7 Budget_UncertCont_Row7 Budget_DF_Row7 Budget_Uncert_Row8 Budget_Type_Row8 Budget_PlusMinus_Row8 Budget_Prob_Row8 Budget_Divisor_Row8 Budget_SensiCOE_Row8 Budget_UncertCont_Row8 Budget_DF_Row8 tPercentConfidence kCoverageFactor CombiUncert_UC CombiUncert_DF ExpUncert_UC Data Type Text Text Single Text Single Single Single Text Text Text Single Text Single Single Single Text Text Text Single Text Single Single Single Text Text Text Single Text Single Single Single Text Single Single Single Single Single GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide Length 50 50 4 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Bm Re eR RY OR 393 394 Table Name User Defined Description User defined information Associated From frmGageCustom Field List Item Label_Text LabelFontWeight dftLabel_Text Field_Type Field_ Attrib List_ Source List_Table List Field Table Name Users Data Type Text key
307. le 8 a37 Double 8 a38 Double 8 368 Field List a39 a310 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15 b16 b17 b18 b19 b110 b21 b22 b23 b24 b25 b26 b27 b28 b29 b210 b31 b32 b33 b34 b35 b36 b37 b38 b39 b310 c11 c12 c13 c14 c15 Data Type Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Length GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 369 Field List Data Type Length c16 Double 8 C17 Double 8 c18 Double 8 c19 Double 8 c110 Double 8 c21 Double 8 c22 Double 8 c23 Double 8 c24 Double 8 c25 Double 8 c26 Double 8 c27 Double 8 c28 Double 8 C29 Double 8 c210 Double 8 c31 Double 8 C32 Double 8 c33 Double 8 c34 Double 8 c35 Double 8 c36 Double 8 c37 Double 8 c38 Double 8 c39 Double 8 c310 Double 8 name_a Text 50 name_b Text 50 name_c Text 50 SixSigmaVar Double 8 Ref1 Double 8 Ref2 Double 8 Ref3 Double 8 Ref4 Double 8 Ref5 Double 8 Ref Double 8 Ref7 Double 8 Ref8 Double 8 370 Field List Ref9 Ref10 LinBias LinSlope LinFit LIN LINTOL_PCT LINPV_PCT ChartNo SubGroupNo NumbFormat PercFormat StdError Confidence InterceptCOE InterceptDF InterceptTSTAT InterceptTCRI SlopeCOE SlopeDF SlopeTSTAT SlopeTCRI Result UPL LOL HH HL LH
308. liper06 inchmm 1 31 2006 _ 5 023E DVERN___ Vemier Depth Gage OB inch DepthVemier06 lin inch 114142007 Record 4 4 2 gt md px of 78 4 mi Gage ID NUM SCRL Elements of a Record in Datasheet View All Datasheet View windows have the following elements Title Bar Located at the top of each table the title bar contains the table s name Gage Entry in the above example Click the title bar to drag the table window to a new location Menu Bar The menu bar located above the title bar typically has menus for File Edit View Format Records Bookmarks and Help To select a menu click on the menu title and a list of menu commands will appear Some menu items may not be available they will appear gray Control Menu Icon Click on this icon located to the left of the title bar to change the table window s size and location You can also use it to close the window Record Selector Buttons Record selector buttons are small rectangular buttons located on the far left side of each row Use them to select the entire record for copying or deletion You can also use them to store any changes made to the record if you change any fields an icon of a pencil will appear on the button click on the button to write your changes to the database You can select multiple records by clicking and dragging your mouse pointer over the desired records To select all records between two records first click on
309. list why kit is being issued Issued To Enter or select a name from the dropdown list box of the person to whom you issue the kit Issued Depart Kit issued to what department Promised Date Expected kit return date GAGEtrak uses the following rule to manage the issuance of Kits 1 When you issue a kit GAGEtrak inserts the current date and time as the issue date and time It also changes the kit s Current Location field to a description that consists of Issued To plus Issued Dept for example 675 Job 7512 Final Assy 2 When a gage is returned GAGEtrak shows it as an open issue record allowing for the received date and time to be entered After you enter the Received Date and Time and save the record GAGEtrak changes the kit s Current Location field to its Storage Location Selection Criteria for Automatic Gage Selection Field Button Description Name Manufacturer Gages will be selected based on specific Manufacturer criteria Storage Location Gages will be selected based on specific Storage Location criteria Current Location Gages will be selected based on specific Current Location criteria Exclude Gages Do you want to export gages that contain no record information in Gage Entry Schedule and or if no With No study has been created for this gage Calibration or Study Schedule If in the event a gage cannot be issued in a kit you will be prompted with the following message None of the gages in this Kit could
310. lity distribution interaction lic interaction lower control limit lss interaction sum square luc interaction upper control limit Study Values k 3 n 10 r 2 Appraiser DF k 1 3 1 2 PartsDF n 1 10 1 9 App x Parts App DF x PartsDF 2x9 18 r number of trials R amp R repeatability amp reproducibility RR R amp R lower control limit RRss R amp R sum square RR R amp R upper control limit S sum square SS appraiser x parts sum square SS appraiser sum square app SS gage error sum square SS parts sum square TV total variation TVss total variation sum square UCL upper control limit TotalDF n xk xr 1 3x10 x2 1 60 1 59 Gage Error Totps Apr Pbr AB 59 2 9 18 30 Sum All Readings 16 55 15 35 16 55 48 45 Sum Square All Readings 273 90 235 62 273 90 783 42 EJES 36 65 3 4 80 23 04 4 95 24 50 2 75 7 56 37 21 4 70 22 09 36 65 4 00 Totals 48 45 247 08 EJE Correction Factor for ANOVA CF SumReadings n k r 48 45 10 3 2 39 123 Appraiser Sum Square SSp SSReading n r CF 783 42 10 2 39 123 0 048 Appraiser Mean Square Spp DFapp 0 048 2 0 024 Parts Sum Square SS PartsSumSquare k r CF 247 08 3 2 39 123 2 057 Parts Mean Square MS SS DF 2 124 9 0 2286 158 App x Parts Sum Square SSp SumSquareTotalReadings r
311. ll be compressed in the industry standard zip format This means that you can use other utilities such as PKZIP PC Tools WinZip or Norton to restore your backup file Manual Restore To restore your database file click the Manual Restore button under the Manual tab of the Data Backup window GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 279 A dialog box will appear highlight the file you want to restore unzip and click Open Choose the Zip File My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents DESKTOP 091 a File name 20081001 My Network Files of type IZIP zip Cancel FI aces i Open as read only Now choose the drive and directory you want to restore the backup zip file to Browse for Folder Select the Folder where the restored Files will be placed El E DESKTOP 091 EA My Network Places Note When you restore your database restore it to a different location than your current database location The Restore utility contains a safeguard that prevents you from overwriting your current database even if you try to do so This safeguard lets you alternately open your restored and current databases to compare them in case you suspect that you ve lost data because of a corrupted database 280 Use a folder named Backup as the location for your restored database as shown here Browse for Folder Select the Folder where the restored Files will be placed B CyberMetrics Corp
312. ll no e ba 305 GrOUBINE YOUL De AA AAA AAA A 305 Creatina ENE Det a 308 A O sateen 309 Completine Your Report Layou taierea ds ts anorte ended 313 A O E ER 315 Creatine UI Ud oO 317 Adame AS UD REDON SEN 318 Adang O slo la GOO NEE 320 creating Labels im Report BOON annar enna a AA A eenden 323 CUSTOM O cutee aatoctate 324 EAS NW A A maaunenie ne 326 Appendix A Data Transfer Utility sss ratnntebrevenbeln ene instaan eee hiwede sea tae tage ee caawepsueneabiaueaceatwate a 333 hoonmosthe Data ATOMS ClO NY eera ii dae 334 Client Server Versions Before You Run the DTU csssssseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeseeseseeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeee 334 Data Transfer Instructions Version 5 5 5 4 and 3 Access Users to Client Server Version 6 nn 336 Converting your database file GTDATA55 MDB GTDATA50 MDB GTDATA40 MDB and DATA9731 MDB 336 Data Transfer Instructions for Version 3 Archive File sscccccccseesecccnseeseccccasseecessaunsecessuueecessaueecessauasecsssauesessssaens 338 Converting your archive file ARCH9731 MDB or ARCH9735 MDB ccccccssssecceceeseeceeeaeeeeceesseaeeeessueneeeessaees 338 All Versions Ver y DAtA TONS OT irei E ae a OEN E N NE O i 339 Sample Data Transfer from Version 6 0 Data Similar for Version 5 0 Version 4 0 Version 3 0 Data 340 Updater Add REDOING esa eevee T bee lletra oleada ult neal bl EN 340 AOGENGIX B Table DETIMITIONS sifessec
313. ls Bias Uncertainty Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No Gage ID COMPARATOR o Part No 10 221 3 o Gage Desc 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Front NIST No Characteristic Study Type Linearity amp Bias Specification Limits Min Max MSA Version al E Approved Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Appraiser Use Range Method for Bias No Comments Number Format 000000 Percentage Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 Part Ref Values 2 4 6 8 10 Avg Bias per Part 0 491667 0 125000 0 025000 0 291667 0 616667 Predicted Bias 0 473333 0 210000 0 053333 0 316667 0 580000 Coefficient df t Stat t Critical Goodness of Fit 0 714318 Intercept 0 736667 58 000000 10 15752 2 00172 x Std Error 0 239540 Slope 0 131667 58 000000 12 04256 2 00172 X SE of TV Upper Fitted Confidence Limit at worst point 0 436841 x SE of Tol Lower Fitted Confidence Limit at worst point 0 330175 x Prefil Cale Charts Record 14 4 6 gt hI b of 6 Enter three to five reference values in the Part Ref Values area The smallest reference values should be entered as 1 and the largest reference values entered as 5 Click the Trials tab to begin entering the measurements for each size Start with Column 1 Click the TAB or ENTER key to advance to the next measurement for Column 1 until all 12 measurements have been entered Follow the same procedure for the rest of the columns 162 Trials Tab 3 Linearity Bias and U
314. ly bias is determined at five different reference values Ideally bias will appear to be slightly above or below zero at each of the five reference values If bias is found to vary significantly from zero the study will tell us whether it varies in a linear way easy to compensate for or a non linear way more difficult to compensate for Some gages are calibrated with custom made masters and there are only one or two reference standards If you don t have at least three reference standards you can do the study using calibrated parts e g have the parts measured by a more authoritative instrument such as a coordinate measuring machine Then each part will have a reference value If enough reference standards are available it is better not to use parts If a linearity study is to represent an entire family of gages you may want to use a different gage for each reference value Then the repeatability of calibration will actually be GRR of calibration because it will include appraiser variation Appraiser variation can refer to gages operators or laboratories You could even use two technicians by letting each do half of the trials Bias Only Study When you only want to check bias at a single reference value select on the Linearity tab Bias Only for study type You will still be able to do Uncertainty except for the Linearity contribution Linearity Linearity Bias and Uncertainty o mcl P Linearity Tria
315. marizes the findings taking your skip days dates into account Use this report as a labor and cost planning tool After you enter any filter values click Viewto view the schedule Tip Don t use too wide of a date range such as a 10 year span as it can take a long time to generate If the schedule takes too long press CT RL BREAK to stop it then try a smaller date range Schedule report options include Include days with no activity Af you want your report to include complete time frames check this box to include days on which calibrations aren t scheduled For example suppose you wanted to create a schedule for January through March and no calibrations were due in February If you left this box un checked your report would show January and March but not February If you checked this box the report would include February Default Hours GAGEtrak uses this value for gages that don t have an estimated calibration length i e their Calibration Hours fields are blank For example if you enter 0 5 GAGEtrak assigns a half hour of time only to those gages If you entered Calibration Hours for your gages leave this field blank Schedule Type Use this field to select how to summarize your schedule by day week month quarter or year Select By Day With Details for a comprehensive listing Tip You can print more than one schedule type without having to re generate the schedule each time Use these forms to gather c
316. mation Gages 49 Standards 200 Serial Number Calibrations M gt isis 297862004 Lallbrations 4 deasurements ss Registration pr Procedures Issue Tracking 31 License Has Been Registered Windows Directory l CAWINDOWS Parts Gage Requirements 11 System Directory 10 CAWINDOWS system32 Suppliers Gage R amp R Users Service Requests Copyright 1955 2008 CyberMetrics Corporation All rights reserved C Program Files Microsoft Access Runtime OF 239 240 Main Menu The main menu shows the name of the currently logged in user in the lower left corner and shows the full path to current database file in the lower right corner ES Main Menu Main Records MSA Setup Data Tools and Utilities Report Queue Gage Reports Division Name Main Records Gage Entry Calibration Entry Service Request Entry Kit Entry Issue Gages Return Gages Export to PDA Import from PDA Procedure Entry Gage Reports 1 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label Calibration Standard Report _ Gage Detail Report Gage Event Listing Gage Issue History Gage Label 1 2W x 1L Gage Label 1 2W x 2L Gage Label 1 2W x 3L Gage Label 1 4W x 1L Gage Label 1 4W x 2L Gage Label 1 4W x 3L Supplier Entry Status Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Part Entry Standard Group Calibration Calendar Formula Entry Staff Entry If t
317. matting options that can be applied to the labels ES Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface N Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Tab Caption Label Font Weight Item Field Type Field Attribute Label Text Default Label Text Normal Bold H 01 Text Text Field User 1 User 1 A 02 Text Field User B 03 Text Field E User B 04 Text Field User 2 3 4 B 05 Text Field User 5 User 6 8 9 User 2 3 4 5 El 06 Text Field E User User 6 7 8 3 User User User a 07 Text Field E User P 08 Text Field User H 09 Text Field E User mi 10 Text Field E User 10 User 10 E 11 Text Field ka User 11 User 11 F 12 Text Field E User 12 User 12 A 13 Text Field E User 13 User 13 14 Text Field E User 14 User 14 E 15 Text Field Ga User 15 User 15 Record 14 1 gt gt t of 20 User User O O O O O O O O O O GO O O O O O CO OJ CO oo O OF O O OF CO O SHS HSN SN SNS IS NEN SNS Se SN SS NS The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Tab Caption In Gage Entry the tab currently titled User Defined can be edited to reflect a client specific title for example Characteristics 256 Field Button Name Item Data Type Field Attribute Label Text Default Label Text Normal
318. mended Significance Change Level 67 5000 0 2684 3 6000 0 0006 Gage Type Calibration Frequency Pre approved b Comparator 30 0000 Days DROP INDICATOR 6 0000 Months iE Record 14 4 1 gt pi of 2 Field Button Name Reliability Target Number Format Significance Threshold Gage Type Cal Frequency Recommended Change Significance Level Pre Approved Description This is the desired end of period reliability i e the desired probability that the as found condition of the gage will be in tolerance at the end of the calibration period after the optimum calibration frequency has been achieved GAGEtrak will recommend changes to the calibration frequency until the specified reliability is obtained The default Reliability Target is 80 Specifying higher reliability will result in more frequent calibration You can t change this here To change this go to Setup Settings Cal Options A3 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Choose the number of decimal places you want to be displayed This is the maximum amount of risk GAGEtrak will take in recommending a change i e the risk that a recommended change will turn out not to have been necessary The default is 0 3 Specifying lower significance will increase the number of calibrations required to make a decision You can t change this here To change this go to Setup Settings Cal Options A3 Adjus
319. n The description of the selected gage will appear in this field File Path of file attachment Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file File Description Description of attached file type For example if the attached file is a Microsoft Word document the Description field will contain Microsoft Word Document View Print button Attachments associated with the current procedure can be selected from under Procedure Attachment and then by selecting this button 70 Field Button Description Name Delete button Click this button to remove the procedure from this gage When you click this button a dialog window will appear to tell you that in Gage Entry you can only remove the procedure from the current gage record To remove the procedure click Yes If you want to delete or remove a procedure from all gages you must do so in Procedure Entry GAGEtrak 6 5 Do you want bo remove this Procedure From this gage This Procedure will be removed From only this gage To remove a Procedure Fram all gages click Remove in Procedure Entry Yes Mo Adding Procedures To link another calibration procedure to this gage use the navigation buttons at the bottom of the Procedures window to add a new procedure record Again select the name of the pro
320. n list buttons indicate that a field has a list of items available from which you can choose When you click the button it presents the list in a scrollable box Click on any item in the list to select it There are two types of drop down lists self building lists and value lists Type NEEN A self building drop down list allows you to manually enter a new value which is automatically added to the list for future selection This type of drop down list has only one column of data Tope APE eel 0001 p Outside Mic 0 1 00011 Outside Mic 0 1 001 Outside Mic 1 2 0001 PLUG GAGE Pressure Gage 0 30 pel 1 pst resol Protilometer Radius Gage 132 to 1 nch Hing Gage Rule 0 72 1 54 and 1 32 Screw Threads Mic 0 1 001 in Sine Plate 5 in Grade C Single Groove Block Grade E Single Pan Balance 0 210 q Solid Angle Plate 8 10 in grade C STANDARD Steel 2 bar zet Tee Grade B Step Gage Super Mic 0 7 0000S in Test Indicator 0 4 0 0007 in THREAD GAGE A value list contains data that is entered only via the main data entry point This type of list typically contains two columns of data For example within Gage Entry the Supplier Code drop down list is a value list You cannot enter new data in this field Instead you must navigate to Supplier Entry from the main menu and enter a new supplier record The new Supplier Code will now be available in the Supplier Code drop down list within Gage Entry Supplier Code er Adobe Adobe
321. n_Type Calibration_By Department Results Action_Required Approved Findings Calibration_Cost AcctNo TotalUncert ResultCode CalDateUpdated CertNo Time_Required Repair_Cost Repair_Hours CalFrequency CalFrequency_UOM InCal_Freq InCal_Freq_UOM NextDue Temperature Humidity Pressure Other CalibType UserDef1 UserDef2 Data Type Text key Date Time key Date Time key Text Text Text Text Text Long Integer Memo Double Text Double Double Long Integer Text Double Double Double Double Text Double Text Date Time Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 350 Field List UserDef3 UserDef4 UserDef5 UserDef6 UserDef7 UserDef8 UserDef9 UserDef10 UserDef11 UserDef12 UserDef13 UserDef14 UserDef15 UserDef16 UserDef17 UserDef18 UserDef19 UserDef20 SentToPDA CalDiscrepancy FloatFixed Description Gage_SN Est Calibration _Cost Calibration _Hours Effective DF Coverage_FactorK Bill_To PassHistID FailHistID PreCalFreg_CurrUnits Data Type Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Text Double Double Double Double Text Long Integer Long Integer Double Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Table Name C
322. ncertainty oon la O Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No Gage ID COMPARATOR o Part No 10 221 3 o Gage Desc 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Front 1 2 3 4 5 1 27 5 1 5 8 7 6 9 1 2 25 3 9 5 7 7 7 9 3 2 4 42 5 9 7 8 9 5 4 25 5 5 9 1 1 9 3 5 er 3 8 6 7 8 9 4 6 2 3 3 9 6 1 7 8 uN Fi 25 3 9 6 7 8 9 5 2 5 3 9 6 1 77 9 5 9 24 3 9 6 4 7 8 9 6 10 24 6 3 75 9 2 11 2 6 41 6 7 6 9 3 12 24 3 8 6 1 7 7 9 4 Resolution from gage table Prefill Cale co Chats Print Record 14 4 6 gt pip of 6 The Linearity and Trials Tabs contain these fields Field Button Name Description Study Date Enter the date of the study this field defaults to the current date Gage ID Select the gage ID from the drop down list box Gage Desc The name of the gage or measurement device appears in this field NIST No A number traceable to NIST for the reference standards or calibrated parts to be measured Study Type Choose Linearity amp Bias if you have 3 to 5 reference values If there is only one reference value choose Bias Only MSA Version Refers to the Measurement Systems Analysis Reference Manual published by AIAG Use Version 4 for new studies Existing Version 3 studies may be updated for new features by changing to Version 4 Updates are reversible Approved Select if study is approved Appraiser Enter the name of the person conducting the study Comments Use th
323. ncy Calibration_Frequency_UIOM Storage_Location Property ToolBox ActiveReport AllowSplitters documentNarn ExpressionErrc MaxPages PrintWidth Ruler visible Script Selected ActiveReport Main Report True ActiveReports 0 10830 True OSub OnReportStart w Date Time Stamp A Label Button x BE Ty Aa bl ES Field Button abl Column Header using Labels Report Header using Labels Page Field of Fieldt3 t2 The other buttons are self explanatory we will discuss the other special buttons in greater detail as we go along Feel free to explore GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 315 Sub Reports A sub report is a report within a report each sub report pertains to a record in the main report Sub reports are very handy when you want to include details into your report but cannot include additional tables for the details in the main SQL statement Your Company Name Your Division Calibration Work Order With Procedure Report Thru ows 8 002 M A A DIAL BORE GA 2 4 iM Type agd Frequency E EOM Heart Due Date WSO Account No Reference No Standard ID CAS Badr DAS 8050 OASES DAS 80 51 CS 80 51 CS 052 DAS B 052 Results Comments Minar HNonimal Maximum Before Last Cabbmatan Summary Date 22001 Ey dim Schell PROCEDURES Procedure Name File Path 05 TEST INDICATORS
324. nd maximum Specification Limit values otherwise the software can t calculate the tolerance values for your study If you know the 6 Sigma Process Variation of the characteristic that you re measuring enter it here This causes the program to use this value instead of estimating part variation from your sample of study parts If you know the standard deviation of the characteristic from SPC or Capability studies multiply it by six and enter the result here See your Process Engineer or Quality Engineer for help A process capability or performance target may be entered typically 1 33 or 1 67 GAGEtrak will use it to reduce Tolerance to be an estimate of Process Variation The program calculates these fields when you click the Calc button Blank rows result if you used a Study Type that cannot calculate a particular row Description Equipment variation Repeatability Appraiser Variation Reproducibility Appraiser x Part Interaction Combined variation for EV AV and INT Part to part Variation will be calculated and displayed from Total Variation TV If Specification Limits have been entered PV will be separately calculated for the of Tolerance column The latter version will display as of Tol only MSA 4 Edition authorizes using number of distinct categories as a substitute for GRR The two statistics are related in the same way that Fahrenheit and Celsius are two ways of measuring the same property Technicall
325. ng Email Method Floating Toolbar Change Gage Status when Gage is sent Change Gage Status when Gage is Returned GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 245 Description Check this box if you want the Calibration Due Listing by Due Date Report to automatically pop up when you initiate GAGEtrak This report shows gage IDs that are due or past due You can print the report or close it to continue into the program A message will appear if you don t have any gages due for calibration This field sets the start date of the Automatic Gage Due Listing Report The start day will be calculated to before the current date using this frequency So if this frequency is 7 days and the current date is 10 8 2008 then the start date will be 10 1 2008 Usually this will be 0 Days since you want to show all the calibrations due starting from today This field sets the end date of the Automatic Gage Due Listing Report If you want to know what calibrations are due for the next month select 1 Month Check this box if you want to show calibrations that are past due This will show every calibration due till the end frequency Affects how the logo will be displayed on reports e Normal 1 440 x 1 440 twips 1 x 1 e Wide 2 880 x 1 440 twips 2 x 1 e Custom user defined A twip is 1 20 of a printer s point 1 440 twips equal one inch and 567 twips equal one centimeter These measurements designate the size an object will
326. ng Integer key ResultCode Text CodeValue Double Lookback Text Table Name Risk Analysis Description Risk analysis information Associated From Gage RR Atribute Risk Analysis Field List GRR Results ID Data Type Long Integer RiskSeqNum Long Integer Al Double A2 Double A3 Double B1 Double B2 Double B3 Double C1 Double C2 Double C3 Double Decision Long Integer RefValue Double Code Text AppSignal Text Table Name RootCause Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Cause Text key Enabled Long Integer Description Text Length 4 50 8 50 Length 4 50 50 Length 50 100 382 Table Name Settings Description Program settings Associated From Settings frmGage_Frequency_Adjusting_Interval Interface Lock Catcher Form Field List Settings_ID Company_Name_1 Company_Name_2 Company_Address 1 Company_Address_2 Company_City Company_State Company_Zip Company_Contact Company_Phone Company_Fax Company_Logo Calibration_Cert_Statement OpenToolPalette ToolPaletteOrientation ToolPaletteLocation Skip_Sun Skip_Mon Skip_Tue Skip_Wed Skip_Thu Skip_Fri Skip_Sat AutoCalDue AutoRRDue DefaultFormat MaxUsers AutoAdjust PassFactor FailFactor SkipDirection ysnAuditTrail strAuditLocation Data Type Long Integer key Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Long Binary Memo
327. ngs User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface N Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Form Name Calibration Entry v Tab Name Tab Caption B Attachments Attachments B CalibrationS canT ab Calibration Scans Fe CalibrationT ab Calibration E LabelsT ab Labels M MeasurementsT ab Measurements Ka Procedure Attachment Procedure Attachment Procedure Text Procedure Text El ProceduresT ab Procedures a SignatureT ab Signature a UserDefT ab User Defined E SignatureScansT ab Signature and Scans a AdditionalsT ab Additionals Record 14 4 1 gt pi gt of 12 The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Form Name Select a Form Name from the list box of available editable forms Tab Name This is the default name of the tab within the select Form Name Tab Caption Enter the new caption for the tab within the select Form Name Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button Close If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu The Main Menu functionality is similar to Form Tabs but pertains to the main menu items instead The Menu Name is the default menu description used in GAGEtrak and can be renamed in the Custom Menu Name field 258 Settings Menu Bar The tabs within the main menu features can be revis
328. nnect to the indicated data provider 4 System data source is visible to all users on this machine including NT services 235 236 3 Click the Add button You ll see a screen similar to this one Create New Data Source Microsoft FoxPro WEP Driver dbf Microsoft ODBC for Oracle Microsoft Paradox Driver db Microsoft Paradox Treiber dh Microsoft Text Driver txt 9 ca Microsoft Text Treiber tut cav Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Microsoft Visual FoxPro Treiber SOL Server Lil Mo h h h Ah ji swe E lt Back Cancel 4 Select the son server ODBC driver and click Finish This screen will appear Microsoft SQL Server DSN Configuration This wizard will help you create an ODBC data source that you can use to connect to SQL Server What name do you want to use to refer to the data source Name MSSQL_GAGEMGES How do you want to describe the data source Description Which SOL Server do you want to connect to Server ServerName x Next gt Cancel Help 5 Enter mssor cacemces for the data source Name 6 Inthe Description field enter a brief explanation about the data source 7 After you enter the name of the MS SQL server click Next This screen will appear GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide Create a New Data Source to SOL Server How should SQL Server verity the authenticity of the login ID With Windows NT authenti
329. nsfer Data C UpdateAdd Reports GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 335 The Run Scripts screen will appear The table below contains information about the fields and buttons in this screen ES Run Scripts Script Path Data File Name Log File Name Administrator User ID Administrator Password Server Field Button Name Script Path and Browse Data File Name Log File Name MS SQL only Administrator User ID and Password Server MS SQL only Service Name Oracle only Run Test Connection Cancel Run MS SQL Server Scripts Enter the database path and file name Drive letter and path MUST be the server s physical drive letter and path NOT the workstation s mapped drive letter and path Example C SOL_DATABASE FILEHAME MDF C Program Files CyberMetrics Corp GAGEtrak 6 5 Script Browse C Program Files Microsoft SQL ServerlMSSQLiDatalGAGETRAKI C Program Files Microsoft SQL ServerMSSQLiDatalGAGETRAKI SA FET 5 Run Test Connection Cancel Description This field contains the location of the Scripts file for the current workstation It defaults to the same path that the DTU s in for the current workstation If this path is incorrect a message similar to the message below will appear Microsoft Office Access Database connection Failed Microsoft ODBC SOL Server Driver DBNETLIB ConnectionOpen Connect Sele
330. nt to put large numbers here experiment with them The larger the number of months the longer it will take to calculate next due dates and generate the Calibration Calendar For faster operation you may want to set the Calendar Range from 1 to 3 months ahead and behind Use this field to modify the interval at which GAGEtrak automatically updates the calibration data shown in the calibration schedule calendar Refreshing the calendar ensures that the data shown in the calendar accurately reflects the data in the database you may wish to modify the refresh rate according to how busy your calibration lab is The day of week selected will dictate how the calendar is presented to the user for example select Monday as the start of the week and then double click in a date field You ll notice the day of the week begins with Monday and ends with Sunday in the Choose a Date popup calendar GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 251 Settings Security The Security tab contains controls for the security features of GAGEtrak Security parameters are set in the Security section of the Setup menu For more information see Setup Security The 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant version of GAGEtrak permanently enables its security advanced audit trail and electronic signature features Therefore if you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant version of GAGEtrak the Enable Security Audit Trail and Electronic Signature fields show at
331. o Be a can use rpt Sections Details replacing 2 with Details E Field aif a The double quotes are necessary for Strings in the statement In our Alignment 2 ddTXCenter f E Baked C example you start with O from the top most section so Details will be section ese 1 2 The same holds for the Controls since you do not know the index number aption CaptionPositior 0 ddbcCaptionNor of the bar code control you created you can just include the name of the Direction O ddbcLeftToRight Font soe o Barcod control enclosed in double quotes Controls Field10 ForeColor B gt Name Sets returns name of control Creating Labels in Report Editor Automatically creating labels is a breeze with the report editor Imagine creating labels manually from a printed list for 100 gages Even with label designer software you would still have to change each label manually unless your software were linked to a database 324 The report editor includes predefined label templates a custom label designer and even a label wizard Select Report Template 1 1 2 Inch Label Label Wizard Setup is just like report setup design your individual labels and the program does the printing for you To print labels you must have the GAGEtrak Calibration Label Printer As with designing a report you open up a data source and drag fields and field labels to the label you are creating as needed You can
332. o the original manufacturer s specifications and has been calibrated using standards whose accuracies are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology within the limitations of the Institute Calibration Services or have been derived from accepted values of natural physical constants or have been derived by the ratio type of self calibration techniques Our calibration system satisfies ISO It is hereby stated that the above described instrument does not conform to the original manufacturer s specifications and has been failed based on accuracies that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology and are within the limitations of the Institute Calibration Services or have been derived from accepted values of natural physical constants or have been derived by the ratio type of self calibration techniques 9000 05 9000 and the ANSI 2 540 requirements If the checkbox is checked then procedure entry will not allow you to edit or delete a procedure that has already been used for one or more calibration records In Gage Entry on the Calibration Schedule tab you may specify a Maximum Interval or Minimum Interval or both Methods A3 or A1 will notify you in the event that a recommended change is being overridden by these specifications ES A3 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Reliability Target go Significance Threshold lt 0 3 _ Number Format 0000 y Recom
333. of the parts and all of the trials for Appraiser Click the tabs for Appraiser B and Appraiser C if required and follow the same procedure Gage R amp R En Information Appraiser A Appraiser B Appraiser C Study Date 1 24 2008 Co Part No 100021457221 1 Gage ID 022EDCAL y Part No 10 221 1 Gage Desc Caliper 0 12 inch Part Desc Bracket Rt Hand Appraisers 3 A Trials 3 A Parts A Characteristic Pivot Depth Study Type ANOVA gt Specification Limits Min 11 28 Max 11 32 MSA Version 4j Nested ANDVA Approved Pp or Ppk Target 6 Sigma Proc Var Appr Mary Jacobs 1 1 32 1 32 1 33 2 1 33 1 32 1 33 1 32 1 32 1 32 4 1 32 1 32 1 33 5 1 33 1 32 1 32 6 1 31 1 32 1 33 7 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 31 1 31 1 31 z 1 32 1 31 1 32 10 1 31 1 32 1 33 Prefil Calc Charts Print Record MA 3 gt Dh gt of 3 Button Name Prefill Description If most of your measurements begin with the same numbers such as 1 1651 1 1650 and 1 1658 you can save time by prefilling the measurements with those digits In this case click the Prefill button and then enter a Prefillvalue of 1 165 Now you need to enter only the last digit of each measurement Before using Prefill enter the number of trials appraisers and parts for the study GRR Study Screens The table below explains each of the fields in the GRR screens Field Name Study Date Gage ID Gage Desc Appraisers Trials Parts Study Type MSA Ve
334. oking at the control labeled License Registration Date Once the application license has been registered it will remain registered for that Windows account on that workstation even if the software application is reinstalled in the future lf you purchased a multi user license please contact our support team to increase the number of triggers available to your company If you have difficulty obtaining your trigger code please contact our support team at 480 922 7300 Data Tools Reset messages This option resets the program messages back to their default values This option should only be used when Technical Support advises you to do so The following features could potentially cause undesirable effects to the data within the application if used without a full understanding of their use Please consult your systems administrator and or call CyberMetrics Technical Support prior proceeding 288 Data Tools Calculate All Due Dates If you need to re calculate calibration due dates select this utility For example if you change the calibration frequencies on all of your micrometers from 65 Days lO 90 Days and you have 50 micrometer records it s easier to run this procedure than manually click the Next Calib button on the Gage Entry window for those 50 records You ll see the message shown below when you select this utility Calibration Due Dates This utility will Recalculate Due Dates For all gages with Calendar Frequenci
335. on Calibration Measurement Tab Stop Behavior Before After and Comments Tab key or Enter key goes to each of these three fields for each measurement Before and After Tab key or Enter key goes to Before and After fields for each measurement Selected Control Tab key or Enter key goes to one field of your choice in the Calibration Measurements window To use this option when you are calibrating a gage place your cursor in the field of your choice for example Before The Tab key or Enter key will go to the Before field for the next measurement If instead you place your cursor into the After field the Tab key or Enter key will go to the After field for the next measurement This option is useful when only one measurement for the standard is required Some tools or items are adjustable and can be calibrated to a different measurement these tools would have different Before and After measurements 250 Settings Calendar User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Skip Date Entry Skip Sun Vv Skip Mon Skip Tue Skipwed E p 12 26 2003 Skip Thu Skip Fi C Skip Sat M Skip Date Direction Skip Forward Skip Backward Close Calendar Color Coding Intervals From To Ol 10 Hours 20 Hours 30 Hours Hours Calendar Range 6 Number of Months to Look Ahead 2 Number of Months to Look Behind Calendar Refresh Rate
336. on The View Label button will open the report editor allowing for viewing or editing of the label prior to printing Printing Labels from the Calibration Labels Report To print labels in a batch go to the main menu then select the Reports icon and click on the report group Calibration History Reports A list of reports will appear beneath this report group click on the Calibration Label report that corresponds with the label size you wish to print A filter window similar to the one below will appear ES Calibration Label 1W x 1L Filter From Date Done To Date Done From Time Done To Time Done By Gage ID Description Current Location Storage Location Type You can use this window to filter for a group of calibration labels based upon Calibration Date Gage ID Location or Description for any calibration record that exists in the database Below are brief descriptions of the fields and buttons in this window Field Button Name Description From and To Date Inclusive calibration dates Done From and To Time Inclusive calibration times Done By Name of calibrator Field Button Name Gage ID Description Current Location Storage Location Type View Button Print Button Clear Filter Button Close Button Advanced Filter Button Add to Queue Button Fill From Queue Button 218 Appendix A Calibration Label Kit Description ID of specific gage This will limit your label to one for the specif
337. on EVERY PROCS CIN GS A AAA 118 Calibration Entry Signature ANd SCANS iia aaeaweandadeutadasaaueawaseauadseeteunasuannussees 121 Calibration Entry ACI ONIS iaa 126 Calbratiahs tana ara GhOUD aabt 127 An nn 129 COMNPEACION EDEN ENT dada 130 Chapter 12 MSA ENT aaa 131 OVERVIEW A AAA AAA AAA ARA AAA AAA AAA AE 131 About the Manual Software and Technical SUppOrt oocccccccooccnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnonononnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnoos 131 Vall ating the SOW AMO areas lan 132 TENSA DENIA Sa ia tons 132 EIGEN AA AA ia 132 SA to A ineth daennaieeasce ow ta dacuaeleuoat a Geavaueeeaetactdeastameemeaotedes 133 Repeatability Equipment Varna unica oi 133 Reproducibility Appraiser Variation ini da 134 APPALT Park IMtCraCtlOn sd 134 o eles vaclev A A E E EAT E E E E A A E A T egg reas 134 CONSISTEN a A AA AAA A A N 135 Mana OA COMPONEN Sinai A cds 135 MSA MENU in NA a eeen eeen E 136 GTR LOTTE 137 A e POL II o o O aa 137 NOMS OU Variado ds 138 GRAS OI SER a oade A e o 139 Nterbretine ORR ara id 141 Interpretine MUMDEROT distinct CALC SOROS ii 141 Generatie Charat 144 Range Chart by Appraiser Part and by Part Appraiser ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 144 do AE RE 145 Run Chart and Average Cart 146 Normalized Individuals Chart by Part Appraiser and by Appraiser Part cccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 WHhIskers Caca 148 X Y P
338. on of df from a row 1 1 is used for gm gt 20 gm 3 df gm 1 x is a Stability and Bias When we choose a calibration frequency of say every 6 months it is in the assumption or hope that the gage calibration will remain stable for that length of time A Stability Study verifies this assumption to see if it is true Plotting a control chart of calibration for a particular reference standard does this For example we could check a 1 inch gage block 3 180 times and do this once a week for 25 weeks or once every two weeks for 50 weeks Automotive requirements call for a minimum of 25 data points to establish stability During the study adjustments are not usually made unless there is an instability signal Instability signals include 1 point out of limits 2 points out of 3 beyond 2 3 of a limit or 7 points in a row on the same side of the central line Some industries use 8 or 9 points ina row See one of the references on statistical process control SPC for more information The X bar or X chart detects changes in bias If these charts are stable it means the bias did not change and GAGEtrak can calculate the bias as long as you are able to enter a reference value for the reference standard or retained sample that was used If the chart shows a shift or drift in bias the amount of change estimated visually is the Stability contribution to uncertainty Note if bias was not stable the estimate of bias in th
339. on or the Back button to reenter the installation information Cancel 15 Click Next to begin the installation When it s finished you ll see this screen GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 231 GAGEtrak 6 6 Installation 1 Database Location 2 Demonstration Installation 1 Database Location The setup will prompt the user for a default location for the database If the file G_Conect Ini is in the same directory as the Setup Exe the settings in the Ini file will be used for the database location IF You purchased a multi user license each user should select the same database location for each workstation The user can still change databases or use multiple 16 Click Finish If additional files are required for GAGEtrak 6 7 to run they will install now Follow the instructions on your screen to install any additional files Please note that Technical Support is not available for the creation of your client server database After You Install GAGEtrak If you re upgrading from a previous version of GAGEtrak you will need to run the Data Transfer Utility before you begin using the program Please see Appendix A Data Transfer Utility for complete instructions If you re using GAGEtrak in a client server environment first follow these steps to configure it with your MS SQL database Administrator Installation To complete the administrator setup follow these steps Note You will nee
340. or this task However if you have a specialized backup product Such as Colorado Backup Zip Drive or another network backup utility you can use that product instead GAGEtrak s Backup Restore utility works only with MS Access databases If you are using MS SQL you must use backup and restore utilities designed for SQL See your System Administrator as these are not included with GAGEtrak GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 277 Backing Up Data Click on the Data Tools icon in the main menu then click on the Backup Restore button The Data Backup window will appear as shown below E Data Backup he Manual Automatic Create Calendar Event Select Manual Backup to select the name of the backup file or to backup a database other than the current database Select Manual Restore if the backup was created with Manual Backup or to restore the database to a specific location Manual Restore From this window you may choose Manual Backup Automatic Backup or Create Calendar Event by clicking on the appropriate tab Manual Backup Choose Manual Backup if you wish to specify the name of your backup file or to back up a database other than the one you are currently using To start the backup procedure click on the Manual Backup button You will be prompted to choose a name for the zip file now the dialog box shown below will appear Choose a name for the Zip File Look in E CyberMetrics Corp 3 OO G
341. or Bold Cancel Close Description Item number that corresponds with the User 1 20 label The default Data Type for Gage Custom labels is Text Additionally the field information for the fields can be changed to accept a date value or can be changed to a list box generated From Table or Custom List input The following form will appear when Listis selected from Data Type ES Build List for User Define field Choose What Type of List to build From Table Custom List Select a Table Select a Field Add Items to list Note Each added item should be separated by example itemi ltem2 etc Select the drilldown button to the right of the Field Attribute field so that the application updates the field based on the Data Type selection Text that goes in the function field The text that will appear on the form if no modifications were made to the label The weight appearance of the font To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu Settings Forms Captions Form captions allows for customizing what appears on the top left corner of a form when it becomes active ES Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface X Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Form Name
342. or Guide 329 Select report tables Which Tables do you want in your Query Database Tables Selected Tables Calib_Defined CalibFormulas Calibration Header Calibration Measurement Calibration_Procedure_Linl Calibration_Scans Calibration_Standards CertStatHist CHArchive Ni LN Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt En 4 Select Report Fields Choose the fields you need for your label from the list of all es EE the fields in the selected table When you are done click Finish to edit your label in the report editor select report fields E Which fields do you want in your query EP You can choose any field from your previously selected tables Selected Tables Calibration_Measurement hd Available Fields Selected Fields Calibration _Header Gage_ID Calibration_Header Calibration Calibration_Measurement Gag Calibration_Measurement CM_ Calibration_Measurement CM_ Calibration_Date Calibration_Time Gage_Standard_ D Minimum Nominal lt The Label Wizard automatically generates your data source SQL statement and arranges all the labels and fields on the Details section of the designer canvas Note Sometimes the height of the Detail section is greater than the label height set for your label printer Remember that the height value is in twips and 1 inch is equal to 1440 twips Therefore a 6mm label about 1 4 would be approximately 340 twips 330 Repo
343. or a laboratory measurement involves deciding which uncertainty contributors are to be included and listing them on a form called an Uncertainty Budget or error budget This form combines all the contributors for you 170 using RSS root sum square addition and calculates Expanded Uncertainty for use on certificates or test reports Uncertainty Setup Sub tab The function of this sub tab is to help you make decisions about which Uncertainty Contributors to include on the Uncertainty Budget 3 Linearity Bias and Uncertainty ose E Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No Gage ID COMPARATOR o Part No 10 221 3 o Gage Desc 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Front Uncertainty Setup Uncertainty Budget Type Statistical Uncertainty Contributor Type Plus or Minus Probability Disribution Based On df Include Linearity Linearity amp Bias corrected amp TE Rectangular Maximum Residual 20 9077 Yes Only Bias corrected 0 975 Rectangular Maximum Residual 20 9077 Nol Uncorrected A 1 1 Rectangular Maximum Residual 20 9077 Nol Bias corrected or not 0 05736525 Normal 1 Std Err of Avg Bias 59 Yes w resolution A 0 Rectangular From Gage Table Infinite Yes Repeatability or GRR A 0 238937 Normal 1 Pooled Std Dev 55 Yes Select the items you want to be copied to the uncertainty budget Update Budget Prefil Cake
344. orage or usual location for example Tool Crib Bin 12 This field contains the gage s current location such as Assembly Dept Enter the date on which you first started using the gage In this field enter the expected or actual date on which you stop using the gage Usually this date is at the end of the gage s useful service life typically 5 10 years or at the expected date of major overhaul or maintenance This field contains the supplier code or name of the gage supplier If you plan to use GAGEtrak s supplier records enter the supplier ID code in this field not the supplier name The drop down list box for this field contains information that you entered in Supplier Entry Enter the actual purchase price or build cost of the gage In this field enter the date on which you purchased or first used the gage This field stores any other data you need to track Select or enter the manufacturer of the gage this field creates its own list as you enter different manufacturers so you can later just select from the list This field also creates its own list as you enter different gage owners Field Button Name Issue Return Button Clone Gage Button Graph Button Calibration Button Attach Standards Attach Procedures ES Gage Entry Description To loan this gage out and or return it click this button Click Clone Gageto create a new record based on the current record If you want to see an accura
345. orded about the calibration will appear in this field As Found The condition of the gage before calibration or adjustment In for in tolerance Out for out of Condition tolerance or New for a new instrument that has not been calibrated before Account No An account number or other tracking number associated with the cost examples include a job purchase order invoice or customer number Drilldown Button Select this button to view the Calibration Entry for this gage Pass This field tells you whether each calibration was successful Type A description of the type of calibration performed will appear in this field Action Required Any action that may be required such as send out for repair Calibration The final calibration status Passed Failed Repaired or Limited Status Certificate No The certificate number issued by the outside calibration provider or your company Gage Entry Procedures In the Gage Entry Procedures screen you can link calibration procedures to each gage The Procedures screen has three additional tabs The Procedure Text tab displays the text of the attached procedure and looks similar to the following ES Gage Entry gt Information Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances N Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Procedure Text Procedure Image Procedure Attachment Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 Procedure DIAL DIGITAL AND VERNIE
346. orm the title bar shows the form s name Gage Entry in the above example Click the title bar to drag the form to a new location Menu Bar Located above the title bar the menu bar usually has menus for File Edit View Format Records Bookmarks and Help Click on a menu title and a list of commands will appear 28 Some items may not be available they appear gray If commands are unavailable you can t use them in Form view Control Menu Icon Click on this icon located to the left of the name on the title bar to change the window s size and location Double click on it to close the window Control Menu Icon in Gage Entry 3 Gage Entry Record Selector Bar You can use the record selector bar a tall rectangular bar located on the left side of the form to select the entire record for copying or deletion No record changes have been made record is not selected for copying or deletion Gage Entry d Information Record has been selected for copying or deletion Gage Entry Information If a record has been modified a pencil icon appears on the bar E Gage Entry F Informatiori Click on the bar to save your changes Datasheet View of Records Datasheet View table view allows you to see many records at once Because of this they can be a more efficient interface for adding or modifying your records Datasheet View operates like a spreadsheet program Each row represents a record and each column
347. ou can use the Select All Records command from the Edit menu to select highlight all open records so that you can work with them as a group For example you can select all the records in one table and copy them to a spreadsheet or word processing document Edit Filter Sort In addition to sorting you can enter a criteria expression to find only those records that match your specific conditions From the Records menu select Edit Filter Sort 1 Gage Master EntryFilterl Filter REEN Gage Master Gage SN Asset Mo Field RIE sort Ascending Criteria or Enter criteria expressions into the Criteria cell row and optionally into the or cell row If you re using field names in the criteria expression choose only those fields displayed in the field list you must spell the field names exactly as shown Examples Field If You Enter GAGEtrak Will Find Gages with the description Caliper Description Caliper Or Calipers or micrometers Micrometer 3 2 2009 Gages due on March 2 2009 NextDue Between 3 1 2009 Gages due between the 1st and 31st of March And 3 31 2009 2009 Current_Location In QC Lab Gages located in the QC Lab or in Receiving Receiving Current Location Not QC Lab Gages that aren t located in the QC Lab NextDue lt Date 30 Gages overdue by more than 30 days Date represents the current date Year Order Date Gages due in 2009
348. ou open this module Column Description Uncertainty Select the type of measurement error to be included or type in a new one Contributor Type Choose Type A if the Plus or Minus value will be based on statistical observations Choose type B if this is based on certificates or experience Plus or Minus Enter the Plus or Minus variation caused by this contributor Probability Select a Probability Distribution from the drop down list or key in a new one See Background on Distribution Probability Distributions below Divisor GAGEtrak will fill this in if it recognizes the Probability Distribution You may change it See Background on Probability Distributions below Sensitivity Coefficient If the Plus or Minus value is in the proper units and applies directly then use the default value of one If the units must be converted or adjusted insert the proper multiplier here For example the Plus or Minus value might be in temperature units and you wish to use length and the Column Description coefficient of thermal expansion for this material to convert to millimeters Uncertainty This is the standard uncertainty or standard uncertainty times the Sensitivity Coefficient It will Contribution appear when you click on the Calc button You cannot change it DF For Type A items insert the Degrees of Freedom here If unknown you may leave it blank blanks will be treated as infinite Degrees of Freedom for Type B items are Inf
349. ound Condition Calibration Status Interval Adjustment Method Pass Findings Est Costs Cost Hours Account No Certificate No gt Uncertainty Coverage Factor k Deg of Freedom Temperature Humidity Pressure and Other Description Choose the condition of the gage before calibration or adjustment Select In for in tolerance Out for out of tolerance or New for a new instrument that has not been calibrated before Prior to calibration all test points of the instrument must be within tolerance to have the As Found Condition field set to In You need this information only if you ve chosen Auto Adjust Calibration Frequency for this gage see the System Administrator s Guide for details Select the final calibration status Passed Failed Repaired or Limited This is non editable field based on the Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval selection made for this record in Gage Entry Calibration Schedule You must check this box in order for the program to automatically calculate the next calibration due date Calibration Frequency Calibration Date Note The calibration Status field will disappear and cannot be edited once the calibration record has been passed Use this memo field to describe any other pertinent information such as visual inspection notes You can scroll through this field if you need more room for text Note Your certificates of calibration will include this field Project
350. ow Height column s Column Columns so that it is always visible even when you re scrolling to the right Record Menu The New Record option will automatically create a new record Use this command to quickly sort by the currently selected field s by either ascending A Z or descending Z A order Quick Filter Use this command when you need to quickly find records based on a illa simple search In addition to sorting you can enter a criteria expression to find only those records that match your specific conditions Advanced Filter Use this command when you need to find a particular record or group of records This command lets you search on any field or combination of fields in a form Edit Filter Sort This feature allows a user to setup specific filter sort queries Show All Records Choose this command to disable any previous filters and see all records Bookmarks Menu Add to Bookmarks Allows a user to create a quick go to for the currently viewed gage by placing the gage ID with in the Bookmarks tree and or within a particular folder 54 Manage This feature is similar to a card rolodex in which folders can be created Bookmarks to hold various gage information Items within the Bookmarks tree can be dragged and dropped within the tree structure and or Renamed or Deleted Help Menu To see the Help file s table of contents choose Help gt Contents Tip of the Day View a useful procedure or perform
351. ox to the right This places the fields in your report gt Add field to selected list gt gt Add all fields to selected list lt Remove field s from selected list lt lt Remove all selected field s When you are satisfied with your selection click on the Next button Setting Sort Order To set the order or arrangement of data in your report you have to specify which table and what field will determine this order a SOL Builder Set Sort Orders Which fields do you want to sort You can choose multiple fields from multiple tables listed below Tables Calibration_H eader y Available Fields Selected Fields a a Calibration Header Calibration Date gt gt ES lt lt Action Required lt lt Sort Order Ascending Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt You can however choose not to apply any particular order on your records within the Selected Fields list box if you do not your report will display them as they appear in your 298 original records You must also set the Sort Order to Ascending or Descending If no setting is specified the application default is set to Ascending Click on the Next button and view the SQL statement summary on the next window The following summary screen will show you the actual SQL statement that will be used to open your data source The SQL Statement This text box contains the actual SQL statement the program will use to get the data source for
352. oyee ID GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 265 Description e Gage Returned when a gage is being returned from the Gage Entry Issue Return or either the Return Gage form e Automatic Gage Due Listing sends an email automatically when the application is opened The list of gages due is based on the filter criteria created on the automatic due report e Cal Due Listing will be sent from the Calibration Due report e Gage Added to Service Request will be sent when a gage is added in Service Request Entry e Gage Status Closed sends when a gage status is changed to Closed in Service Request Entry e Service Request Closed will be sent when the Service Request Status has been changed to Closed in Service Request Entry e Calibration Passed is generated when the checkbox in Calibration Entry is checked e Gage Limited will send when the Pass checkbox in Calibration Entry or importing a Passed record from a PDA when one or more measurements have the limited checkbox checked e As Found Condition Out will send when Passed is selected under Calibration Status in Calibration Entry or importing a Passed record from a PDA e Calibration Status Change will send when the Pass checkbox in Calibration Entry or importing a Passed record from the PDA when the Calibration Status is anything other than Passed The following selection will provide the following results e Send List Send Issued
353. pe Text key Date Time key Date Time key Text Text Date Time Date Time Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Length 50 50 50 372 Field List Received From Notes Return_Cycles Part_No Issue_Tracking_Type PO_No ExpReturnDate Kit_ID Field List Kit_ID Issue_Date Issue_Time Issued_To Issued_Dept Received_Date Received Time Received From Notes Issue_Tracking_Type ExpReturnDate Field List Kit_ID Kit_Description Kit_Storage_Location Kit_Current_Location Kit_ Procedure Returned Data Type Text Text Long Integer Text Text Text Date Time Text Table Name Kit Issue Tracking Data Type Text key Date Time key Date Time key Text Text Date Time Date Time Text Memo Text Date Time Table Name Kit_ Master Description Lists attributes both primary and non key fields of every Kit Associated From Kit Entry Kit Issue Kit Return Data Type Text key Text Text Text Memo Long Integer Table Name KitGageLink Description List identification and description of a particular Kit Associated From Kit Issue Kit Issue Kit Return Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 Description Contains usage and issue records of a particular Kit Length 50 8 8 50 50 8 8 50 0 50 Length 50 50 50 50 Associated From subKitGAGE Field List Kit_ID Gage_ID Data Type Text
354. pens the data source of the report You must now create the link filter to connect the subreport to the main report To do so follow these steps 1 Select a sub report field from the sub report to link to the main report 2 If more than one table in the data source contains this field you must specify the table name in the Table field 3 Select the operator to use in comparing the fields 4 You have 3 choices to filter on based on the value selected Input a specified fixed value i e Gage ID 1234 Click on the checkbox to link on the list of fields found on the designer canvas of the master report External Criteria is used to directly compare a criterion derived from the main report to a sub report field The field must be common to the main and sub report meaning they must both exist in the main and sub report 320 for it to work because the Advanced Filter only displays field criteria that exist in the SQL of the main report 5 Add the criteria to the list 6 If you need more than one criterion repeat the first five steps using a statement connector the default is AND If you wish to use OR click on the OR button before creating another criterion 7 When you are done click OK To discard click Cancel Field Name Report Source SQL Refresh Button Table optional Sub Report Fields Operator Value Add Remove and Clear Buttons Or Button Ok Button Cancel Button
355. ployee ID A1oq Name Adam Aaron Gage ID Description Type Model No Note PG199 2 5DI02 2505 GO 260 NO GO PLUG GAGE MSM12 1 2 OD MIC 0001 MITUTOYO MICROMETER C 002 CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH DIAL 198034 C 002 CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH DIAL 198034 MSM12 1 2 OD MIC 0001 MITUTOYO MICROMETER MSMB 6 7 OD MIC 0001 STARRETT MICROMETER MSMB 6 7 OD MIC 0001 STARRETT MICROMETER MSM 8 7 8 OD MIC 0001 STARRETT MICROMETER COMPARATOR 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Comparator CTGOD2 SUNDSTRAND THREAD GAGE GO NO GO lalala aa aa ala EEE E E E Record KIKD 2 TACIE of 7 In this screen you can add a list of gages that an employee is specially permitted to use Gage selection is limited to the dropdown list Once selection is made the gage Description Type and Model No fields will automatically populate with Gage ID related information To the right of the Gage ID criteria is a Note field that can be used document special instructions etc GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 273 Staff Entry Issued Gages ES Staff Entry D information Training Photo Authorized Gages Issued Gages Employee ID Al od p E Name Adam Aaron Gage ID Description Issued Date Promised Date C 002 CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH 1 28 2004 4 24 2003 USGage
356. port Table z To Export Calibration Header Calibration Measurements Gage Calibration Standards Saved Advanced Filters Custom Field Labels Gage Records EEN Gage Part Links Each table that you can export has a corresponding filename so you don t need to name your export files The filenames are based upon the destination source tables plus the appropriate extension for the file type For example a text file from the Parts Master table will be named PARTS TXT the same file sent to an Excel file will be named PARTS XLS GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 285 The Export utility places these files in the same directory as your program file Table Name Calibration Header Calibration Measurements Gage Calibration Standards Saved Advanced Filters Custom Field Labels Gage Records Gage Part Links Gage RR Results Gage Issue Tracking Service Request Letters Service Requests Part Records Gage Procedure Links Procedure Records Calibration Results Skip Dates Standard Group Standard Group Header Gage Status Export Filename CalHead CalMeas CalStd Search Fields GageMast GageRegs GRR IssueTrk Letter SrvReq Parts ProcLink Procs RsltCode SkipDate StdGroup StdHead Status Helpful Information Every calibration record will be present in the Calibration Header table
357. port records created from Datasheet View See the description for Output To for reports under Report Commands and Functions The following is an example of the output selections for the Gage Entry datasheet Output All and Selection options are not available with the Output To option Output T mi A Data Access Page htm Shr Microsoft Excel 5 7 xds L Microsoft IIS hts Sido 7 Text Files txt B Microsoft Excel 97 2003 xls mais Microsoft Excel 1ds i All Bich Tewt Farmat f rt 4 Th Selection Send Command The Send command from the File menu allows you to send datasheets to Microsoft Outlook or any MAPI compatible mail program The output includes sub forms and sub reports The file format and appearances are the same as those described above for the Output To command See the description for the Send Command under Report Commands and Functions You can send GAGEtrak information in the following formats Output All and Selection options are not available with the Send option Text Files bet Microsoft Excel 97 2003 xls Microsoft Excel xls Rich Text Format rtf A All Selection Select Record Command Use the Select Record command from the Edit menu to select highlight the current record which allows you to work with it as a whole For example you can select a record you want to copy to the clipboard 48 Select All Records Command Y
358. ports to print part bar code labels Part Listing R amp R REPORTS Report R amp R Due Listing by These reports list parts including descriptions and uses Description Select a report by specific report for viewing printing specific R amp R Due Listing information These reports lists gages that are due for R amp R studies Reports for each R amp R study may be printed from Gage R amp R MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS Report Audit Log Detail Supplier Listing Procedure Listing Corrective Action Service Requests Group Permissions and Users MSA Summary Report STAFF REPORTS Report Gage Authorized Users KITTING REPORTS Report Kit Listing Description Lists all user activity including audit ID date time user object action data key and field old and new values This report lists your suppliers Check Enabled to see only active suppliers To see both active and inactive suppliers uncheck Enabled To see a list of calibration procedures choose this report Check the Summary Listing By Gage D box to include the gages linked to each procedure Use this report for a list of open or closed corrective action or service requests For each request the report lists the date supplier requester gage ID type of request and status This report prints a complete listing of group permissions and users and their access permission on the forms reports and controls of the program Access to th
359. ption List path of document attached to a particular calibration record Associated Form CalibAttachmentsForm Calibration Entry Attachment tab Field List ID Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time AttachPath Description Data Type Long Integer key Text Date Time Date Time Text Memo Table Name Calib Defined Description Contains user defined fields for a particular calibration record Length 4 50 8 8 255 0 Associated Form Calibration Entry User Defined tab Field List Item Label_ Text LabelFontWeight dftLabel_Text Field_Type Field_ Attrib List_ Source List_ Table List Field Data Type Text key Text Long Integer Text Text Text Memo Text Text Table Name CalibFormulas Description Lists Calibration formulas Associated From CalibFormulas Field List ID Formula_Name Formula Data Type Long Integer key Text Memo Length 50 50 4 50 50 50 0 50 50 Length 4 255 0 Table Name Calibration Header GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 349 Description Contains calibration information including measurements and results Associated From CalHistory Calibration Entry SubKitHistory Calibration Hours Graph Edit Calibration Header frmGage_Frequency_Adjusting_Interval Gage Calibration Certificate Entry Field List Gage_ID Calibration_Date Calibration_Time Calibratio
360. r Attribute Gage 0 267019 GRA for Variable Gage 02375 Reference Appraiser Reference Appraiser Value Signal Value Signal 1 0 476901 in 26 2 0 509015 in 27 3 0 544951 Mixed 28 0 566152 out 29 0 57032 out 30 8 6 0 576459 out 31 9 34 10 35 11 36 14 39 15 40 6 41 v Prefil Calc Print Record 14 4 2 gt PL gt of 2 Signal detection has the following fields and buttons Field Button GRR for Attribute Gage GRR for Variable Gage of TV of Tol 1 50 Description GRR is estimated as the range from consistently out to consistently in If the study includes Upper and Lower Specification Limits GRR will be an average range and GRR of Tol will also be calculated Assuming the attribute gage is for sorting or validation and is not used for process control the criterion is GRR of Tol of 10 or less is acceptable GRR of Tol over 30 is unacceptable The GRR that was entered on the information tab GRR divided by Total Variation Under 10 is acceptable 10 to 30 may need improvement over 30 is not acceptable GRR divided by Tolerance Under 10 is acceptable 10 to 30 may need improvement over 30 is not acceptable The Reference Values from the variable gage sorted in ascending order and the corresponding Appraisal Signal Crosstabulation Formulas OC observed count EC expected count He gt OC row x gt OC column o Y OC all OC agr
361. r Text key Type Text Estimation Double Distribution_Type Text Distribution_Factor Double Degrees Of Freedom Text DF Factor Double Table Name Menu Names Length 50 50 50 50 50 Description Lists names and identifications of every menu Associated From Form Menus Field List Data Type Menu_ID Long Integer key Default_Name Text Custom_Name Text Table Name MenuBarNames Description File menu bar custom names Length 4 100 100 Associated From MenuBarNames MenubarNamesSubMenu MenuBarNamesSubSub Field List Data Type MenuBarName Text key MenuDefaultName Text key MenuCustomName Text Table Name MenuBarNamesSubMenu Description File submenu custom names Length 50 50 50 378 Associated From Submenus Field List Data Type Length MenuBarName Text key 50 MenuDefaultName Text key 50 MBDefaultName Text key 50 MBCustomName Text 50 Table Name MenuBarNamesSubSub Description File sub submenu custom names Associated From Sub submenus Field List Data Type Length MenuBarName Text key 50 MenuDefaultName Text key 50 MBDefaultName Text key 50 SubMenuDefaultName Text key 50 SubMenuCustomName Text 50 Table Name Number_Format Description Number Format Associated From NumberFormat Field List Data Type Length NumberField Text key 50 NumberLink Text key 50 NumberFormat Text 50 LastNumber Text 50 Table Name Pa
362. r all calibrations by using the View Print Current or View Print Allbuttons at the bottom of the window The Quick Filter or Advanced Filter can be used to select the certificates to print Use this report to track your calibration costs for each gage department location account number calibrator or other criteria You must have the optional Calibration Label Kit to print labels You can print a batch of calibration labels based upon the calibration date gage ID location or description for any existing calibration records Tip Use this report to print your calibration labels at the end of the day in one batch This method eliminates the blank waste tape that prints for each label you print from Calibration Entry You ll still get an initial piece of waste tape but after that the printer adjacently ejects and cuts your labels To preview a label check the Preview box and click the label button To print a label clear the Preview box then click the label button Be sure to install the appropriate label tape in your printer To see a list of calibration history select this report Enter the dates for the time frame in question along with any other filters Check the Calibration Meas box to include the table of calibration measurements used for each calibration Use this report to provide traceability for your calibration and reference standards Description This report prints gage requirement sheets Use these re
363. ration Label 1 44 x 3L Calibration Label 1 x 1L Calibration Label 14 x 2L Calibration Label 14 x 3L Select an appropriate label size for the gage being issued When you click on the View button you will be prompted to select a label printer once you have done so the Custom Report Editor will open to show you a preview of the selected label Close the Custom Report Editor to return to Select Label Type click Print to print the issue label or Close to close Select Label Type and return to Issue Label The printed label shows the predicted Next Due date for a gage based on the frequency set for the gage unless the frequency was set to Usage or Cycles then the Est Due date will appear on the label These fields track the date and time at which the gage was returned Click the small button next to Received Date to insert the current date and time In this field enter the name of the person who returned the gage Enter the number of cycles performed by the gage usually 1 GAGEtrak adds this number to any previous cycles for the gage It uses that number to calculate the Next Due Date for gages that calibrated according to cycles The value in the Use Left field is a decreasing value based on how many times you have left to use the gage before it is due for calibration Use this field for important comments such as damages or malfunctions GAGEtrak uses the following rules to manage Issue Tracking records 1 When you issu
364. rds are all susceptible to deterioration in accuracy during use and storage To maintain accuracy in your measurements you need an ongoing calibration system Calibration Terminology Calibration Unfortunately the terminology associated with calibration control is not universally standardized Typically the term calibration means placing a gage measurement standard or test instrument into a state of accuracy Calibration is also called re calibration or reconditioning Purchased Precision Standards Companies buy these high accuracy measurement standards such as gage blocks or standard load cells from outside sources These standards represent the highest degree of accuracy in a company Usually your only form of calibration control on one of these standards Is your supplier s certification that the standard is traceable to the U S Department of Commerce s National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST formerly the National Bureau of Standards Your supplier an independent laboratory or the NIST must perform any subsequent calibrations on these standards 220 Appendix B Gage Calibration and Control Purchased Working Standards These standards aren t as accurate as the precision standards they usually don t cost as much either You use them to check calibration internally before using gages or test equipment You might calibrate these standards in house but more often you send them to an ou
365. reference value or master value functions as an agreed upon reference for the measured values You can determine a reference value by using a higher level of measuring equipment such as metrology lab or layout equipment to average several measurements Observed Reference Average Value Value 65 MMMM Bias Accuracy Linearity Linearity is the difference in the bias accuracy values through the gage s estimated operating range Observed Average lt High End Bias Observed Average AA Low End Bias Precision and Accuracy Below we ll use a bull s eye target to describe the difference between precision and accuracy Accurate but not precise Notice the readings are fairly well centered on the target but there is wide scatter Precise but not accurate You can see that the readings amp are all close to each other but are not centered on the target Precise and accurate In this the best condition the readings are all close to each other and centered on the target Precise and accurate are general qualitative terms that are not actually used in MSA studies Repeatability Equipment Variation Gage repeatability is the measurement variation that occurs when one appraiser uses the same gage to measure identical characteristics of the same parts Val Repeatability 134 Reproducibility Appraiser Variation When different appraisers use the same gage to measure identical
366. reports transferred to your database If you have modified certain reports then you will want to locate them and select Skip or if you have modified certain reports and would like to replace them with the updated report then select Overwrite on the Action drop down to the right Additionally if you would like to save the updated report with a new report name you can do this by selecting Save As from the Action drop down and providing a New Report Name in the field to the right of the report being renamed If all of the versions match from left to right then you need not run the DTU The DTU will not overwrite new reports that have been created by the user lf you are unsure about whether this utility should be run please contact Technical Support for assistance on running the report DTU Appendix B Table Definitions Key Fields A key field is a single field or combination of fields that the program uses to uniquely identify each record in a table In the tables that follow if the Data Type column contains the word Key it means that this field or combination of fields is a key field Combination Key Fields This table shows combination key fields two key fields are identified Field Name Data Type Field Size Gage_ID Text Key 50 Standard_ID Text Key 50 The following data table is acceptable at least one of the key fields is unique Gage ID Standard ID 100 10 1 Inch Block 100 10 2 Inch Block Whereas this data table
367. ressed in the industry standard zip format This means that you can use other utilities such as PKZIP PC Tools WinZip or Norton to restore your files Automatic Restore To restore your database file click the Automatic Restore button in the Automatic tab of the Data Backup window If a database file exists with the same name as the database file you are restoring you will be prompted to rename the file you are restoring DynaZlP UnZIP Warning C Program Files Cyberhdetncs Com GAGEtrak 6 5567 Samp65 mdb exists do you want to overvyrite it Yes ez to All Rename No Cancel Click Yes enter the new name of the file in the dialog box that appears and click OK to extract the file GAGEtrak will not permit you to overwrite your current database you must rename the file When extraction is complete you ll see this message successful Operation E Operation completed successfully X Note After completing the Automatic Restore operation you must attach to your restored renamed database You can do this by selecting Open Database from the File Menu and browsing to the new database file it should be in the same directory as the database file you backed up Create Calendar Event 282 Choose Create Calendar Event if you wish to create a backup reminder event for your electronic calendar application ES Data Backup Manual Automatic Create Calendar Event Select Calendar File Format liC
368. riable gage and if a Stability study shows instability of the s chart See the next table for instructions The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 Uncertainty of Measurement Type A These apply to working measurements made after calibration Uncertainty Contributor GRR or its components EV AV and INT Stability of the gage Consistency of the gage Details These are available in GRR studies In this version of GAGEtrak the Probability Distribution is Normal 1 Other sources or old printouts may require a Divisor of 5 15 Include this item when a Stability study shows instability Use the maximum shift or drift that occurs on an X bar chart This can be done by ignoring where the centerline of the limits is currently drawn on the chart and imagining the limits were centered around the variation at the beginning of the chart Then imagining that the limits were centered around the variation at the point of maximum shift or drift Use the difference between the two imaginary centerlines as the Plus or Minus value The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Follow the instructions for Stability but do it with the s chart when the s chart is unstable The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 General Uncertainty Contributors Type B These apply both to uncertainty of calibration and uncertainty of measurement 176 Uncertainty Contributor Reference Standard Temperature Difference Paral
369. rmation To view the Audit Logging select Audit Log from the Data Tools menu The Advance Audit Trail is automatically permanently enabled if you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak This is not an editable option Enter how many days worth of audit trail records you want to keep GAGEtrak will automatically purge and delete actions older than this value For example enter 7 to keep a week s worth of Audit Trail data Enter 0 if you want to keep a comprehensive audit trail record If you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak all audit trail records are retained permanently in this case this option is grayed out to show that you cannot change it GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 253 Field Button Name Description Electronic Check this box to require users to login before signing any record Signature Login If you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak electronic signatures are automatically permanently enabled this option is grayed out to show that you cannot change it Do Not Archive The selection of these options dictates how calibrations are to be archived If the Do Not Archive Unsigned or Unsigned Calibration checkbox is NOT checked then the Do Not Archive Unapproved Calibration Unapproved checkbox should be unchecked You can however just archive Unsigned Calibrations Calibration Likewise if the Do Not Archive Unapproved Cali
370. rrectedPlusMinus Single 4 Setup_LinBiasDF Single 4 Setup_OnlyBiasDF Single 4 Setup_UncorrectedDF Single 4 Setup_LinBiasinclude Integer 2 Setup_OnlyBiasInclude Single 4 Setup_Uncorrectedinclude Single 4 Setup_BiasCorrectedPlusMinus Single 4 Setup_ResolutionPlusMinus Single 4 Setup_GRRPlusMinus Single 4 Setup_BiasCorrectedDF Single 4 392 Field List Setup_ResolutionDF Setup_GRRDF Setup_BiasCorrectedInclude Setup_ResolutionInclude Setup_GRRInclude Budget_Uncert_Row1 Budget_Type_Row1 Budget_PlusMinus_Row1 Budget_Prob_Row1 Budget_Divisor_Row1 Budget_SensiCOE_Row1 Budget_UncertCont_Row1 Budget_DF_Row1 Budget_Uncert_Row2 Budget_Type_Row2 Budget_PlusMinus_Row2 Budget_Prob_Row2 Budget_Divisor_Row2 Budget_SensiCOE_Row2 Budget_UncertCont_Row2 Budget_DF_Row2 Budget_Uncert_Row3 Budget_Type_Row3 Budget_PlusMinus_Row3 Budget_Prob_Row3 Budget_Divisor_Row3 Budget_SensiCOE_Row3 Budget_UncertCont_Row3 Budget_DF_Row3 Budget_Uncert_Row4 Budget_Type_Row4 Budget_PlusMinus_Row4 Budget_Prob_Row4 Budget_Divisor_Row4 Budget_SensiCOE_Row4 Budget_UncertCont_Row4 Budget_DF_Row4 Data Type Text Single Single Single Single Text Text Single Text Single Single Single Text Text Text Single Text Single Single Single Text Text Text Single Text Single Single Single Text Text Text Single Text Single Single Single Text Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Fie
371. rs when two Rectangular distributions combine to form a third distribution An example would be summing a pair of dice Choose this distribution when you believe a distribution is not quite Normal Enter the Plus or Minus value as one half the difference between the extremes GAGEtrak will choose a Divisor of 6 2 449 U Shaped Distribution Choose this when you believe that the extremes are more likely than values at the center An example would be temperature of solid objects when controlled by a thermostat The variation will resemble a sine wave when viewed on a time scale and will produce a U shape when viewed as a distribution Enter the Plus or Minus value as one half the difference between the extremes GAGEtrak will use a Divisor of 2 1 414 Background on Uncertainty Contributors The following are not complete lists Uncertainty of Calibration Type A Uncertainty Details Contributor Linearity Use the maximum residual as a Plus or Minus value This means the maximum of observed value minus the reference value minus any systematic error The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Bias Use the Standard Error of the Average Bias The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 Resolution Use the smallest increment by which a measurement with this gage could increase or decrease The Probability Distribution is Rectangular If you prefer to use half of the resolution enter a multiplier of 0 5 in the Sensitivity
372. rsion Nested ANOVA Description This field shows the date of the study defaults to the current date Using the drop down list box select the ID of the gage This field shows the name of the gage or measurement device Select number of appraisers to be used for Prefill Select number of trials to be used for Prefill Select number of parts to be used for Prefill Select ANOVA preferred Long AIAG or Short AlAG Refers to the Measurement Systems Analysis Reference Manual published by AIAG Use Version 4 for new studies Existing Version 3 studies may be updated for new features by changing to Version 4 Updates are reversible Appears only when ANOVA study type is selected Select if trials are non replicable 140 Field Name Approved Comments Number Format Co Part No Part No Part Desc Characteristic Specification Limits 6 Sigma Proc Var Pp or Ppk Target Row Name EV AV INT GRR PV Number of distinct categories R bar UCL R Study Variation Total Variation TV Description Select when study is approved Enter any comments you wish to note Select the format you want for calculations You can enter your internal company part or job number in this field Select a related part number such as the customer or supplier part number The description or name of the part appears in this field Enter the characteristic that you re evaluating in the study Be sure to enter the minimum a
373. rt Editor Hew Report mE DRAR 402 A bB E i A abl KA g oh IBS mi iol HASO Design Preview 4 we of plorer ERE MainReport H Detail Gage ID Calibration Date Gage ID CHA Before CH After Property ToolBox Detail Be aj Mame Detail BackColor C BackStyle 0 ddBkTransparel CanGrow True Selected Detail Section On some systems the Detail section height will expand to allow most of the labels and fields to be viewed Remember that the Label Wizard automatically puts all available labels and fields on the designer canvas one set label and field at a time If you think that there may be more fields than can be viewed because the section height is not large enough just adjust the height value to a large enough value to view all of your fields for starters try a height of 7000 Note Make note of the height value in the Details section because you will have to revert to it after the label design is complete Once all the labels and fields are visible you can drag them anywhere on the canvas you wish GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 331 Click the Preview tab to view your label to make sure all your data fits within the label area Be sure to change the height of the label back to the value it had before you extended the height of the label Hd Report Editor New Report File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help A mm Eu A B MainReport Detail Property
374. rt_Master Description Contains attributes of every part record Associated From Edit Part Record Parts Parts Master Entry Parts Measured SubForm Field List Data Type Length Gage_ID Text 50 Part_No Text key 50 Description Text 50 Operation Text 50 Drawing_No Text 50 Drawing_Date Date Time 8 Change_Level Text 50 Change_Date Date Time 8 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 379 Field List Data Type Length Insp_ Procedure Memo 0 User_Defined1 Text 50 User_Defined2 Text 50 Table Name Part Meas With Gage Type Description Relates parts measured with by a particular Kit Associated From Parts Measured SubForm Field List Data Type Length Kit ID Text key 50 GM_Type Text key 50 Part_No Text key 50 Table Name Proc Attachment Description Associated From Field List Data Type Length ID Long Integer key 4 Procedure_Name Text 255 AttachPath Text 255 Description Memo 0 Table Name Procedure Link Description Procedure Link for a particular Gage Tasks Associated From Calibration Entry Procedures Gage Master Entry Procedures Field List Data Type Length Gage_ID Text key 50 Procedure_Name Text key 50 Table Name Procedures Description Maintenance procedure information Associated From Calibration Entry Procedures Edit Procedures Gage Master Entry Procedure SubForm Procedure Entry Field List Data Type Length Procedure_Name Text key 50
375. rtridge installed on your label printer Use this report to see a comprehensive gage report including record details For a complete list of gage issue history use this report Use any of these reports to print a pre designed label Make sure the right printer cartridge is installed before selecting the print button Select a report by specific report for viewing printing specific information OPEN CALIBRATION REPORTS Report Calibration Due Listing by Calibration Schedule by Calibration Work Order Description Select a report by specific report for viewing printing specific Calibration Due Listing information You can sort the list by several different fields such as Gage D Important The Calibration Due Listing report lists only gages that you assigned as Active status ID 1 in Gage Entry Also reports with a calibration frequency of Usage or Cycles that are not past due for calibration will present an asterisks to the right the Next Due Date denoting the date as an Estimated Due Date Select a report by specific report for viewing printing specific Calibration Schedule information If you have a large gage inventory with a variety of calibration frequencies it s difficult to plan your workload This powerful report makes this task easier by helping you predict calibrations that are due during a specific time frame It builds a temporary schedule for each gage and then sum
376. s Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Procedure Text Procedure Image Procedure Attachment Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 Record 14 4 1 gt gt of 1 Record 14 4 f 2 gt pip of 47 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field OLE The image associated with the procedure is displayed in this field View Print Button The Procedure text and the attached OLE image will open up in a new window for viewing printing Finally the Procedure Attachments tab displays any files attached to the Procedure Please note that you will not be able to add any attachments to Procedures in this tab Attaching or editing already attached files can only be done in Procedure entry This tab is only for viewing and printing the attached files ES Gage Entry gt Information Schedule Standards History Procedures Parts Additionals Issuances Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Procedure Text Procedure Image Procedure Attachment Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 File Description Record OO ST 10 ip o 1 Record KEK 2 gt pip of 47 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Descriptio
377. s INT Gage Repeatability and Reproducibility GRR Gage Repeatability and Reproducibility is the RSS root sum square sum of the equipment variation appraiser variation and interaction Usually referred to as GRR or GR amp R or Gage R amp R Part Variation PV The part variation is the part of the total GRR study error that is due to the parts being measured Total Variation TV The total variation is the RSS root sum square sum of the gage repeatability and reproducibility including interaction if available and the part variation Total variation is an estimate of process variation that can be used when process variation is unknown Illustration of Gage Errors The chart below illustrates several terms we have discussed The three zigzag patterns show the pattern of Part Variation PV as measured by three different Appraisers These patterns vary a lot more than the control limits which is good the control limits show the variation to be expected due to Repeatability EV if we always measured the same part 136 The three patterns are not close in height which is an error called Reproducibility AV The three patterns are not close in shape which is an error called Appraiser x Part Interaction INT AVERAGE CHART BY PART MSA Menu Select MSA from the Main menu to access the MSA menu e Main Menu Main Records MSA Setup Data Tools Report Queue Gage Reports Open Calibration Reports
378. s a good foundation for a future regional class Regional Classes Having some basic GAGEtrak experience or having had Web training prior to attending a regional class allows you to come better prepared with questions and get much more out of the class These classes offer more opportunity for hands on learning and include a certificate of completion to allow you to provide proof to an auditor that you have received proper training from the software manufacturer Regional classes are held at our training facility in Phoenix Arizona as well as various cities around the country Class sizes are kept small in order to provide individual instruction and assistance Our talented instructors will take you step by step through planning preparation setup and successful operation of your GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software You ll also learn about advanced topics such as data import and export data filtering system maintenance system security performance tuning and more On site Training Our instructor travels to your facility at your convenience and provides training that is tailored to your specific needs On site training enables real world hands on training and can include consultation which allows you and the expert to collaborate to determine the best course of action 403 404 for your company At the conclusion of on site training you will receive a completion certificate to allow you to provide proof to an auditor that
379. s and measurements for every specific part GAGEtrak provides a Kitting feature With this valuable feature you can create a kit assign gages to a specitic kit and even track the issuance and return of kits Also GAGEtrak allows you to automatically identify gages that can be used to measure a specific part Kit Entry Information You can create a kit manually by entering all of the gages and other information required into the Kitting window You can also create kits by cloning existing kits and editing the information to make it unique gt Information Required Gage Types Required Gages History N Kit ID IE Kit Description Test Kit Storage Location 36 7 Frt CF v E Available for Issue Current Location 36 7 Frt CF Procedure Record KNKB 2 gt gt t gt of 2 Field Button Description Name Kit ID Enter a unique identifier for a Kit Kit Description Enter a detailed description of the makeup of the kit Storage Location Permanent location of a kit Current Location Location of kit right now Available for When checked that means that all Required Gage Types and Required Gages have been returned Issue allowing the Kit to be re issued Procedure Identify the procedure that describes how to use the gages in the current kit with the parts they are measuring 92 Kit Entry Required Gage Types Enter the following information about the gages and parts to be measured When selecting a Required Gag
380. s to save time when you re entering records Note Where indicated by CTRL press the CTRL key while pressing the other key Keyboard Shortcuts General Press A SO Move to the record number entry box SHIFT SPACE Select the current record Field Editing and Selection Keys Press A S O Datasheet Table Keyboard Shortcuts Press TO TAB ENTER or RGT ARROW Move to the next field Move to the last field in the current record Table view SHIFT TAB or LFT ARROW Move to the previous field HOME Move to the first field in the current record Table view DN ARROW Move to the current field in the next record 52 Menus and Commands The following is a summary of the various menus available from the menu bar including explanations of the available commands in each File Menu Close Use this command to close the current screen and return to the prior screen Select this command to output the current record s to an Excel spreadsheet word processing RTF or ASCII text file Print Preview To see the current record as it would look if printed select this command This command prints the current record performs like a screen dump Use File Send to e mail the report if you have MAPI compliant e mail Last Gages Lists the last 10 gages that a user accessed Note Gages are added to the list when the user edits a gage record uses Find to access a gage record or clicks any button on the Gage form When
381. search for and replace all or some occurrences of a specified text string including a phrase a word or part of a word For example you might want to change all occurrences of the word Bolt to Washer in a part Description field To replace data 1 Display the table or form containing the information you want to replace 2 Select the field column in which you want to replace data unless you intend to search all fields Call the Replace command In the Find What field type the text you want to find Use wildcard characters to make your search more general If you use wildcard characters you might want to confirm text replacements to ensure that they re correct see below In the Replace With field type the replacement text From the Search drop down list select Up Down or All fields If you select Up the program searches for data from current record to the beginning of the database If you select Down in the program searches for data after the current record selection If All is selected the search includes a search on the entire database 7 Set other Replace dialog box options if necessary Find What Bolt Replace With Washer Look In Description Ea Match Whole Field Search All Le 7 Match Case Search Fields As Formatted You can confirm each replacement or you can replace all occurrences without confirmation To confirm each replacement 1 Click the Find Next button to find the first occurrence of the text
382. store data calculate results and generate printed reports and charts It does not determine whether a measurement system is good or bad As the user this determination is your sole responsibility Important The technical support available for this software is limited strictly to the operation of the software We cannot provide advice or support on interpreting results or charts If you have interpretation questions please consult your customer a statistician or other qualified professional 132 Validating the Software This software has been tested validated and deemed suitable for release Calculation validations were conducted using test data with known results However you should still conduct your own validation tests using data with known results those that you calculate by hand or proven published values When comparing the software results to your manually calculated results remember that you may find differences due to rounding errors The software uses up to 17 significant digits of precision in all intermediate calculations rounding only the final results Terms and Definitions Before using the GRR Module you may want to familiarize yourself with these terms Bias The difference between the observed average of measurements and the reference value is known as bias sometimes called accuracy however accuracy is a qualitative term that should be avoided when referring to bias The reference value accepted
383. supplier Supplier Name Enter the company name of the supplier Supplier Type Use this field to categorize your suppliers by the type s of goods sold Contact Person Enter the name of the contact person for this supplier company Salutation Enter a salutation for the company contact to be used for written correspondence such as Mr Ms or Mrs Leave this field blank if you don t want to use a salutation i e Joe Smith vs Mr Joe Smith 100 Field Button Name Address City State Zip Country Phone and Fax E Mail Last Review and Last Rating Last Received and Last Rejected Enabled User Defined 1 and 2 Gages Description Enter the complete supplier address including phone and fax numbers Use this field to store the contact person s e mail address Enter the date of the last quality review and last quality rating for this supplier Enter the date on which you last received a shipment from this supplier and the date on which you last rejected a shipment from this supplier Check this box to indicate that the supplier is currently active and approved Enter any other information that you wish to track on this supplier Be sure to use these fields consistently throughout your supplier records This table lists all gages obtained from this supplier This table is not editable if you need to edit the gage information shown in this table you must do so under Gage Entry Chapter 9 Gage Iss
384. t ID FROM Calibration Header INNER JOIN Gage Events ON Calibration Header Gage ID Gage Events Gage ID ORDER BY Calibration Header Gage ID Gage Events Event ID ASC GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 305 Creating Your Layout Now that you have provided a source for your report you can now start creating your layout Note that the Fields frame is no longer empty It now contains a list of fields that you can drag and drop onto your report canvas H Report Editor Gage Listing by Status File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help You link two tables ata o Sm Me sone HAS AO time through their Design Preview E 3 iia common field it is not necessary that the maneno fields have the same 5 ReportHeader 3 F acca 4 45 PageHeader Ik name It is necessary 5 Details Mr 7 that they be of the Fields same type e g GagelD Status Gage_ID and Gage_ID Gage_SN Description GM_Type Current_Location You can drag as many fields as you can put into your canvas but remember that the canvas working area is the actual edge to edge size of your printing paper Also the top of the Page Header and the buttom of the Page Footer mark the upper and lower edges of your paper You can move the blue markers on the ruler bar to your desired edge margin this will be marked by the red dotted line running from the top to the bottom of the page The basic report format has three sections Page H
385. t record for the particular group Creating the Details As mentioned above you can drag and drop as many fields from the Fields frame as you can fit on the designer canvas Details section The Details section should be based on the paper prototype you have developed prior to using the graphics tool You can modify the row height of the section by dragging the button to the left of the row header below the Details section up or down You can also directly change the row height by entering a value in the Height property in the Properties Details frame The unit used in the program is the twip There are 20 twips per printer s point or 1440 per inch ono Tall Prope GroupHeader1 BA Be 24 TWIP By default all movement sizing and CanGrow True CanShrink False ColumnLayout False DataField ms_Code GrpKeepToget 1 First Detail height 1440 Qm KeepTogether True E a Ti height click and P ee W PE drag on bian A horizontal ET 567 twips equal one centimeter These line will appear You can also a i directly modify height by pi measurements designate the size an entering value for height in ore lt the Property ToolBox graphical drawing statements use a unit of one twip A twip is 1 20 of a printer s point 1 440 twips equal one inch and Ready A third way of resizing the row height is by putting the cursor on the bottom of the row you wish to res
386. t this is a sub report since it will not have its own page header Adding a Sub Report To add a sub report click on the SubReport button on the button bar then drag the cursor across the canvas while holding down the left mouse button to form a rectangle that will be occupied by your sub report Now that you have created a container for your sub report you must edit the link to the sub report you created earlier Click on the Edit Sub Report Link button Bto open the Sub Report Custom Properties window GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 319 First you must define the Report Source or the name of the sub report that has been pre defined w Sub Report Custom Properties Report Source Cal Due Listing by Desc hi sub Report Data Source SOL SELECT DISTINCTROM Gage Master Mest Due Date Gage_Master EstHext_Due Date Gage Master Gage ID Gage Master Gage SM Gage Haster Description Gage Master Calibration Frequency Gage Master Calibration Frequency UOM Gage Master Current Location Gage Master Storage Location Gage Master Status Gage Master GM Type Gage Master Calibrator Gage Master Calibration Hours Betrezh Gage_Master Calibrated Bu Gage Master Last Calibration_ Date Gage_Master UseLett Sub Report Link Filter Value Table Optional PO da a Sub Report Fields Ce Field pf External Criteria I After selecting the source you will be able to view the SQL statement that o
387. tandard Report Calibration History Reports Gage Detail Report Gage Event Listing Gage Issue History Gage Label 1 2W x 1L Gage Label 1 2W x 2L Gage Label 1 2W x 3L Gage Label 1 4W x 1L Gage Label 1 4W x 2L Gage Label 1 4W x 3L Each standard report starts with a filter window that allows you to select a specific group of records for the report There are a few reports such as the Calibration Due Listing report that are time based which allows you specify a From and To date range for selected criteria All reports were designed using standard Windows True Type fonts Report Commands and Functions Viewing Reports You can preview any report by clicking the View button in the filter After the report appears you can use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to view different parts of the report or use the page navigation buttons to view multiple pages of the report Use the Zoom In or Zoom Out buttons on the menu to view more or less of the report 208 Report Preview Toolbar GAGEtrak s Report toolbar contains common commands that you can use for reports Each toolbar button is described below Pint DOH a 100 Send Button Description Print To print the current report click on this button You may also print by using the keyboard shortcut dl Ctrl P To copy the current report as formatted text click on this button a Copy O Single Page To view the current report one page at a time click on this button
388. te and Zip E Mail Enter the employee s e mail address Home Pager and Enter the employee s home phone number pager number work number and extension Work Phone Ext Emergency Enter a person s name and phone number to contact in case of emergency Contact Name and Phone 269 270 Field Name Description Craft Use this field to categorize your workers by profession You can use a description such as welder or electrical engineer a code like MIG 3 or a union number combined with a classification such as 786 Journeyman or 786 Apprentice Rate Enter the employee s hourly rate Seniority Enter the seniority or other work status of the employee You could use this field to store the date that determines seniority Skill Level Using either an internal or external classification system assign a skill level to each employee You could also use this field to indicate multiple skills for your employees assigning letters or numbers for different skills SS No Enter the employee s social security number Job Title Enter the employee s official job title DOB Employee s date of birth Date Hired and Enter the date s in which you hired the employee and when the employee started his or her current Date in Job position Department Enter the primary department the employee belongs to Supervisor Enter the name of the employee s direct supervisor Shift Indicate the shift s for which this employee is available Crew Use
389. that calibration labels are printed to the P Touch printer as a specific printer For more information about the label printer please see Appendix A of the User s Manual P Touch Printer Does Not Print Labels If you can preview calibration labels but cannot print them you probably do not have a compatible version of the P Touch printer driver editor or spooler files If you can print labels from the P Touch Editor program but you get a message that your P Touch printer is not installed or recognized you may also have this problem Please visit our web site www cybermetrics com to download the current P Touch files for your operating system if you don t have Internet access please contact Technical Support to obtain these files Appendix E Training Three convenient and effective GAGEtrak training options are available to fit your needs personalized web training two day regional training and on site training Anyone involved in the implementation or use of GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software will benefit from GAGEtrak training Whether on site online or at a regional class you ll learn how to save time avoid common mistakes and get the most out of your software Web Training Web training will give you the basic tools you need to quickly get started with GAGEtrak And if the next regional class isn t quite soon enough for you a Web training session is a good way to fill the gap so no time is wasted Web training provide
390. that consistently matched This number should be within the confidence bounds for the other appraisers 95 LCL A 95 Lower Confidence Limit for the Effectiveness score Miss Rate Analysis Tab Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis o D Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 4 25 2012 Co Part No mia Gage ID MSA4 127 y Part No 10 221 1 y Miss Rate per Trial Study Effectiveness Summary A E C S ystem E C Effectiveness per trial 94 4 94 4 88 9 92 6 Effectiveness per part 83 3 83 3 83 3 False negative 5 6 5 6 11 1 PAZ False Alarm Rate per trial of acceptable parts 11 1 11 1 22 2 False positive 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Miss Rate per trial of unacceptable parts 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 Miss Rate per Part A B C System Effectiveness per part 83 3 83 3 83 3 83 3 False alarm rate 16 7 16 7 16 7 16 7 Miss Rate per Part 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 Pei Cale Print Record CURE 2 gt ol pk of 2 196 The following fields compare each appraiser to the reference value from a variable gage The system column compares the appraisers as a group to the reference values from the variable gage Miss Rate per Trial Field Button Effectiveness per trial False Negative False Positive Total Field Button Effectiveness per part False Alarm Rate Miss Rate per Part
391. the Records menu to quickly move to different records first last next previous and new Deleting Records In Form View go to the record you want to delete and click on the record s selector bar or button Then choose Delete from the Edit menu the Delete Record icon from the floating toolbar or press the Delete key on your keyboard GAGEtrak will ask you to confirm the deletion sometimes twice In Datasheet View you can delete multiple records at once Use the record selector buttons to select all the records that you want to delete and then choose Delete from the Edit menu the Delete Record icon from the floating toolbar or press the Delete key on your keyboard GAGEtrak will ask you to confirm the deletion sometimes twice Undo Changes to Fields and Records If you want to undo changes to a field and you haven t left the field either press the ESC key or select Undo command from the Edit menu If you change more than one field on a record and want to remove those changes select Edit gt Undo Current Record This will Undo all changes made to the entire record Saving Records GAGEtrak automatically saves records whenever you go to a different record or close the window but you can manually save records by clicking the record selector bar or selector button in Datasheet View You can also use Save Record from the File menu to save your records Editing and Shortcut Keys You can use these keyboard shortcut
392. the first record then hold the SHIFT key while you click on the last record This operation selects all records between the first and last records A selector button that has an asterisk on It indicates that a row is a new record position it will always be located at the bottom of the table WEIGHT STO 100 GRAMs CLASS 3 STANDARD 100 GRAMS 1622003 WEIGHT STD 5000 GRAM CLASS 3 DIAL 5000 GRAM 984200 Record Selector Bar Symbols gt Current Record New Record Gai N Bak Records Selection Button This small square button is located on the upper left portion of the table just below the control menu icon Click it to select all records in the table Record Expand Contract Symbol Field This icon expands or contracts a record row to show other related tables The symbol is to 66 3 expand and the is to contract gage ID history 32 OO9E SMIC Super Mic 0 1 00005 in 24972007 SS o Test Paint Type Units Minimum Nominal Masimum Ref Type Gage ID of Standard Format 1 Free rotation No free play 2 Anvil flatness 0 00007 3 Anvil parallelism A Y A inch 0 0 0 00002 Column Selector Button Each column selector button column header contains the name of the field that it represents Gage ID and Description in the example below When you click on a column header you select the entire column i e the Description column shown here 5 Gage Entry SRE Description Re
393. the gage s accuracy compared to its calibration standard use this box to restrict the gage to limited use meaning that it shouldn t be used for measurement of this particular range This field stores the Gage ID of the reference standard which is important for traceability back to a specific standard You can manually enter the standard s gage ID or select from a list of available standards shown below by clicking the small button on the right of this field The list shows only those gage records that have X s in their Gage Entry Ref Standard checkboxes E Select Gage ID of Ref Standard ID Description Dee Due Date Past MSGB1 GAGE BLOCK SET 81 PC 1 2 2006 S N 1234 1 INCH GAGE BLOCK 1 1 2003 S N 1234 2 1 INCH GAGE BLOCK 1 10 2003 S N 2345 2 INCH GAGE BLOCK 4 8 2005 S N 3456 3INCH GAGE BLOCK 8 15 2005 Note A gage cannot be selected if a Reference Standard is past due for calibration Gage ID of Standard is limited to Reference Standards with no Due Date or Next Date Due in the future Calibration schedule next due date If you select the reference standard from the list the uncertainty value will automatically display If you manually enter the standard then enter its uncertainty value here You can obtain this value from the manufacturer it s expressed in units such as percentage 0 5 proportion 0 005 or measurement 0 0001 inch You must enter units of the same value otherwise the calculated
394. the list exceeds ten 10 records the first record will be eliminated and if the user selects a gage record from the list of ten records the form will automatically find and display that record gage To quit GAGEtrak choose File Exit Edit Menu Cut CT RL X Select Edit Cut to remove the selected text from a field or a selected record a copy Is placed in the Clipboard Copy CTRL C To copy the selected text or record into the Clipboard choose Edit Copy Paste CTRL V This command is active only when you cut or copy something use it to paste the cut or copied text at the location of your cursor Delete Choose Edit Delete to either delete the selected text from a field or to delete a record select the record first Select Record Use this command to place the current record in a selected state for copying deleting or printing Select All Records To select all records for copying deleting or printing Select this command to search for a record based on the current field Replace To perform a Find and Replace operation from the field in which your cursor is located View Menu Choose this command to see the record in Form view Datasheet To see records in Datasheet view select this command Format Menu These commands are active only in Datasheet view Use this command to change the Table view font doesn t affect Form view Row Height To change the height of all rows select Format R
395. these criteria Define more criteria a o F And Or Add to List Field Condition Value GAGE BLOCK Click the Add to List button The criterion is then shown in the upper portion of the window Find records that match these criteria GM_Type like GAGE El Define more criteria Ard Or Field Condition Value eeen EE Te You can add unlimited criteria by selecting the appropriate join condition of And or Or You can edit directly in the criteria field provided you know the right syntax j i L j 5 AN ae pe pr bai Li Me al Advanced search Ac 2 aes UUE To ratio hls Week al AAA f Fie A Fr A el A S E fot o thw ee _ NE km mj FE ANN Ke ed FN el TNS Se en Ge LLS Se nid 2 E cs m a a e Y E e En e A A Find records that match these criteria 7 And GM_Cost gt 40 Define more criteria And Or Field Condition Value After entering all criteria click the Find button GAGEtrak will ask if you d like to save your search GAGEtrak 6 7 Do you wish to save the current search No Click No to proceed to your filtered records click Yes to save your search 42 Advanced Search ave Enter search name Enter a name for your search and click OK to save the search Your filtered records will be displayed Status Active Ref Standard NISTNo ls Gage S N Asset No Model Na Type Unit of Meas Change Level 7
396. this field to track the name of the crew s to which this employee either belongs or is qualified Staff User 1 and Staff User 2 to belong Use these two fields to store any additional employee related information Staff Entry Training ES Staff Entry Training Photo Authorized Gages Issued Gages Employee ID M1 Name Adam Aaron Education Cormell Electrical School Related Experience Industry Experience Management Experience 2 Years Shift Leader Training History Description Start Date Certification Expirat Certification Comments End Date School Cost Status Welding 11 22 2002 11 22 2002 Welding Tech Instil 300 Completed 11 22 2002 Welding Cert 0 Record KIKD 7 ICC of 7 Use the Staff Entry Training screen to keep track of the employee s current and continuing education The table below describes the fields in this screen Field Name Education Industry Experience Related Experience Management Experience Training History GAGEtrak Calibration Management Administrator Guide 271 Description Give a basic description of the employee s education for example BS Mechanical Engineering Enter the employee s work experience for example 6 years Inspection Technician Grade II Use this field to track any other useful experience such as AutoCAD 3 dimensional wire diagramming Enter any management experience that
397. ting Calibration Frequency Setting Significance must be between 0 never change and 1 always change Gage Types listed here have one or more gages specified in Gage Entry to use method A3 If a Gage Type has more than one Calibration Frequency in use it may appear more than once Calibration Frequencies that were used to calculate a current due date are listed here for each listed Gage Type This is a new calibration frequency to be used for the next due date GAGEtrak will recommend a change if the Significance is below the Significance Threshold The risk probability that the Recommended Change will turn out not to have been necessary Check here if you want to change the Calibration Frequencies in Gage Entry effective immediately This will not change the current due dates but will affect future due dates starting with the next calibration Since currently scheduled calibrations will continue at the old calibration frequency the Recommended Change will be updated in the future and could possibly revert to no change If that happens you will be asked during each calibration to approve the latest recommended change ona gage by gage basis You will also be asked in the event that you have not checked Pre Approved If there are multiple recommended changes because more than one frequency is in use you will be asked to confirm that GAGEtrak is suggesting the right one When you are asked you will also have the opportunity to
398. ting service Insurance Amt This field displays the total of all insurance amounts from the gages listed below The original insurance amount is derived from the Cost field in Gage Entry The field on this form is not editable but original Gage Entry costs can be modified below for insurance purposes Field Button Name Type Service Supplier Status Completion Date Comments Gage ID Next Due Date Completion Date Insurance Amt Status View Print Description Select the type of the document to use such as Calibration Repair Calibration amp Repair or Corrective Action Notice For directions on adding new documents and editing service request letters or corrective action request forms see your System Administrator s Guide If the application is set to change the status of a gage when that gage is added to a Service Request Type is used to determine the new status of that gage Refer to the Setup General Service Request Options section for more information Select the supplier code of the service provider this might also be a department within your own company This field lets you close the service request whether the status of the individual gages listed below is Open or Closed Closing a service request will also close any Open gages attached to that service request If the application is set to change the status of a gage when it is returned from a service request that status change will be made
399. tings Interface Gage Custom This feature allows the attaching of many different file formats for Calibration Entry The application will use the registered application for that extension to determine what application will be opened ES Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals Gage ID C 002 Jescription CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH File File Description ser 11 J J J J User 15 J J J Use Use i T r i r ser 16 r r er er2 C Procedure doc mad Microsoft Word Document Cad The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field User Defined These fields can be used to store additional information and can be customized the label names changed and the Data Types altered in Setup Settings Interface Gage Custom File Path of file attachment Selection of files is made easier by selecting the drilldown button to the right of the file field that brings up a Locate File To Attach dialog box for file selection Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file File Description D
400. tside source for calibration Test Equipment The term test equipment covers a variety of measuring equipment sometimes including working standards You use this equipment to check your products and manufacturing processes Check test equipment for calibration before you use it even if it s brand new Test Materials This term refers to all consumable standards such as films or liquids used in calibrating test equipment Since variability in these materials can affect your measurements and calibrations suppliers often give you data on the test material s variation Gages or Gauges This term applies to many measurement inspection devices including fixed limit attribute or go no go and variable actual numeric measurement gages Usually your company calibrates this type of equipment internally using either working or precision standards You can calibrate fixed limit gages by using working standards or dimensional layout For simplicity throughout this manual we use the term gage to refer to all measurement equipment Inventory and Classification To begin your gage control system take an inventory of your gages During this initial inventory usually the most difficult determine origins locations types and calibration schedules then assign identification numbers and collect additional information to classify your gages In the past companies manually recorded this information on gage record cards that
401. ttings ES ForeColor Grid Settings Horizontal Alignment Left Vertical Alignment Top To apply a text style to an element in the designer canvas select it then choose the desired style from the drop down list at the top left of the window just above the ruler IDB Heading Arial f KEKEKEK GAD Hin 1 E 5 E GroupHeaderl Completing Your Report Layout Every report must have a page header and footer The page header contains the heading for each field of the report e report date and perhaps a page number The footer usually contains the page number and subtotals of the value fields in the report You can create titles and field labels using the label button the report editor also includes buttons that generate automatic page numbers and a date time stamp Note The Report Editor does not save your report automatically so when you are done with the report layout do not forget to save your report This can be done from the file menu option File Save or with the Save button located on the icon menu with a disk as an image 314 H Report Editor Gage Listing by Gage ID File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help Alignment Controls Len Wte HHS Design Preview m S Explorer 5 A MainReport ReportHeader E PageHeader Details 2 PageFooter A RennortFnnter 4 Description Gage_ID Status Gage_SN GM_Type Current_Location 20 Calibration_Freque
402. ucibility GRR for the Lower Specification Limit LSL GRR will appear after you enter LSL data and click on Calc TV Percent of Total Variation Tol Percent of Tolerance LSL Lower Specification Limit O zero Enter a variable measurement for at least one part that was accepted zero times out of twenty If you have more than three such parts enter the three largest 1 19 Enter variable measurements for six or more parts with acceptance counts between one and 19 out of twenty If you have more than three parts with the same acceptance count then enter them randomly 20 Enter a variable measurement for at least one part that was accepted twenty times out of twenty If you have more than three such parts enter the three smallest 202 Upper Specification Tab Field Button Name USL USL GRR USL Bias O zero 20 Description Enter the Upper Specification Limit Gage Repeatability and Reproducibility GRR for the Upper Specification Limit Attribute Gages may use different methods for upper and lower specification limits Therefore each has it s own GRR This will appear after you enter data and click on Calc Bias for the Upper Specification Limit This will appear after you enter data and click on Calc Enter a variable measurement for at least one part that was accepted zero times out of twenty If you have more than three such parts enter the three smallest Enter variable measurements for six or more
403. ue and Return Batch Mode You can issue and return gages one at a time via Gage Entry click the Issue Return button to open Issue Tracking Entry For higher volume batch mode processing of gage issues and returns use Issue Gage and Return Gage Intended for use in a gage or tool crib this feature was designed for bar coded data entry but will also work with manual keyboard entry Issue Gages ES Issue Gages Gage ID COMPARATOR ssue Date 12 16 2008 NextDueDate Ref Standard ssue Time 9 024M 6 14 2004 Type Calibration Issued To Adam Aaron Issued Dept QC Part No 10 221 1 PO No Promised Date 12 18 2008 Storage Location Final Insp Current Location Assigned Tech a xxx Received Date Received Time Received From Cycles Notes The Issue Gages fields are as follows Field Button Description Name Gage ID Select a Gage ID of a gage available for issuance A non selectable button labeled Past Due appears to the right of the Gage ID field if you have selected a gage with a calibration schedule already past due Field Button Name Next Due Date Issue Date and Issue Time Type Issued To Issued Dept Part No PO No Promised Date Storage Location Current Location Clear Form Next Gage Issue Label Description Issue Gages will generate the Next Due Date when you issue out a gage with a frequency UOM other than Usage and or Cycles unless Usage and or Cycles is due for calibrat
404. ueue Gage Reports 1 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label Open Calibration Reports _ 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label Calibration Standard Report Gage Detail Report Ml Part Reports Gage Event Listing Gage Issue History R 8 R Reports cage Label 1 2W x IL Miscellaneous Reports Gage Label 1 2W x 2L Gage Label 1 2 x 3L Staff Reports Gage Label 1 4W x 1L Kitting Reports Gage Label 1 4W x ZL Gage Label 1 4W x 3L k Mm Calibration History Reports User ID Default C Users sjordan Desktop T Demob5 mdb GAGEtrak s Help System Go to the Help menu and select Contents to open GAGEtrak s Help System Use the Search tab to find a specific term select a topic from the Contents tab or browse an alphabetical list of topics in the Index tab Floating Toolbar In GAGEtrak you can access common program functions from a floating toolbar that appears in all entry screens If you don t want the toolbar to appear you can disable it through Settings By default the toolbar is parked in the upper left hand corner just below the menu Undo bX 4 a a ab tz Wy XK Al Al CloseActiveForm Ml Repositioning the Toolbar To move the toolbar click the left side and drag it to its new location ds J Undo PK 4 34 6 44 2 1 ox BL Al CloseActiveForm Ml Information On its floating mode click one of the edges of the toolbar and drag it to the desired size Toolbar Icon Dee Add a new r
405. ular gage ID select the new record icon button and or the new record buiton in the record navigator toward the bottom of the form To return to Gage Entry from Calibration Entry click Gage Entry or the close button in the window s title bar For complete instructions for Calibration Entry please see Entering Calibration Records When you go to Calibration Entry from the main menu you can choose from calibration records for all of your gages Gage Entry Attach Standards Button ES Attach Standard Group To Multiple Gages Gage Type DIAL Standard Group The Attach Standards button allows the user to attach a standard to a gage type for every gage ID with the same identification for example Gage ID c oo2 If there is an existing type already assigned to the gage and you try to attach a new standard group to this gage record it will replace any previously attached standards that have the same standard ID as the new standard For safety measures GAGEtrak will question whether you wish to continue with the new standard attachment Gage Entry Attach Procedures Button ES Attach Procedure to Multiple Gages Gage Type DIAL Procedure The Attach Procedures button allows the user to attach a procedure to a gage type for every gage ID with the same identification for example Gage ID c oo2 If there is an existing type already assigned to the gage and you try to attach a new procedure to this gage record all gages with the selected
406. ure Name Procedure Content and an OLE Object Tab Linking and Embedding affiliated with the gage ID record View Print Button If there is a single procedure attachment associated with the current procedure and the View Print button is clicked the procedure attachment will open when clicked If there are multiple procedure attachments select the Procedure Attachments tab and select each attachment separately for viewing The Procedure Image tab contains any image associated with the procedure ES Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Procedure Text Procedure Image Procedure Attachment Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 94 OLE Record 14 lt O of 1 Record 14 4 2 gt 1 bo of 38 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Description Name Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Description The description of the selected gage will appear in this field OLE The image associated with the procedure is displayed in this field 120 Field Button Name View Print Button Description If there is a single procedure attachment associated with the current procedure and the View Print button is clicked the procedure attachment will open when clicked If there are multiple procedure attachments select the Procedure Attachments tab and select e
407. ution This Module or the Stability Module Repeatability or GRR This Module or the Stability Module Stability of the reference standard Stability Module if the reference standard is a variable gage Consistency of the reference standard Stability Module if the reference standard is a variable gage Hysteresis This is a side study similar to linearity but easy to do manually Uncertainty of Measurement Type A These apply to working use of a gage after calibration for variable measurements Uncertainty Contributors Where Available GRR or it s components EV AV and GRR Module INT Stability of the gage Stability Module Consistency of the gage Stability Module General Uncertainty Contributors Type B These may apply to both uncertainty of calibration and uncertainty of measurement Uncertainty Contributors Based On Reference Standard Certificate Temperature Difference Experience Parallax Error Experience Details about each of these potential uncertainty contributors are given a few paragraphs below in Background on Uncertainty Contributors The Type A or Type B classification depends on whether you do a statistical study A or not B Thus if you estimate stability error without doing a study it becomes Type B instead of Type A Likewise if you do a statistical study to determine the uncertainty of temperature difference it becomes Type A instead of Type B The task of determining uncertainty for a calibration
408. veRepork Aj a ae a E PageFooter AllowSplitters True el documentilarm ActiveReports Cocurr ExpressionErre MaxPages o Printwideh 9360 Rulervisible True The Report SQL Entry Main window will appear as shown with New SQL Source selected This is the only way you can make a connection to a data source so you must click OK to proceed The SQL Builder dialog box appears giving you three types of queries to choose from 296 a SOL Builder Select Query Type What type of Report Query would you like to build Simple Que Display fields from a single table in the database recommended for Single Table Reports C Advanced Query Display multiple fields from multiple tables in the database using user defined table relationships used for Reports with multiple source tables and summary queries C Direct SQL Query Allows you to manually enter the Report s SOL Report Source directly for Advanced Users Cancel Next gt gt The first two selections use a query wizard guiding you easily through the process For the third selection you must know the syntax used to create SQL commands Simple Query If you only have one data source that is only one table to use for your report choose Simple Query First identify the table you wish to use as your data source To do this click on the list box on the right hand side of the Tables field and select from the list of available tables in your database i
409. was successful This screen is different for each version but the general instructions are the same The Record Count values in the Destination tables should be greater than or equal to the Record Count values in the Source tables for those table names that appear in both 340 sections You can ignore the table names on the Destination list that have no corresponding name on the Source list these are GAGEtrak 6 5 s new tables the report control table will always be higher on the Destination side when you are transferring data from Version 3 If the Record Count value for a Destination table is not greater than or equal to the value in the corresponding Source table print the form select File Print and contact Technical Support at 480 922 7300 for assistance Click the Finish button to return to the main DTU window Sample Data Transfer from Version 6 0 Data Similar for Version 5 0 Version 4 0 Version 3 0 Data E Data Transfer Utility Record Counts Source Destination Table Record Counts Source Yersion 6 0 Tables Count Destination Yersion 6 5 Tables Count Auto Emai Let 38 Auto Ema Lit EB Caere E aeee SYST Counts for both Source and Destination tables i aa a E should be equal except where new tables have Print Finish ela ict q nich been added in Destination Tables and system Ban tables that require prefilled values Update Add Reports To Update Add Reports to GAGEtrak select the
410. will typically be due on Set the calibration frequency to the number of months from the date of the last calibration When you set the frequency unit to DOM an unlabeled field will appear next to the unit control Enter the day of the month that you want for the gage to be due on For example you wanted the calibration to be due on the 10th of the month six months from the time it was last calibrated you would set the calibration frequency to 6 the unit of measure to DOM and the day to 10 Note DOM uses the skip dates and skip days feature so the gage may not always be due exactly on the day set If you enter a day that is not in every month such as 31 then the application will use the last day of the month for months with only 30 days EOM the calculated Next Due Date changes to End of Month in which the Calc Next Due Date occurred For example 6 Eom means every 6 months but the program extends the Next Due Date to the end of the sixth month If you re using skip dates see the System Administrator s Guide GAGEtrak schedules the Next Due Date on the last working day of the month Years each year equals 365 days schedule is based on elapsed calendar years Each Use select this option if you calibrate the gage before or after each use you must manually enter your due dates Usage when using this schedule the program won t create a next due date for calibration It will however create an estimated due date based on the gage
411. y Users For more information see Security Users in the GAGEtrak System Administrator s Guide Click the Sign button to sign your calibration GAGEtrak will save the signature and stamp it with the current date and time Note The User ID is case insensitive where as the password is case sensitive E Calibration Entry Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Gage ID COMPARATOR Description 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Calibrated By Signature Signature Name Sia nature Time 5 ignature Mode Calibrated By Signature Signature Name Signature Date Signature Time Signature Mode A gt Administrator 1 19 2009 10 25 46 AM Signed 122 To unsign a calibration select the signature in the signature listing The Sign button is replaced with the Unsign button as seen below Click on the Unsign button GAGEtrak will show that the record has been unsigned and stamp the record with the current date and time ES Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Signature and Scans Additionals Gage ID COMPARATOR wl Description 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Calibrated By Signature Signature Name Signature Time Signature Mode A gt Administrator 1 19 2003 10 25 46 AM Signed Approved By Signature Signature Name Signature Date Signature Time Signature Mode gt Calibration Scans Scan Date File Path Descr ipti on
412. y there is no reason to use both measures at the same time See Interpreting number of distinct categories below for more information on how to interpret number of distinct categories and why some people might prefer one or the other The overall average range relates to repeatability Upper Control Limit for the range control chart If the range chart is out of control there will be flags on the appraiser tabs to indicate likely typos or measurement mistakes Total Variation as calculated from the parts in the study It will only match the Total Variation shown below if there was no entry in 6 Sigma Proc Var If there is an entry in 6 Sigma Proc Var it will be divided by 6 and entered here Otherwise Study Variation will be used here Total Variation represents 100 in the of TV column Row Name Description Tolerance 6 Tol If there is an entry in Pp Target then Tolerance will be calculated from the specification limits divided by 6Pp and entered here Otherwise Tolerance will be divided by 6 Tolerance 6 represents 100 in the of Tol column Column Name Description Standard Dev Standard deviation 15 not 5 150 This is used for uncertainty calculations Contribution Proportion of Total Variation This helps put things in perspective of TV Percent of Total Variation This is the primary comparison tool of Tol Percent of part Tolerance based on 60 not 5 150 An alternate comparison tool Interpret
413. y to perform actions such Messages as deleting records they don t have permission deleting If you leave this box unchecked users won t see messages but will still be unable to do anything they don t have permission to do 252 Field Button Name Logon Method Require Password Changes Minimum Password Length User Login Timeout Period Email the ff recipients Restrict Issue To Authorized Users Enable Audit Trail Remove Audit Trail Records Description GAGEtrak allows you to choose from two types of system security Windows Logon uses security from your Windows operating system when users login to Windows they can access GAGEtrak Application Logon uses security specific to the GAGEtrak program you must set up user IDs and passwords in Security Check this checkbox to require users to change their logon passwords at intervals chosen by the administrator When this option is selected you may select any Number of Days Before Password Change The default interval is 14 days Enter the minimum number of characters GAGEtrak will allow for user defined passwords Enter the number of minutes of inactivity GAGEtrak will allow before automatically logging out a user This feature is only available if Enable Security is activated Note When the time period is changed you will have to restart the program before the change in duration of inactivity period will take effect When the time has been
414. you ve received proper training from the software manufacturer Index ADOU TBO OPE ee o ro ee et eee ee ee eee ee 239 AGOE O 112 ACM o o lio 116 132 219 221 PCC IC ONAN idad 78 Action REUS A sucias artritis ini Ea 111 No o glo NCC ONS AAA cee cathe hatha cee eae cea Rasa Otte Asuna eect des 284 ALS See See E E ENE Cae MeN Cane ee eee Meee A eae AE eee ete Cen A A ee eee eet Sennen Cet ter ee 78 ANOVA COMPONENTS Of Vala CS osier aa 158 Corector raciales bd 157 o sapnneareceenneee ee eaeccneea 153 Same 0 ea 154 Appraiser Vanat Onm AV aaa idad 135 Ader al ATA Dal Ade urip EEEE ENNE EEEE EENE 275 AS Found GONGIOM ENE 112 ASSCENIMDOSR reen ida Ree en eeen ea 57 Audit D E 252 Automatic Adjustment of Calibration Frequency unsure se nenen venen e eenen venen ennen venen vennenen 248 Automatic Calibration Due Report aaneen een en eennen venen eensnr venen eenenennnen venen vnnnenvenen vennen 245 Average and Range Method annen enen erenersnerenerserrsnersnersnersnersnersnensnernnernnernnens 137 BackUD EEE 276 277 II A 277 280 A EN 277 281 282 BACKUP RE OLE tart Mere eam a are hte Mites eye Sem een Cre ee MPC Cert eee emer ete eee 276 277 Batch Bateh Galibration Fabel Rand Anstetten intekenen 212 Batch Issue and Rel Mesa dla 101 A Ror ne ee ee OR ee ee eee te ee eed ey One eee eer ee eer 78 Calculate All Due Dates icc ste sci eects catalan ened ean dt iii 287 288 Calendar SEUN A a eer A 250 Calibration I
415. you were then to pick a gage of Caliper 001 then the issue of the kit would include two gages Caliper 001 to satisfy the Required Gage list and a second Caliper to satisfy the Required Gage Type List Since it is unlikely that this is the way a kit would be issued the gages are hidden in the Required Gage list that match types in the Required Gage Type list This makes it so the user cannot accidentally select that a kit will include two gages 94 Note If the user really does want to issue Caliper 001 and a gage of type Caliper have them pick the Gage first then pick the Gage Type Issuing a Kit A kit can only be issued if gages or accessories are complete GAGEtrak with its kitting feature provides several advantages by allowing you to Issue all gages in a kit Issue gages based on several selected criteria and established rules Identify gages that are not issued and Detect gages with up to date calibration ES Kit Issue Kit ID Kit 003 Issue Date 12 17 2008 Issue Time 9 49 4M Type Issued To Issued Dept Promised Date Selection Criteria For Automatic Gage Selection Manufacturer Storage Location Current Location O Exclude Gages With No Calibration Schedule C Exclude Gages With No Study Schedule Record 14 4 4 i E of 4 Field Button Description Name Issue Date Time These fields are prefilled with the current date and time but are editable fields Type Self building

GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents